SSS 2010

This Material is for Training Purposes Only
COPYRIGHT : KLIA CONSULTANCY SERVICES SDN. BHD. 2004

All Right Reserved
1.0 DEFINITIONS
Demolition work
Any incidental to or connected with the total or partial dismantling or razing of a
building or a structure other than a building and includes the removing or
dismantling of machinery or other equipments.
Designated person
A competent person appointed by an employer to carry out any supervision or
inspection or to perform any tasks or duties as prescribed by Factories &
Machinery (Building Operations & Works of Engineering Construction) (Safety)
Regulations 1986.
DOSH
Department of Occupational Safety & Health
Employee
A person who is employed for wages under contract of service with an employer.
Employer
A person who employs another person under a contract of service. He/She could be
a principle employer or immediate employer.
Environment
The surroundings and conditions in which work being carried out .
Excavation
The removal of earth, rock or other material in connection with construction or
demolition work.

All Right Reserved
FMA 1967
Factory & Machinery Act 1967, Regulations and Rules.
Hazard
The potential to cause harm, including ill health or injury; damage to property,
plant, products or the environment; production losses or increased liabilities.
Main Contractor
A person who has entered into a contract with an owner or lessee of a property or
his agent for the purpose of carrying out any building operation or work of
engineering construction.
MS 1722:2003
Malaysian Standard 1722:2003, Occupational Safety & Health Management System.
Occupier place of work

A person who has the management or control of the place of work.
OHSAS 18001
Occupational Health and Safety Assessment Series 18001:1999.
OSH MS
Occupational Safety and Health Management System.
OSHA 1994
Occupational Safety and Health Act 1994, Regulations and Orders.

All Right Reserved
Occupier place of work

A person who has the management or control of the place of work.
Place of work
Premises where persons work or premises used for storage of plant or substance.
Plant
Includes any machinery, equipment, appliance, implement or tool, any component
thereof and anything fitted, connected or appurtenant thereto.
Risk
The probability a specified undesired event will occur and the severity of the
consequences of the event.
Site Safety Supervisor

A
site
safety
supervisor
appointed
under
Regulation
25,
Factories
&

Regulations 1986.
Sub-Contractor
A person who has entered into a contract with another contractor for the purpose of
carrying out any building operations or works of engineering construction.

All Right Reserved
2.0 WHY BOTHER WITH OSH?
Occupational safety and health (OSH) like all facets of business, needs to be properly
managed. A companys OSH system helps ensure effective control of OSH risks and
continual improvement in OSH performance. The aim is to prevent work-related
illness or injury and achieve compliance with regulations and standards.
As well as not wanting to harm people, employers also have a legal duty to ensure
the safety, health and welfare of his/her employees at work and the health and
safety of others who may be affected by the work activities (e.g. trades-people and
the public.). Small businesses may be particularly vulnerable to the effects of an
accident, as absence of a key employee or damage to an essential piece of
equipment can cause problems in meeting commitments possibly threatening
business survival. It is also the case that small firms are twice as likely to have a
fatal or major injury as large firms. Preventing the creation/introduction of hazards at
the design stage is more cost-effective than trying to put things right later.
3.0 WHAT ARE THE LEGAL PROVISIONS?

Section 15(2)(a), Part IV General Duties of Employers and Self-Employed Persons, Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994, stipulated:
Without prejudice to the generality of sub-section (1), the matters to which the
duty extends include in particular the provision and maintenance of plant and
safe system of work that are, so far as is practicable, safe and without risks to
health.

All Right Reserved
From the aforementioned Section and the Acts philosophy of self-regulations, it

is up to the employers and self-employed persons to manage safety and health
at their respective work places. They can adopt to any system they think suitable
to them as long as they can justify the definition of as far as practicable, i.e.
practicable having regard to:
the severity of the hazard or risk in question;

the state of knowledge about the hazard or risk and any way of removing or
mitigating the hazard or risk;
the availability and suitability of ways to remove or mitigate the hazards or
risk; and
the cost of removing or mitigating the hazard or risk.
Currently, most of the construction industry players in this country have their
own way of managing safety and health. Only few companies have adapted to
internationally recognized Occupational Safety and Health Management Systems.
Initially most of many of them adopted the Western Australias Occupational

Safety and Health Management System (Worksafe Plan) as their references. But
lately everyone seems to be focused on the Occupational Health and Safety
Assessment Series 18001:1999 (OHSAS 18001:1999). So far only three (3)
construction companies managed to get the certification for OHSAS 18001:1999.
Recently, International Labor Organization has introduced another Occupational

Safety and Health Management Systems, namely Guidelines on Occupational
Safety and Health Management Systems (ILO-OSH 2001).
For the purpose of this course only ILO-OSH 2001 MS will be discussed.

All Right Reserved
4.0 DUTIES AND TASKS OF SITE SAFETY SUPERVISORS

4.1 Regulation 25, Factories & Machinery (Building Operations
and Works of Engineering Construction) (Safety)
Regulations 1986
(1) The main contractor of a worksite shall appoint a part-time site safety
supervisor who shall spent at least fifteen hours per week exclusively on
safety supervision and on promoting the safe conduct of work generally
within the site.
(2) The site safety supervisor shall be a person who is competent to perform
the duties specified in sub-regulations (3) and (4), posses such
qualifications as approved by the Chief Inspector and has a minimum of
two years experience as a site foreman.
(3) The site safety supervisor shall:
(a) ensure that the provisions under the Act and any regulations made
thereunder are complied with; and
(b) Promote the safe conduct of work generally within the worksite.
(4) The duties of a site safety supervisor shall include:
(a) inspecting and rectifying any unsafe place of work;
(b) correcting unsafe practice;
(c) checking the sub-contractors work to ensure compliance with the Act
and the regulations made thereunder; and
(d) to liaise with sub-contractors safety supervisors appointed under
Regulation 26 with respect to safety of work undertaken by subcontractors.

All Right Reserved
4.2 Regulation 26, Factories & Machinery (Building Operations

and Works of Engineering Construction) (Safety)
Regulations 1986
(1) Every contractor other than main contractor in-charge of a worksite who
employ more than twenty workers to carry out work on a worksite shall
appoint a part-time contractors safety supervisor who shall spent at least
five hours per week exclusively on safety supervision and on promoting
the safe conduct of work generally by his employees.
(2) The contractors safety supervisor shall be a person who is competent to
perform the duties specified in sub-regulations (3), and has a minimum of
two years experience as a site foreman.
(3) The contractor's safety supervisor shall:
(a) ensure that the provisions under the Act and any regulations made
thereunder are complied with; and
(b) promote the safe conduct of work by other employees of his employer
employed on that worksite.

All Right Reserved

All Right Reserved

All Right Reserved
10
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994 Act 514 (OSHA 1994), provides the
legislative framework for promotion, stimulation and encouraging high standards of
safety and health at work.
The aim is to promote safety and health awareness and establish effective safety
and health organization and performance through self-regulation scheme, which is
designed to suit the particular industry or organization.
The long-term goal of the Act is to create a healthy and safe working culture among
all Malaysian employers and employees.
2.0 CONTENTS
The Act, consisting of 15 Parts, is an enabling measure which is superimposed over
existing safety and health legislation such as the Factories and Machinery Act 1967.
Provisions of OSHA 1994 complement provisions of all existing legislation and in the
event of any conflict, provisions of OSHA 1994 shall prevail.
The Act, defines general duties of employers, self-employed persons, manufacturers,
designers, importers, suppliers and employees. Although these duties are of a
general character, they are very demanding, carrying a wide-ranging set of
responsibilities.
It provides for the appointment of enforcement officers, establishment of National
Council for Occupational Safety & Health, and the formulation of organizations policy
and arrangements to secure the safety, health and welfare of people at work and
protect other people against risks to safety and health arising from activities of
people at work.

All Right Reserved
11
Powers of enforcement and investigation, and liability for offences are also clearly
spelt out.
The aforementioned provisions result in one comprehensive and integrated system

of law to deal with safety and health of virtually of all people at work, and the
protection of the public where they may be affected by the activities of people at
work.
3.0 SCOPE OF APPLICATION

The Act is applicable to all person at work in manufacturing, mining and quarrying,
construction, agriculture, forestry and fishing, utilities, transport, storage and
communication, wholesale and retail trades, hotels and restaurants, finance,
insurance, real estates and business services, public services and statutory services.
4.0 SALIENT PROVISIONS

4.1 General Duties
General Duties of employers, self-employed persons, employees and
designers, manufacturers, importers and suppliers of plant or substances are
clearly defined under the Act. The main duties are summarized as follows:
a) Duties of Employers
Section 15 Employers are responsible as far as practicable to

safeguard the health, safety and welfare of all his/her employees. This
applies in particular to the provision and maintenance of safe plant and
safe system of work.
All Right Reserved
12
Arrangements must be made to ensure safe and healthy use, operation,

handling, storage and transport of plant and substances. All employees
must be given adequate information, instruction, training and supervision
as to ensure they perform their task in a safe and health manner.
Employers must also ensure work premise, including its entry and egress
routes and its working condition and environment are safe and without
risks to health of his/her employees. Employers are required to provide
adequate welfare facilities at the work place for the workers.
Section 16 Employer must also prepare a written statement of his/her

general policy, organization and arrangements for safety and health at
work, keep it up-to-date, and bring it to the notice of all his/her
employees.
Section 17 & 18 - Employers must conduct their work activities in a

manner that will not expose other people including the public to danger
and risks to health.
Section 26 No charge can be levied on any employee for anything done

or provided to meet any specific requirement for safety and health at
work.
Section 27 No employee can be discriminated, dismissed or injured in

his/her employment or altered his position if he/she made any complaint
on any unsafe or unhealthy practice or condition; a member of the safety
and health committee; and exercised his/her functions as the safety and
health committee member.

All Right Reserved
13
Section 30 - An employer with forty (40) or more workers, or when

directed by the Director General of Department of Occupational Safety &
Health must establish a safety and health committee at the work place.
Part VIII - Employer must notify the nearest Occupational Safety and
Health office of any accident, dangerous occurrence, occupational
poi-
soning or occupational disease, which has occurred or likely to occur at

the place of work.
b) Duties of Self-Employed Persons
A self-employed person has the same general duties as described for an

employer.
c) Duties of Employees
Section 24 - Every employee must take reasonable care of his/her own

and others safety and health; cooperate with his/her employee and any
other person on safety and health matter; to wear and use all personal
protective equipment provided by the employer; and to comply with any
instruction or measure instituted by his/her employer or others on safety
and health matter.
Section 25 - Nobody shall intentionally, recklessly or negligently interfere

with or misuse anything provided or done for the interest of safety and
health.

All Right Reserved
14
d) Duties of Designers, Manufacturers, Importers and Suppliers
Section 20 -
Designers, manufacturers, importers or suppliers of plant
for use at work must ensure that the plant will be safe and without risk to
health when properly used. They must carry out or arrange for the
carrying out of test and examination, to ensure the plant is safe and provide necessary information on the use, which it is designed for and has
been tested and on what condition the plant can be operated safely and
without any health risk.
Section 21 -
Designers, manufacturers, importers or suppliers of sub-
stance for use at work must ensure that the substance will be safe and
without risk to health when properly used. They must carry out or arrange
for the carrying out of test and examination, to ensure the substance is
safe and provide necessary information on the use, and has been tested
and on what condition the substance can be used safely and without any
health risk.
4.2 Regulations
The Act provides a wide regulation-making power to the Minister. Regulations
would normally formulated on the basis of proposals submitted by the
National Council of Occupational Safety & Health or the Director General of
Occupational Safety & Health after consultation with tripartite organization.
Regulations are made to define and elaborate certain provisions under OSHA
1994, clearly.

All Right Reserved
15
4.3 Codes of Practice

Where appropriate, Regulations are supplemented by approved codes of
practice, which has a special legal status. The Minister may, upon
recommendation by the Council or Director General, approved or gazette
industry codes of practice as guidance in complying the Act.
They are not statutory requirements but may be used in criminal proceedings
as evidence that statutory requirements have been construed.
Promulgation of codes of practice can be initiated by the industries, the

Government or other interested parties.
4.4 Enforcement & Liability

The Occupational Safety & Health Officer appointed by the Government
carries out enforcement of the Act. An Occupational Safety & Health Officer
may, at any time and upon production of his certificate or authorization,
enter, inspect and examine any workplace. If he/she found a contravention of
one of the provisions of the Act or its related legislation he/she may take appropriate actions as stipulated under the Act.

All Right Reserved
16
5.0 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY & HEALTH (EMPLOYERS SAFETY &

HEALTH
GENERAL
POLICY
STATEMENT)
(EXCEPTION)
REGULATIONS 1995
Under these Regulations, with respect to provision of employers safety and health
general policy statement, Section 16, of the Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994
does not apply to employers and self-employed persons with not more than five (5)
employees.
6.0 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY & HEALTH (CONTROL OF INDUSTRIAL

MAJOR ACCIDENT HAZARDS) REGULATIONS 1996
These Regulations specifies requirements and arrangements to be complied by
relevant parties with respect to control of industrial major accident hazards.
Key elements of Part 1 are:
application of these Regulations shall cover all industry except nuclear

installation, installation under armed forces; vehicle or vessel transporting
hazardous substance to or from the site of an industrial activity and industrial
activity where quantity of hazardous substances involved is less than 10% of the
threshold quantity;
obligations of manufacturer to establish and maintain good management system
for controlling any major accident;
obligations of employee to cooperate, act in such a manner not to endanger
himself or others and notify manufacturer on any signs or indications that may
generate major accident;

All Right Reserved
17
Part II, required manufacturer to identify activity under his control and notify the
Director General of new installations and to notify of any changes in any of the
particular submitted earlier.
Part III, describes requirements on demonstration of safe operations and review of

demonstration of safe operations.
Under Part IV, requirements for report on industrial activity and preparation of
emergency plan for major hazard installation are described.
Arrangements for notification of major accidents are outlined under Part V.

Manufacturers to report major accident to the nearest Occupational Safety & Health
Office by the possible quickest means.
Part VI, elaborates on the penalty for non-compliances.
There are five Schedules under these Regulations, namely:
Schedule 1 Indicative Criteria

Schedule 2 List of Substances and Quantities
Schedule 3 Items of Information to be Communicated to the Public
Schedule 4 Industrial Installation
Schedule 5 Notification of Industrial Activity Form
Schedule 6 Information to be Included in the Report on Industrial Activity

All Right Reserved
18
7.0 OCCUPATIONAL
SAFETY
&
HEALTH
(SAFETY
&
HEALTH
COMMITTEE) REGULATIONS 1996

These Regulations explained details arrangements for Section 30 of the Act with
regards to Safety and Health Committee. In brief, these Regulations outline the
followings:
composition of the committee chairman, secretary, employers representatives

and employees representatives.
representatives from both sides must be equally represented, two from each side
if less than hundred workers employed and If more than hundred there should
not be less than from each side.
the committee to assist the development of rules and system of work;
review effectiveness of programs;
carry
out
studies
on
trends
of
accidents
and
incidents
and
make
recommendations for corrective actions;

review safety and health policy and make recommendations for revision;
inspect the work place at least once in three month;
investigate accident / incident and complaints;
meet at least once in three month;
employer to provide facilities and resources;
employer to provide training for committee members; and
duty to keep copy of minutes for a minimum of seven years.

All Right Reserved
19
8.0 OCCUPATIONAL
PACKAGING
&
SAFETY
&
LABELLING
HEALTH
OF
(CLASSIFICATION,
HAZARDOUS
CHEMICALS)
REGULATIONS 1997
These Regulations is applicable to supplier of hazardous chemicals for use at work
except materials defined under relevant Acts and Regulations.
The supplier has a duty to classify the hazardous chemicals according to the specific
nature of the risk involved and hazardous chemicals are supplied in packaging, which
comply with certain requirements and the package must be sealed.
The labeling of packages must be clearly and contained specific information. The dimension of label must comply with relevant requirements.
The supplier is required to furnish Chemical Safety Data Sheet, which must
incorporate pertinent information.
Schedules under these Regulations are:
Schedule I Hazardous Chemicals And Preparations

Schedule II Danger Symbols and Indication of Danger
Schedule III & IV Risk Phrases
Dimension of Label

All Right Reserved
20
9.0 OCCUPATIONAL
SAFETY
&
HEALTH
(SAFETY
&
HEALTH
OFFICER) REGULATIONS 1997

These Regulations are applicable to a person who acts as a safety and health officer
and employers of the class or description of industries who are required to employ
safety and health officer under the Act.
These regulations defined the qualifications required to eligible to be registered as

Safety & Health Officer. Nobody shall act as safety and health officer unless he is
registered with the authority.
Employer must notify the Director General on any appointment, termination or

resignation of a Safety and Health Officer.
Employer to provide adequate facilities and resources to enable Safety & Health
Officer performs his tasks this include provision for continuous education.
Main duties of a Safety & Health Officer are to advise employer on safety and health
matters, inspect the work place, investigate accident/incident, assist employer and
Safety & Health Committee in organizing programs, be the secretary for the Safety &
Health Committee, collect, analyze and maintain safety statistic and to submit
monthly report to employer.
Employer to take necessary actions on Monthly Reports submitted by Safety &

Health Officer.

All Right Reserved
21
10.0 OCCUPATIONAL
SAFETY
&
HEALTH
(SAFETY
&
HEALTH
OFFICER) ORDERS 1997

These Regulations described the class or description of industries required to appoint
full time Safety and Health Officer at the work place.
A full time Safety and Health Officer is required for any works of building operations
or engineering construction with contract sum exceeds twenty million ringgit.
11.0 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY & HEALTH (PROHIBITION OF USE OF

SUBSTANCES) ORDERS 1999
These Orders list out certain substances that have been prohibited to be used by the
industries.
12.0 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY & HEALTH (USE & STANDARD OF

EXPOSURE
OF
CHEMICALS
HAZARDOUS
TO
HEALTH)
REGULATIONS 2000
These Regulations are applicable to all places of work, which are within the
jurisdiction of the Act where chemicals hazardous to health are being used, except
chemicals, which are:
defined as radioactive under the Atomic Energy Licensing Act 1984,
foodstuffs;
hazardous to health solely by virtue of their explosive or flammable properties, or
solely because they are at a high or low temperature or a high pressure; and
pharmaceutical products

All Right Reserved
22
Employers and self-employed persons are to identify and records all hazardous
chemicals used at the work place in a register. The register must be maintained,
updated and made accessible to all employees.
Employer must ensure workers exposure to any hazardous chemical at no time

exceed the ceiling limit permissible exposure limit.
Employer to conduct written risks assessment prior to expose his workers to any
chemical hazardous to health. The assessment to be carried out by competent
assessor.
Based on the assessment report, employer to implement control measures through

elimination, substitution, total enclosure, isolation, modification, application of
engineering control equipment; adoption to safe work system and provision of
approved personal protective equipment.
Employer must ensure hazardous chemicals bought or supplied are labeled

accordingly. Workers who undertakes work which may expose or likely to expose
him to chemicals hazards must be provided with such information, instruction,
training and supervision to enable him to perform the task safely and without risk to
health.
Employer and self-employed person are responsible to make arrangements and

conduct monitoring exposure. Such monitoring must be recorded.

All Right Reserved
23
Employer and self-employed person also need to make arrangements for health
surveillance under certain circumstances and records of such surveillance must be
kept.
Based on the medical findings, affected workers must be removed from his routine
work for protection. He/she can only be returned to the normal work when he is no
longer affected.
Suitable and adequate warning signs to be posted at strategic locations.
Employer must keep all records pertaining to exposure to chemical hazardous to

health for specific retention periods.

All Right Reserved
24

All Right Reserved
25
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Factories and Machinery Act 1967 (Act 139) was gazetted by the Government as a
legislative arrangement to provide the control of factories with respect workers safety, health and welfare, the registration and inspection of machinery and other safety
and health related matters.
The Act defined minimum descriptive arrangements to be complied by employer or

occupier of a work place. Failure to comply, the employer or occupier of the work
place shall be liable to be fined upon conviction.
It is the duty of the Government to prove that the employer or occupier of the work
place has violated provisions made under this Acts and its relevant Regulations. So,
the burden is on the Government not on the employer or occupier of the work place.
The Act and its Regulations are applicable for mining, quarrying, manufacturing and
construction only.
In case of any conflict and inconsistency between this Act and Occupational Safety &
Health Act 1994, the later shall supersede.
2.0 CONTENTS
Factories & Machinery Act 1967 consist of:
6 Parts;
3 Schedules;
59 Sections; and
15 Regulations.
All Right Reserved
26
3.0 SALIENT PROVISIONS

3.1 Part I Preliminary
a) Interpretation of Factory
Factory means any premises, place or space where any building

operations or works of engineering construction are carried out.
b) Appointment of Officers
Provision for appointment of Government Officer to enforce this Act and its
Regulations.
c) Powers of Officers
The appointed officers has the power to examine, inspect & examine by
day or night any work place or process of work. These will include
examining copies of records, certificates and other related document; take
any samples of materials, issue stop work orders and if he is a medical
practitioner he may conduct medical examination.
d) Obstruction An Offence
Anybody who is willfully delay or obstruct an officer from performing his

duties or fail to comply with any order lawfully given by him or withholds
any information shall be penalized (RM5,000) upon conviction.

All Right Reserved
27
3.2 Part II Safety, Health & Welfare

a) Provision Relating To Safety, Etc.
Strength of foundation, floor and roof must be sufficient to sustain the
load they are designed for.
Floors, working levels, platforms, etc. to be of safe construction and
free from any loose or slippery materials.
Provisions of safe means of access and egress.
Openings, sump, etc. need to be covered or securely fenced.
Persons Exposed To Explosive, Inflammable, Etc.; Substances
Measures to be taken to eliminate the risks.
b) Persons Exposed To Explosive, Inflammable, Etc.; Substances

Measures to be taken to eliminate the risks.
c) Lifting of Weights
No person shall be permitted to lift any load if it can cause body injury.
d) Provisions Against Fire

Precautions to be taken against fire by providing and maintaining safe
escape and extinguishing system.

All Right Reserved
28
e) Construction of Machinery
Machinery shall be of sound construction and materials; including all
fittings and attachments; and shall be properly maintained.
f) Dangerous Part of Machinery

Dangerous moving parts of machinery need to be securely fenced or
guarded.
g) Projecting Material
Any projecting part of any material being carried out by a machine
must be effectively fenced or guarded.
h) Machinery For Hire or Sale

Nobody shall sell or let to hire any machinery that do not comply with
the requirements of this Act except transmission machinery.
i) Machinery Manufactures or Repaired

Nobody shall import, manufacture, repair or install any machinery in a
manner that does not comply with the provisions of this Act except for
the import of transmission machinery.
j) Certificate of Fitness
Machine requires certificate if fitness shall not be operated unless
having valid certificate.

All Right Reserved
29
k) Duties of Persons Employed
Do not interfere or misuse any appliances or other provisions made for

safety and health and must look after his own safety and health and
those surrounding him.
l) Duties of Occupier
Maintain all safety appliances and machinery at all times.
m) Provisions Relating To Health
Provisions with respect to cleanliness, working space, ventilation,

temperature, lighting, etc.
n) Exposure To Elements
Provision of protection against weather exposure.
o) Personal Protective Clothing & Appliances
Provision and maintenance of personal protective clothing and

appliances.
p) Provisions Relating To Welfare
Provision and maintenance of suitable accommodation for clothing,

drinking water, washing facilities and first-aid box.

All Right Reserved
30
3.3 Part III Persons In Charge & Certificate of Competency

a) Training & Supervision of Inexperienced Workers
Inexperienced workers need to be trained and supervised prior to

assigned him to operate any machine.
b) Chief Inspector May Make Orders
The Chief Inspector is authorized to make any order or set any

conditions he seems necessary for safety and health of the operators.
c) Young Person
No young person to be allowed in the proximity or managing or

attending any machine except trainees from Government Institution
provided their age should not below than fourteen (14) years old.
3.4 Part IV Notification of Accident, Dangerous Occurrence &

Dangerous Diseases
a) Accidents & Dangerous Occurrence To Be Reported:
Accident that caused loss of life or serious bodily injury (4 days

absence from work), serious property damages or any other incidents
that occurred at the work place.

All Right Reserved
31
b) Notification of Industrial Diseases:
Medical practitioner to report to Chief Inspector if he came across any

diseases as specified under Third Schedule.
c) Investigation & Enquiries
An inspector may initiate and conduct investigation and report to his

superior for further actions.
3.5 Part V Notice of Occupation of Factory & Registration

and Use of Machinery
a) Operation of Factory
No one can operate a factory without written permission from the

Inspector unless he has served the Inspector a notice one month earlier.
b) Building Operations or Works of Engineering Construction
Notification should be done not later than 7 days after commencement of

work except works expected to be completed less than 6 month and no
machinery going to be used.
c) Installation of Machinery, Etc.
All machinery installation requires written approval from an Inspector.

All Right Reserved
32
3.6 Part VI - General

a) Offences
Occupier of the work place / owner / employer who contravenes the

provision of this act shall be guilty of an offence.
4.0 FACTORIES & MACHINERY (CERTIFICATE OF COMPETENCY

EXAMINATIONS) REGULATIONS 1970
These Regulations outlined the framework or the certificate of competency required
the Factories & Machinery (Persons In Charge) Regulations 1970.
The prerequisites for application for certificate of competency and the examination
procedures are laid own in detail. All certificates of competency have requirements
for experience and an examination pas before they can be granted.
Certificate of competency can be suspended or cancelled if the holder is medically

unfit, or in the case of serious misconduct or if judged unfit after an enquiry or a
court case.
5.0 FACTORIES & MACHINERY (ELECTRIC PASSENGER AND GOODS

LIFT) REGULATIONS 1970
These Regulations apply to lifts that are used to carry persons. Goods lifts that can
carry persons as well as goods are included. The owner of such lifts must submit the
design details to the Chief Inspector in order to get the Inspectors approval.

All Right Reserved
33
There capacity of the lift must be clearly displayed on each lift car. Specifications for
each component of a lift system are specified in specific Regulations.
These Regulations also stipulated the duties of the lift owner to carry out the
scheduled inspection and maintenance of the system. The task can only be
performed by competent person.
Certificate of registration must be displayed in the lift car or at the bottom of the
landing.
6.0 FACTORIES & MACHINERY (FENCING OF MACHINERY & SAFETY) REGULATIONS 1970
These Regulations described the requirements on safeguard of machinery. All
dangerous part of a machine, including the power source and transmission must be
guarded. The Regulations described the methods for guarding various parts of
machines and methods of guarding for different types of machinery.
Machinery not listed in these Regulations must also be securely guarded or fenced it
they can pose hazards to the operators or those surrounding.
The six Schedules under these Regulations give further specifications for the
materials and dimensions of machinery guards.

All Right Reserved
34
7.0 FACTORIES & MACHINERY (NOTIFICATION, CERTIFICATE OF

FITNESS & INSPECTION) REGULATIONS 1970
These Regulations give the details of notification, certificate of fitness and
inspections carried out by the Government Inspectors.
The forms to be used for specific notification are prescribed under Part 1. While Part
2 describes the arrangements for certificate of fitness for certain machinery and its
validity.
Provisions under Part 3, defined the inspections arrangements by
Government Inspectors. Machinery to be inspected at regular intervals, ordinarily 15

months to 36 months.
Inspectors are authorized to issue directives for improvement and stop work notice
for machinery without valid certificate of fitness.
8.0 FACTORIES
&
MACHINERY
(PERSON-IN-CHARGE)
REGULATIONS 1970
These Regulations specified certain machinery require competent person in charge
to operate them. The machinery includes steam boiler, steam engine, internal
combustible engine and dredge.
Employer also required to provide instruction and training to operators of certain

machinery as listed under First Schedule of these Regulations, which includes presses, saws, metal working machines and hoisting machine.

All Right Reserved
35
9.0 FACTORIES & MACHINERY (SAFETY, HEALTH & WELFARE) REGULATIONS 1970
These Regulations described the various safety, health and welfare requirements at
the work place. These include:
provisions of safe means of access and safe place of work including edge
protection on floor openings and stairs;
stairways and floors must be of good construction and properly maintained.;
ladders must be of sound construction and maintained in good working condition;
provisions of fall protection for workers working at a height of 10 feet (3.0M) by
the use of safety belts or ropes;
arrangements and precautions for working in confined spaces;
storage of flammable and dangerous liquids and precautions against fire and
explosion;
materials storage properly stacked and stored;
workplace cleanliness;
requirements on lighting, ventilation and climate;
requirements on working clothes and protective equipment; and
provision and maintenance of welfare facilities such as toilets, drinking water,
washing facilities and first aid.
10.0 FACTORIES
&
MACHINERY
(STEAM
BOILER
&
UNFIRED
PRESSURE VESSEL) REGULATIONS 1970

These Regulations defined the conditions or obtaining the permission of the Chief
Inspector before a steam boiler or unfired pressure vessel is manufactured or
imported.

All Right Reserved
36
Steam boilers and unfired pressure vessels must comply with one of the codes listed
in the various Schedules in these Regulations.
It also gives details on the safety fittings required on a boiler and its burner system.
Provisions for unfired pressure vessel described requirements on air receivers, steam
receivers and their essential fittings.
Requirements on certain test such as hydrostatic testing for steam boilers an unfired
pressure vessel before being put into service also described under these Regulations.
11.0 FACTORIES & MACHINERY (ADMINISTRATION) REGULATIONS

1970
These Regulations set out administration by the Inspectors of the Factories &
Machinery Act and Regulations. The most significant feature is a list of fees that can
be charged for an Inspectors service.
The Regulations also describe the records that must be kept by the Chief Inspector,
Senior Inspector and Inspector.
The Chief Inspector must provide a report on the administration of the Act and Regulations to the Minister every year.

All Right Reserved
37
12.0 FACTORIES & MACHINERY (COMPUNDING OFFENCES) RULES

1978 & FACTORIES & MACHINERY (COMPUNDING OFFENCES)
REGULATIONS 1978
Some offences under the Factories and Machinery Act and Regulations can be
compounded. Compounding is an agreement to receive a sum of money from an
offender instead of prosecuting him.
The Regulations described the offences that can be compounded. The Rules give the
procedures to be followed by a Chief Inspector or Deputy Chief Inspector for
compounding an offence.
13.0 FACTORIES & MACHINERY (LEAD) REGULATIONS 1984

These Regulations specify a range of duties and controls with respect to use and
handling of lead. They also specify requirements on health surveillance and
administrative procedures. Key features of the Regulations include:
the permissible exposure limit;
protection factor may be taken into account when respiratory protection is worn,
if other requirements are met.
employers are required to carry out atmospheric monitoring;
engineering controls to be adopted to control employees exposure limit, if
inadequate respiratory protection to be provided;
provisions of change-rooms and shower facilities;
arrangements and provisions of medical surveillance program for all employees
exposure above the action level;
frequency of biological monitoring and medical examination;
requirements to temporarily remove an employee from exposure; and
requirements on training and procedures for record keeping.

All Right Reserved
38
14.0 FACTORIES
&
MACHINERY
(ASBESTOS
PROCESS)
REGULATIONS 1986
These Regulations described arrangements and precautions to be taken when
handling asbestos. Amongst the salient points are:
establishment of permissible exposure limit (PEL);

requirements on exhaust equipment to keep exposures below PEL and the
equipment to examined and tested at specified intervals by competent person;
duties of employer to provide protective equipment in a prescribed area or where
the concentration exceeds PEL, this may include respiratory protection;
places obligations on employees to use the protective equipment;
specifies requirements on housekeeping and cleanliness;
employers to arrange for personal monitoring on employees at least once in
three month intervals;
employer to arrange for medical examinations of employees at least once in every two years details of the test specified; and
provision of training for employees on the process, controls, protective equipment and medical surveillance.
15.0 FACTORIES & MACHINERY (BUILDING OPERATIONS & WORKS

OF ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION) (SAFETY) REGULATIONS
1986
These Regulations consist of 17 Parts and 154 Regulations. They described minimal
arrangements to be complied while carrying out building operations and works of
engineering construction.
The details of these Regulations will be discussed in separate module.
All Right Reserved
39
16.0 FACTORIES & MACHINERY (NOISE EXPOSURE) REGULATIONS

1989
These Regulations specified the requirements and arrangements to be taken in
dealing with noise exposures. Salient points of the Regulations are:
establishment of permissible exposure limit;

method of compliance by engineering and / or administrative controls, protective
equipment can be used only if these are not practicable;
requirements on initial and ongoing monitoring for employees exposure above
the action level;
provision of hearing protection for employees exposure above PEL;
audiometric testing to be carried out every year if exposure is above PEL or there
is a threshold shift;
employees to be trained in aspects of legislation, effects of protective equipment
and audiometric testing.
17.0 FACTORIES & MACHINERY (MINERAL DUST) REGULATIONS

1989
Key elements of these Regulations are summarized as the followings:
establishment of permissible exposure limit;

occupier to provide protective clothing, respiratory equipment and other
protective equipment;
employees are required to use and wear the equipment provided and to report
any defects;

All Right Reserved
40
sand blasting is prohibited unless written approval from Chief Inspectors is

obtained;
occupier to carry out initial and periodic atmospheric testing;
occupier to use control equipment to remove dust and such equipment must be
regularly inspected and maintained;
provisions of personal protective equipment;
requirements and arrangements for medical examination for employees exposure
above the action level at periodic intervals;
medical reports to be kept for at least 20 years by occupier; and
provisions of training on the regulations, nature of operations, control equipment
and medical examination.

All Right Reserved
41

All Right Reserved
42
1.0 INTRODUCTION
These Regulations came into force on the 1 October 1986. They are applicable to
building operations and works of engineering construction only. Where:
Building Operations means the construction, structural alteration, repair and

maintenance of building (including re-pointing, re-decoration and external
cleaning of structure) the demolition of building, and the preparation for and the
lying of the foundation of an intended building.
Works of engineering construction means the construction of any railway line or
siding, and the construction, structural alteration or repair (including re-pointing
and re-painting) or the demolition of any deck, harbor, inland navigation, tunnel,
bridge, viaduct, waterworks or gas holders.
The activities covered by these Regulations include a wide range of works.

Therefore, the Regulations apply as an addition to any other provisions and requirements stipulated under relevant Factories & Machinery Act and Regulations.
2.0 PART I PRELIMINARY

Main provisions under this Part are the definition of certain terms being used under
these Regulations. Key definitions are:
Contractor person who has entered into a contract for the purpose of carrying
out any building operations or works of engineering construction and includes
main contractor or sub-contractor.
Contractors Safety Supervisor a contactors safety supervisor appointed

under Regulation 26.

All Right Reserved
43
Designated Person a competent person appointed by an employer to carry

out any supervision or inspection or to perform any task or duty prescribed by
these Regulations.
Employer any person who employs another person under contract of service.
Main Contractor a person who has entered into a contract with an owner or
lessee of a property or his agent for the purpose of carrying out any building
operation or work of engineering construction.
Professional Engineer a Registered Professional Engineer as defined by

Section 2 of the Registration of Engineer Act 1967.
3.0 PART II GENERAL PROVISIONS

Unless otherwise stated, Factories and Machinery (Fencing of Machinery & Safety)
Regulations 1970 shall apply to all machinery used in connection with the work.
Generally this Part describes the general precautions to be taken such as installation
of machinery, drawing hazards, slipping hazards, tripping and cutting hazards,
personal protective equipment, electrical hazards, public vehicular traffic, stability of
structures, illumination, storage of materials, disposal of debris, site safety
supervisors and safety and health committee.

All Right Reserved
44
4.0 PART III CONCRETE WORK

This Part deals with precautions to be taken in the erection and dismantling of
formwork for concrete buildings.
Professional Engineers must certify all formworks and reshores. He shall be

responsible for the supervision of the construction and stability of such structure.
Designated person must be appointed for supervision of erection work. He shall

conduct regular inspection upon completion of erection, all findings to be recorded.
Stripping of formwork should not commence until concrete is fully set in accordance
with Professional Engineers Specification.
5.0 PART IV STRUCTURAL STEEL & PRE CAST CONCRETE

ASSEMBLY
This part covers the safety requirements involved in the erection of structural steel
and pre cast concrete structures.
Structural members should not be materially weakened except in accordance with

written instruction of a Professional Engineer.
Tag lines to be used to control movement of structural members while being hoisted.
Temporary flooring needs to follow up the construction of a steel frame building.

All Right Reserved
45
6.0 PART V CLEANNG, REPAIRING & MAINTENANCE OF ROOF,

GUTTERS, WINDOWS, LOUVERS & VENTILATION
A number of precautions are to be taken when working on steep roofs. Crawling
boards or roofing brackets must be installed on roofs at safe angle.
7.0 PART VI CATCH PLATFORMS

Provisions under these Regulations specified that catch platform must be erected
along the exterior face of structures to protect the public against falling objects.
The platforms to be designed and certified by Professional Engineers.
8.0 PART VII CHUTES, SAFETY BELTS & NETS

Chutes for rubbish removal must be totally enclosed if the angle exceeds 45 degrees
from the horizontal.
Chutes exceeding 12.0 M to be constructed in accordance with Professional

Engineers design and certification.
Effective warning notices to be posted at conspicuous position and chute to be

maintained as not to allow debris to accumulate to an unacceptable height.
Safety belts, lifelines at their attachments shall be adequate strength and of type
approved by Chief Inspector and inspected by designated person. All defective belts,
lifelines and attachments to be removed from work site.

All Right Reserved
46
Safety net to be of type approved by the Chief Inspector and inspected by

designated person. All inspections to be recorded and record kept on work site for
inspection by an Inspector.
9.0 PART VIII RUNWAYS & RAMPS

Runways and ramps for use of vehicles, workers and barrows to be designed by
Professional Engineer.
10.0 PART IX LADDERS & STEP-LADDERS

This part covers ladders and step-ladders. Ladders must be securely fixed so that
they cannot slip. Ladder access is necessary for all work exceeding 1.5 meters in
height. Ladders should be of sound construction.
11.0 PART X SCAFFOLDS

Scaffold and their components must be well constructed from suitable and sound
material, and be of adequate strength. Sufficient materials must be made available
to construct scaffold.

All Right Reserved
47
Scaffold of certain heights to be designed by Professional Engineers. All erection,

alteration and dismantling of scaffold to be supervised by designated person. The
designated person must also carry out periodic inspections and all findings recorded
in a register.
Working platforms must be of adequate size for specific work and provided with
guard-rails and toe-boards.
12.0 PART XI DEMOLITION

Main provisions of this part are:
no part of a building or structure can be allowed to become dangerously

overloaded with debris; and
the work must be done under close supervision of a designated person.
13.0 PART XII EXCAVATION WORK

Excavations must be shored or cut back to prevent collapse. Guardrails must be
installed if excavations exceed 3 meters in depth and provided with access if more
than 1.2 meters deep.
Designated person must carry out inspection on all excavations and all findings must
be recorded.

All Right Reserved
48
14.0 PART XIII MATERIAL HANDLING & STORAGE, USE &

DISPOSAL
The storage and disposal of building materials is described in this Part. All materials
in bags, containers or bundles and other materials stored in tiers must be stacked,
blocked and limited to certain height for stability.
Aisles and passageways to be kept clear to provide for free and safe movement of
material handling.
Material disposed from a height of 6 meters to be carried out with the aid of
enclosed chute.
Burning of debris must comply with local requirements.
15.0 PART XIV PILING

This Part deals with safe piling work. Pile driving equipment to be inspected by
competent designated person, who shall personally direct the work and give operating signals.
Pile testing must be conducted under the direct supervision of a designated person.
Test area is a restricted area to other workers.

All Right Reserved
49
16.0 PART XV BLASTING & USE OF EXPLOSIVES

Explosives must be handled under immediate control of a competent designated
person. When explosives are fired, employees must not be exposed to risks of injury
from the explosion or flying material and steps must be taken to ensure this.
17.0 PART XVI HAND & POWER TOOLS

Hand and power tools must be maintained in safe and good working condition.
Further requirements for the use of hand tools, electric, pneumatic, fuel, hydraulic
and power driven equipment also elaborated under this Part.
18.0 PART XVII MISCELLANEOUS

Failure to comply provisions made under these Regulations shall liable the offender
to a fine not exceeding RM2,000.00.

All Right Reserved
50

All Right Reserved
51
1.0 HOW TO MANAGE OSH?

Most effective systems are based on the principle of plan, do, check, act. In OSH
terms this will require to develop a policy on what is to be achieved, then a
plan of how and when to implement it, including any necessary arrangements. Next
is
the doing phase, when implementing the plans and then check that its being
done what has been planned and that it is effective in controlling risks. Any
deficiencies found need to be acted upon and rectified, so that the system and
performance could be continually improved.
2.0 GUIDELINES
ON
OCCUPATIONAL
SAFETY
&
HEALTH
MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS, ILO-OSH 2001

The Guidelines on Occupational Safety and Health Management Systems (ILO-OSH
2001) has been
developed by International Labor Organization (ILO) according
to internationally agreed principles defined by ILOs tripartite constituents, i.e. the

governments, employers and workers. This tripartite approach
provides the
strength, flexibility and appropriate basis for the development of a sustainable safety
culture in the organization. The ILO has therefore developed these voluntary Guidelines on Occupational Safety and Health Management Systems to reflect ILO
values and instruments relevant to the protection of workers safety and health.

All Right Reserved
52
The practical recommendations of these guidelines are intended for use by

all those who have responsibility for occupational safety and health
management. They are not legally binding and are not intended to replace
national laws, regulations or accepted standards.
These guidelines have been designed as a practical tool to assist

organization
in
fulfilling
their
statutory
obligations
in
managing
occupational safety and health and as a means for achieving continual

improvement in occupational safety and health performance.
a) Benefits of ILO-OSH:2001
The ILO-OSH 2001 is recognized by the Government, as Malaysia is

one of the ILO member.
By implementing these guidelines, the organization is also complying

with its statutory obligations related to Occupational Safety & Health
matters.
b) Objectives of ILO-OSH:2001
These guidelines should contribute to the protection of workers

from hazards and to the elimination of work-related injuries, ill
health, diseases, incidents and deaths.
At national level, these guidelines should:
be used to establish a national framework for OSH

Management Systems, preferably supported by national laws
and regulations;

All Right Reserved
53
provide
guidance
for
the
development
of
voluntary
arrangements to strengthen compliance with regulations and

standards
leading
to
continual
improvement
in
OSH
performance; and
provide guidance on the development of both national and

tailored guidelines on OSH Management Systems to respond
appropriately to the real needs of organizations, according to
their size and nature of their activities.
At the level of the organization, the guidelines are intended to:
provide
guidance
regarding
the
integration
of
OSH
Management System elements in the organization as a

component of policy and management arrangements; and
motivate all members of the organization, particularly

employers, owners, managerial staff, workers and their
representatives, in applying appropriate OSH Management
principles
and
methods
to
continually
improve
OSH
performance.
c) Elements of National Framework

All Right Reserved
54
d) Elements at Organization Level
3.0 BASICS ELEMENTS OF A SUCCESSFUL OSH MANAGEMENT

SYSTEM
An effective Occupational Safety and Health Management System must
have
the
following basic
elements:

All Right Reserved
55
a) OSH Policy
The organization's occupational safety and health policy must have an

overall influence on all its activities. The written policy will indicate the
organization's ways on how safety and health supposed to be managed
within the organization.
b) Organization
To make the occupational safety and health effective delegation of

duties and responsibilities must be clearly defined. As far as
practicable, all necessary resources must be made available to develop
a positive safety and health culture within the organization. A positive
safety and health culture comprises of the following:
Competence recruitment, training and advisory support;

Control
allocating
responsibilities,
securing
commitment,
instruction and supervision;

Cooperation between management and workers; and
Communication workers and their representatives are consulted
on safety and health matter.
c) Planning and Setting of Objectives and Standards
Planning is the key to ensure the efforts put really work. Planning
involves setting of objectives, identifying hazards, assessing risks,
implementing standards of performance and developing positive
culture.

All Right Reserved
56
Standards are developed to assist the workers to perform their tasks

accordingly in order to achieve the objectives. The objectives must
measurable, achievable and realistic.
d) Performance Monitoring
Safety and health performances need to be measured, to find out its
achievement with respect to the policy and objectives set earlier.
The two (2) components of performance monitoring are:
active monitoring before things go wrong; and

reactive monitoring after thing go wrong.
e) Audit & ReviewLearning from Experience
Monitoring provides the information for reviewing the activities and decides how to improve performance. Audits, complement monitoring activities by checking to see the policy, organization and systems are actually achieving the right results. Audits will tell about the reliability and
effectiveness of the system. Combine the results from measuring performance with information from audits to improve approach to safety
and health management.
4.0 TERM OF REFERENCES

a) Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994, Regulations and Orders.
b) Factories and Machinery Act 1967, Regulations and Rules.
c) Factories and Machinery (Building Operations and Works of Engineering
Construction) (Safety) Regulations 1986.
d) Guidelines on Occupational Safety & Health Management System, ILO-OSH:2001.

All Right Reserved
57

All Right Reserved
58

All Right Reserved
59
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Occupational Safety & Health systems are integral to the effective functioning of any
workplace. In order to maximize the effectiveness of the system, workers need to be
consulted and communicated on OSH matters.
Occupational Safety & Health needs to be promoted in the workplace for a variety of
reasons. Some of these reasons include creating awareness, increasing productivity,
increasing morale and to reinforce to employees that they are valued members of
the organization.
Occupational Safety & Health can be promoted within the workplace in may ways. It
is important to realize that using just one approach is not enough. Through using a
variety of approaches the message will be reinforced.
2.0 COMMUNICATION
Effective communication is essential to the safety, health, and welfare of workers in
the construction industry. It serves to motivate and encourage understanding and
acceptance of OHS systems and is a requirement under the Occupational Safety &
Health Act 1994.
Effective safety and health

individuals
are
required
communication skills become very important when

to
liaise
with
management
and/or
employees.
Communication is a process of sending and receiving symbols with meaning

attached.

All Right Reserved
60
Effective communication occurs when the intended meaning of the sender and the
perceived meaning of the receiver are one and the same. Communication is more
likely to be effective when the message is clear, concise and contains appropriate
and sufficient information. A shared system of codes or language between the sender and receiver is required.
2.1 Effective Communication

Effective communication means getting the correct information to the people
who need it to complete work safely and efficiently. It encourages feedback to
determine if the messages have been understood and accepted or if
clarification or more information is needed. It assists in gaining agreement
and a positive work environment.
Efficient communication results in minimum cost in terms of resources

expended (e.g. use of memos, email, and group meetings). All organizations
need effective communication to ensure organizational efficiency and
effectiveness.
Good communication allows us to:
gather and provide information;

ensure safe work methods;
ensure feedback on performance and results;
state objectives, deadlines and priorities;
gain agreement and consensus on issues; and
encourage positive attitudes and morale.

All Right Reserved
61
Poor communication may be associated with:
inaccurate information;
unsafe work methods;
accidents and injuries;
lower productivity;
stress and staff dissatisfaction; and
high staff turnover and morale problems.
It is well known that employees who are fully informed and involved in their
work processes are likely to be more motivated to undertake work activities
safely and efficiently.
2.2 Barriers to Effective Communication

Barriers to effective communication include the following:
The environment may pose an external barrier to communication. Factors

such as noise levels, workplace layout, ventilation, temperature, confined
spaces, use of personal protective equipment (PPE), plant and equipment,
work processes or the number of distractions can create barriers to
receiving the message.
Field of experience is a potential internal barrier to communication. This
can include such things as past experiences, beliefs, expectations and
attitudes, values, prejudices. Literacy/language differences, socio-cultural
factors as well as anything that may be preoccupying the sender or
receiver at the time of communication.

All Right Reserved
62
2.3 Communication Model

There are many people involved in communication on construction sites
including managers, supervisors, employees, internal and external experts,
sales representatives, designers/manufacturers/suppliers, engineers, principal
contractors, other contractors, government officers and consultants. Everyone
needs a means of ensuring that his or her messages are understood.
Supervisors are often affected by how communication flows. In other words,

the lines of communication, where messages originate from and how they
travel through an organization. Horizontal communication is between workers
or across the work group, whereas vertical communication originates from
management down to employees or from employees up to management. A
group of contractors working on a project may use horizontal lines of
communication in order to develop an overall site plan.
Information
originating
from
the
principal
contractor,
down
to
the
sub-contractor and then to the employees is an example of vertical

communication. Information must be communicated in a manner that
everyone understands. It is not enough, for example, to merely give all
workers a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and tell them to read it. This
method of communication may not result in acceptance and understanding of
the message. It may be necessary to use verbal explanation, as well as visual
communication systems such as signs or symbols.
A standard of communication model was introduced by Petersen (1988) as

shown on the next page:

All Right Reserved
63
As with any communication model, it is important to realize that interference in the

media (or channel) will lessen the effect of the message. Interference which may
occur are:
a) What is managements credibility? Is management really interested in my safety

as it is trying to tell me? How has management demonstrated that interest in the
past?
b) Is my supervisor really like me enough to believable; or so different as not be
trusted?
c) Is my supervisors power over me real? Must I really comply with safety rules?
and further:
research also speaks about what happens when workers receive conflicting
messages from two different sources; management and their work group. Almost
invariably , people are more influenced by their peers than by their superiors.
What does this means for management then? It means that effective line of
communication must be opened up to realize the full potential of OSH promotions
programs within the workforce.

All Right Reserved
64
2.4 How to do it?

a) Lead By Example
If the workplace has introduced safe work procedures, but management is

not seen to be following the same safety precautions, problems are going
to be occurred.
Majority of the workers will not have an active interest in the safety unless
they see management following the same steps they are encouraged to
take.
b) Employee Interaction
Employees are valuable sources of information on problem areas in the

workplace. Employees should be encouraged to contribute information.
Management should endeavor to have good listening skills to make the
employee comfortable coming forward with information. The followings
are guidelines for improving listening skills:

All Right Reserved
65
POOR LISTENERS
GOOD LISTENERS
Interrupt
Patient
Change subject
Eye contact
Impetuous
Summarize to clarify
Inattentive
Put you at ease
Negative body language
Short prompts given
Easily distracted
Have empathy
Yes, but . . . people
Take time to listen
Impatient
Look attentive
Switch off
Ask open questions
Take over the conversation
Dont interrupt
Curt
Supportive body language
Thinking what they will say next
Show interest
Too talkative
Concentrate
Discouraging, e.g. look away
Ask about my feelings
Very critical
Pass few judgments
It is important to analyze your own listening skills and try to concentrate on

cutting out the behaviors indicated in the poor listener list. If employees
observe behavior from good listeners list they will fell comfortable coming
forward with ideas.
If employees are hesitant about coming forward with problems they see in
the workplace, a suggestion box could be used to encourage employees to
contribute OSH ideas. Ideally suggestion box should be placed away from
management and should be accessible to all employees.

All Right Reserved
66
3.0 PROMOTIONS
The promotion of occupational safety and health, as part of an overall improvement
of working conditions, represent an important strategy, not only to ensure the wellbeing of workers but also to contribute positively to productivity.
The promotion of good safety attitudes and awareness is providing an opportunity
for the total work force to become involved in some aspect of safety in the workplace.
Healthy workers are likely to have higher work motivation, enjoy greater work satisfaction and contribute to better quality-products and services. The safety, health and
well-being of workers are thus pre-requisites for quality and productivity improvements. Promotions programs could be in the form of:
Safety Week;
Poster & Slogan Competitions;
Safety Award Schemes;
Photographic Displays;
Regular site safety tours by middle/senior manager and directors;
Exhibitions of safety equipment that has prevented or minimized injury e.g. shoes
that have saved feet, glasses that have saved eyes; and
Short safety talks, film shows etc. using theme of the month.

All Right Reserved
67
4.0 CONSULTATION
4.1 Introduction
The effectiveness and real progress of any occupational safety an health
management system is impossible to be achieved without full cooperation and
commitment of all employees and to obtain that cooperation and commitment
there must be participation in the making and monitoring of arrangements for
safety and health at the workplace. The employees should be given a say in
developing a more realistic approach to accident prevention. In so doing the
aim is to encourage their cooperation in the effective implementation of the
system. One way to achieve this is by establishing safety and health
committee at the workplace.
4.2 Why a S&H Committee to be Established?

Besides the arguments in Para 1.1, safety and health committee should be
established at the workplace as required by the law. Specific statutory
provisions regarding the establishment and functions of such committee are
stipulated under the following:
a) Section
30
& 31, Part VII
Safety
and Health
Organization,
Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994;

b) Occupational
Safety
&
Health
(Safety
&
Health
Committee),
Regulations 1996; and

c) Regulation 27 Safety Committee, Part II General Provisions,
Factories & Machinery (Building Operations & Works of Engineering

All Right Reserved
68
Further references can be made to Sub-Section 5 Safety Committees,

Section 5 Organizational Arrangements, Code of Practice for Safety and
Health at Work (MS 426 : 1994).
4.3 When to Establish the Committee?

There
are
two
conditions
that
require
employers
to
establish
the
committee at the place of work:
whenever there are forty (40) or more workers employed on site; and
whenever
directed
by
the
Director
General
of
Department
of
Occupational Safety & Health.
4.4 How to Establish the Committee?

The committee should comprise of the following:
Chairman authorized manager on site;

Secretary Safety & Health Officer/Supervisor or any other individual
appointed by the chairman if there is no Safety and Health Officer/
Supervisor employed on site;
Employers representatives; and
Employees representatives.
When there are one hundred (100) or fewer workers employed on site there
should be minimum two (2) representatives from each side. If there are more
than one hundred (100) workers employed, there should be not less than four
(4) representatives from each side.

All Right Reserved
69
The employees should be nominated their representatives. In the case of no

employees
representatives
or
inadequate
number
of
representatives
nominated, the employer can appoint the required number of persons to

represent the employees.
4.5 What is the Function of the Committee?

The main functions of the committee are to:
assist in the development of safety and health rules and safe system of
work;
review the effectiveness of the safety and health programs;
carry out studies on the trends of accident, dangerous occurrence,
occupational poisoning or occupational disease that occurs at the
workplace and report to the employer of any unsafe or unhealthy
conditions or practices together with recommendations for corrective
actions;
review the safety and health policy and make recommendations for any
revision;
inspect the workplace at least once in every three (3) months, discuss the
observations
and
make
recommendations
for
corrective
and
improvement actions;
investigate accident, dangerous occurrence, occupational poisoning or
occupational disease that occurs at the workplace and discuss the findings
and recommendations for corrective and preventive actions;
hold regular meetings at least once in three (3) months; only safety and
health matters to be discussed and minuted.

All Right Reserved
70
4.6 What are the duties of the Employer?

It shall be the duty of the employer to:
provide a suitable place at the workplace for the committee to hold its
meetings;
permit every member of the committee to attend such meeting;
provide adequate training, information, relevant document and resources
in order to enable the committee to function effectively;
take necessary actions on recommendations made by the committee, if
unable to implement such recommendations, employer should give
his
reason to the committee.

a) Section 30 & 31, Part VII Safety and Health Organization, Occupational Safety
& Health Act 1994.
b) Occupational Safety & Health (Safety & Health Committee), Regulations 1996;
c) Regulation 27 Safety Committee, Part II General Provisions, Factories & Machinery (Building Operations & Works of Engineering Construction) (Safety) Regulations 1986.
d) Regulations 25 & 26, Factories and Machinery (Building Operations and Works of
Engineering Construction) (Safety) Regulations 1986.
e) Sub-Section 5 Safety Committees, Section 5 Organizational Arrangements,
Code of Practice for Safety and Health at Work (MS 426 : 1994).
f) Section 3.2 - Workers Participation, ILO-OSH:2001.

All Right Reserved
71

All Right Reserved
72
1.0 INTRODUCTION
As part of the general "duty of care" under the OSHA 1994, Section 15(2)(c)
employers and self-employed persons must provide all necessary training,
instruction, information and supervision to ensure the health and safety of their
employees. All persons involved in any work should be trained to apply systems of
work and work practices that are safe and without risks to health.
Employers and principal contractors must ensure that persons carrying out the work
have relevant training including OSH training. This includes identifying the OSH
training requirements of persons carrying out any work activities. This the legal
provisions also stipulated that employers and self-employed persons should not allow
a person to carry out construction work until they are satisfied that the person has
attended and completed necessary OSH training. Only those persons who have
received training and instruction should carry out the work.
As a Site Safety Supervisor, one of your legal duties is to promote safe conduct of
work on your worksite. Therefore you are responsible in assisting your employer in
complying with the provisions made under OSHA 1994. This could be achieved by
organizing and conducting training programmes for all personnel at your respective
workplace.

All Right Reserved
73
2.0 WHAT IS LEARNING?

Learning itself cannot be observed directly, it is inferred by observing the
performance of the individual. If the individual performs a new task to the standards
specified, it is assumed that learning has taken place.
Learning always involves a change in the person who is learning. This change will
involve a change in knowledge, skills or attitudes of the individual.
Skills refer to manipulation objects, tools, equipment and machinery. Skills have
both a physical and mental aspect.
Knowledge refers to learning facts, principles, concepts, rules and theories

necessary for solving problems.
Attitude refers to developing feelings, values and emotions.
In complex learning situations there is always integration between the learning of

knowledge, skills and attitudes.
People learn in a variety of conditions and circumstances. People learn more or less
continuously; at home, in their leisure time, in the street, at work and in school. This
learning often occurs under the most casual and unplanned conditions (informal
learning), whilst at other times it occurs in specially structured learning situations
(formal learning).
It is important to remember that learning can take place with or without a teacher,
but a teacher needs learners for teaching to take place. So teaching can be seen as
assisting a learner to change behaviour. This can be a valuable perspective to take

as a trainer.
Think about a particular situation in which you learnt something new, it could be
using a new software programme, throwing a frisbee or how to change a car tyre.
You may have attended a training course or someone at work may have coached
you in mastering a new procedure.
All Right Reserved
74
2.1 Adult Learner

Adults often learn quite differently to young children. There are many factors
that will make it easier and harder to learn.
There are a number of principles that will help you understand how adults
learn. These principles are a guide only, there may be others that you can
think of.
a) Active participation
Adults are likely to learn more quickly and effectively if they are actively
participating in learning process. Adults learn best by doing.
b) Meaningful material
Learning is more effective when participants can relate new material to
their existing knowledge and experiences. Retention of the learning is
more likely to occur if the initial learning is meaningful and vivid.
c) Holistic learning
It is important to start with the big picture or entire job then it can be
broken down into component parts so that participants can see how each
piece fits together. The component parts of the job should be explained in
detail after the participants understand the overall job.

All Right Reserved
75
d) Multi-sensory learning
Learning occurs as a result of sensory experience and that is that learning
is generally more effective if we can use two or more senses. If a trainer
simply talks about something, it can be quite difficult to learn. If an
explanation is given along with a model, and participants can see and examine the model then learning is likely to be more effective.
e) Practice and reinforcement
Appropriate opportunities to practice and apply new skills and knowledge
enhance the learning process. Positive reinforcement helps to maintain or
increase the skill or knowledge being practised. Also pointing out areas for
improvement can facilitate mastering skills and new knowledge.
d) Feedback
Learning is made more effective when participants receive appropriate
feedback. Feedback is the process whereby the knowledge of results of a
past performance leads to a modification and improvement of a future
performance. It should occur throughout the training session and not be
confined only to the end.
f) Reward
Participants attend training for a number of reasons. These may include:
Greater job opportunities.
Increased pay.
Intellectual challenge.
To do something for themselves.
To be with other people.
To make a difference.

All Right Reserved
76
People respond differently to learning experience. Learners may:

Have individual styles in the way they learn.
Learn at different rates.
May have reading, hearing, reasoning difficulties.

Have a wide range of previous skills and knowledge.
Need to be treated with respect and given positive expectations.
2.2 Adult Learning Characteristics

Problem-Centered
Experience-Centered With goals Meaningful to Adults
Encourage Active Participation
Provide Feedback Toward Progress
Learning Speeds Differ
During the preparation stage of instruction. It is important to consider the

special characteristics of adult learners. An instructor should constantly be
aware of ways in which the following adult learning characteristics
a) Adult Learning Should Be Problem Centered
By nature, adults accept the challenge of solving problems, particularly after they have been given the basics information and skills necessary to
solve them. There is a challenge and a tremendous amount of interest in
solving problems; and the sense of achievement in solving problems is reflected in a feeling of self-satisfaction. OSH education and training should
be glad to solving problems for your organisation whenever possible as a
practical means of achieving students motivation.
b) Learning Must Be Experience Centered With Meaningful Seals
Every student come to class with his/her own background and experience
as a starting point for learning - both positive and be negative. We learn a
great deal from our experiences, particularly if we have a means of
All Right Reserved
77
processing and analyzing the input. It is quite common, for example, to

hold a revive session after a disaster, discuss individual and group performance and to assess how well goals were achieved.
c) Students must actively participate and search for methods and
Means for Achieving the seals
In instruction, participant involvement is essential. As you plan instruction
and drills, always provide activities that insure substantial student involvement.
d) Student Must Have Feedback to Assess their Progress Reaching
the seal
Student must be told how well they are doing in achieving the goal. They
must not have to assume that they are doing something right or wrong be
reacting to clues from the instructor, they must know from positive feed
back.
e) All Adults Learn at Different Speeds
Since individual backgrounds, experiences, and education are all different,
each student will learn at a different pace. One of the greatest challenges
in instruction is to identify each learners pace toward the achievement of
goals, and to provide differentiated instruction to help each individual.

All Right Reserved
78
3.0 WHAT IS EFFECTIVE WORKPLACE TRAINING?

Effective workplace training equips individuals with the skills, knowledge and
attitudes needed to perform competently in their particular job role/function.
The training should:
Accurately identify the needs of participants.
Provide effective methods and techniques to facilitate learning.
Structure the training program in a clear and logical way.
3.1 Identifying Training Needs

Poor work performance happens for a variety of reasons, such as personal
problems of employees, faulty equipment, poor skills, poor management or a
combination of factors.
If work performance is low it is important to identify exactly what is
happening and why, in order to establish if training will solve the problem. If
training is the solution, having accurately defined the need will help you
determine what information and skills will be required and how you might
structure your program.
A training need will be evident if:
The individual does not know what to do.
The individual knows what to do but does not have the skills.
The individual has the knowledge and skills but is not performing to the
required workplace standard.
The individual simply does not care about work performance.

All Right Reserved
79
3.2 Training Needs Analysis

Before you can undertake a detailed training analysis it is essential that you
have an accurate description of the job/task that is required. Without this you
will not be able to define training requirements, as you will have no specified
standards against which you can check an individuals performance.
Once you have identified that a training need may exist and you have
identified a job description or competency standard for that particular job/role
then you can carry out a training needs analysis.
A training needs analysis will help you identify the gaps between what the
person can actually do and what they are required to do. This is an important
part of training, as it will help you design your training session to suit the
exact needs of participants.
There are many methods that you can use to help carry out a training needs
analysis, for example:
interviews,
observation,
performance tests,
questionnaires,
reports from senior personnel.
When conducting a training needs analysis it is a good idea to consult a

number of relevant people including the supervisor, manager, chief instructor
and the person doing the job. This will ensure that the expectations of each
person are the same.
Using the data collected through the training needs analysis, investigate
whether a training program already exists and what program to be
introduced.

All Right Reserved
80

All Right Reserved
81
3.3 Language, Literacy and Numeracy (LL&N)

As a trainer you need to identify the language, literacy and numeracy skills of
participants. If participants are not required to do a lot of reading and writing
in their actual job then it is probably not necessary that you require them to
do a lot in training. You will need to think about the training that you will be
conducting, the level at which you are training and the activities you have
chosen.
Whether you are training, assessing or doing both, it is essential that you can
accurately identify those with LL&N needs so that you can adjust your training
and/or assessment to ensure that no one is unfairly disadvantaged. Wherever
possible it is valuable to be able to train and assess in a number of different
ways to effectively teach people of varying abilities and learning styles.
Participants may have limited skills in language, literacy and numeracy
because of a number of reasons:
They may have missed out on basic skills/education.
They may come from a non-English/non-Malay speaking background.
They may have specific learning disability.
They may have intellectual disability.
Individuals may belong to more than one of the above groups so it is

important that you treat each participant as an individual. Participants should
be judged against the performance criteria of the standard you are training or
assessing against and not on their LL&N skills alone.
It can sometimes be difficult to identify if any of the participants in your
training group have low LL&N skills. It is very important that you are aware of
participants needs, as it will influence the effectiveness of your training.

All Right Reserved
82
4.0 SETTING TRAINING OUTCOMES

Training outcomes state the skill or ability to be learned or achieved.
Assessment describes the task the learner undertakes and how the task is to be
judged i.e. criteria.
4.1 Identification of Training Goals

By Committee
By Governmental Standards
For Qualification
From Task Analysis
Before education or training programs can be developed and objectives or lesson plans drawn up, goals for the education or train program must be set.
The specific goals is established at the outset and the content is clearly set
forth to identify what the train should accomplish or achieve. Goals can be
established at different levels. The decisions made concerning selection of
specific topics and subject areas where training is necessary are directly related to goal setting.
At the local level an emergency program manager or training officer may decide what training needs should be addressed. These decisions may be based
upon observation upon made during training or emergency activities.
Training goals may also be based on job performance qualifications or standards drawn up by local , state, or national institutions.
Regardless of who makes the decisions, the subject/content areas decided
upon for training must ultimately be defined through the establishment of
training goals. Both the instructor and the student must be aware of and accept the goals of any training program in which they are involved.

All Right Reserved
83
4.2 Learning Domains

Once the training goals have been identified, it is helpful to classify them accordingly to the recognized domains of learning that they involved. Learning
has been partitioned into the following three domains
The cognitive domain contains those skills that deal with knowledge and
Other intellectual skills. An examples of this type of learning would be correctly ordering the steps in Maslows hierarchy.
The affective domain emphasizes behavior based on feeling such as

desiring, caring , or avoiding. An example in this area is training emergency management personnel to use a team concept in the planning process.
Attitudes regarding roles, relation ships and turf issues may need to be examined and modified.
The psychomotor domain emphasized motor skills. Teaching rescue techniques to scuba club is an example of this domain.
The ability to identify the proper domain of a specific objective is important
since objectives from different domains are taught by different methods.
Specific ways of teaching cognitive, affective, and psychomotor objectives
will be considered in unit III.
4.3 Objectives
Objectives are the specific steps within a domain necessary to reach an established goal.
An objective should be easy to read and easy to understand. If the student
understands the objective, the student should know what is expected of him/
her. From the objective, the student be able to gauge his/her progress.

All Right Reserved
84
An objectives will also give the instructor specific criteria to measure the students progress.
4.3.1
Writing Objectives
All well-written objectives have four components.
When writing or
checking an objective, it should be verified that each of these components is present.

These components are:
A
Audience
Behaviour
Conditions
Degree
A properly written Objectives makes all four of these elements crystal

clear.
The following is an analysis of a typical objective:
Objective
The course participant will be able to demonstrate all of the activities
or course preparation, as identified in this unit, to an instructor in a
classroom setting.
Objective Parts
a
b
AUDIENCE
BEHAVIOUR
CONDITIONS
DEGREE
Student working towards this objective know exact. What they will be
expected to do. Additionally, the instructor will be easily able to tell
whether the student has met this objective.
All Right Reserved
85
A good objectives makes it easier for the instructor. It specifies what needs
to taught. It specifies for the student what they will need to learn and what
they need to practice. It also makes it easier for the instructor to develop
clear and objective evaluation instruments.
The following two pages provide common terms used for expressing learning
objectives.
USEFUL WORDS FOR ESPRESSING LEARNING OBJECTIVES

LEVEL 1.0 KNOELEDGE
(Recall of specifics, methods, processes, bring to mind appropriate materials)
Cite
identify
recall
spell
Cite rule
indicate
recite
state
Count
list
recognize
tell
Define
name
repeat
trace
Described
point
review
write
Find
quote
select
Gather data
read
show
LEVEL 2.0 COMPREHENSION

(Lowest level of understanding; can make use of material without use or
reference)
Associate
discriminate
reformulated
Compute
discuss
restate
Conclude
distinguish
rewrite
Convey meaning of
extrapolate
summarize
deal with
give reasons
tell why
Describe in own words
interpret
translate
Differentiate
predict

All Right Reserved
86
USEFUL WORDS FOR ESPRESSING LEARNING OBJECTIVES

LEVEL 3.0 APPLICATION
(Use of abstractions in concrete situations)
Administer
compare
employ
put in action.
Adopt a plan
complete
illustrate
solve
Apply
construct
make sure of
use
Calculate
construct
perform
use result
Carry out
demonstrate
plot
utilize
Classify
detect
practice
LEVEL 4.0 ANALYSIS

(Breakdown into elements, parts)
Analyze
deduct
explain
Check
designated
infer
Criticize
detect
separate
LEVEL 5.0 SYNTHESIS

(Putting together and constituting a pattern)
Combine
fabricate
plan
Compose
form
prepare
Design
formulate
prescribe
Develop
integrate
Specify
Appraise
determine
grade
Ascertain
diagnose
judge
Assay
evaluate
recommend
Assess
fix value of
test
Devise
LEVEL 6.0 EVALUATION

All Right Reserved
87
4.3.1
Using Objectives in Training

All well-written objectives can provide the instructor with a focus for
planning training sessions and developing evaluation (testing) programs. It is also well established that by informing the students of the
objective at the introduction of the lesson the instructor will enhance
learning. If the student is informed of the objectives at the start of
the lesson there should be no confusion as to expectation regarding
what is expected is class and in the evaluation process.
Along with explaining the objective to the group, it is also beneficial to
inform the student of how the training session will be used, and how
the evaluation will be performed.
The instructor must clearly explain the objective to the class. A lesson
entitled Organizing fro Emergency Operations could have several different objectives in different domains. The students may have different expectations based on their previous training and experience so it
is important that objectives be presented and discussed at the beginning of each lesson.
4.4 STRUCTURING A LESSON PLAN

QUALITIES OF A LESSON PLAN
A GOOD LESSON PLAN
Can Be Reused
Identities Key Points
Organizes Lesson
Can be Used by Others
Assures Consistency
A training objective tells the student the steps required to achieve the goals,
and the lesson plan is the map or outline, telling the instructor how to accomplish those steps to reach the goals.
All Right Reserved
88
A properly prepared lesson plan is an essential reference tool for conducting

training, whether the instructor prepares the lesson plan, it is obtained from
the Emergency Management Institute, or is obtained from a commercial
source, a good lesson plan will identify the essential elements of a lesson and
provide the guidance needed to properly prepare and present the material to
the student.
ELEMENT OF A LESSON PLAN
LESSON PLAN MUNBER

COURSE TITLE
LESSON TITLE
OBJECTIVE(S)
SCOPE
REFEENCE(S)
REQUIREMENTS
REMARKS
CONTENT/ACTIVITY
TIME
INSTRUCTORS NOTES
1. Lesson Plan Number : Numbered sequentially from the beginning of the

course on within units of the course.
2. Course Titles
3. Lesson Title
4. Objective (s)
5. Scope. A statement of the subject matter to be cohered in the lesson
6. Reference. Instructor References Student Referent
7. Requirements. Classroom, audio-visual equipment and materials, handout,
support assistance, instructors, and subject area specialists.
8. Remarks information about the lesson, general or specific, which the
instructor should know.

All Right Reserved
89
9.
Content / Activity
a. Instructional content outline
Introduction
Objectives
Overview
Presentation
Practical application, if required
Summary
Evaluation
b. Description of activities
10.
11.
Time
a.
Time span of lessons segment
b.
Elapsed time from the beginning to the conclusion of the lesson
Instructor Notes
a.
b.
References to visual
References to textual materials
c.
Other information
Lesson plans may differ in format and content. However, every lesson
plan should address the above points to assure maximum learning.
On pages _____ through _____ there is a sample lesson plan taken from
this course. A blank lesson plan forms for use in preparing lesson plans in the
future is on pages ______ through _____ .

All Right Reserved
90
5.0 ENVIRONMNT, EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIAL

5.1 Classroom Environment
Safety
Student Comfort
Accessibility
Facilities
Arrangement
Classroom space is an important consideration in the preparation step. One

of the first issues the an instructor must address is finding a suitable teaching
environment, or assuring that the select classroom is suitable for the instruction to be presented.
Factors that must be considered when selecting space in which to teach include the following:
5.1.1 Safety Factors
Adequate exits
Can handicapped student enter and exit easily?

Emergency telephone
Fire Alarm System
Fire Extinguishers
First Aid Equipment
Proper Electrical Connections for Equipment
5.1.2 Student Comfort

Adequate lighting for activity
Limitation of External noise
Ability to control temperature
Adequate ventilation

All Right Reserved
91
5.1.3 Accessibility During Adverse Weather Conditions

5.1.4 Available of Facilities
Adequate toilet facilities
Electricity for demonstration
Telephone where students can be reached in an emergency
Pay Phones
Luncheon facilities
5.1.5 Classroom Arrangements

Type of instructional methodology
Lecture
Demonstration
Practice
It is advantages to find a facility that provides maximum flexibility for seating
arrangements.
The position of the instructor should be based upon the method of instruction.
For example, during discussion, the instructor must be in a position where he/
she can be seen and heard by all students, and where all students can see the
instructor.
It is essential that the instructor inspect the facility before the actual instruction is to take place to assure that the classroom is adequate for the instructional requirements, including audio-visual equipment.
Additionally, the in-
structor should arrive early enough on the day of the course to set up and
checkout the classroom including: the seating arrangement; presence of
course location signs and near the classroom door; the facility is large enough
to require such information; water and glasses on the tables; and assured
that all required AV equipment is present.

All Right Reserved
92
5.2 Equipment & Instructional Materials

Equipment & Instructional Aids
Determine Needs
Take Inventory
Order or Borrow
Test and Set Up
A final, important consideration in preparing to teach is the ordering, collecting, testing and placing of the equipment that you will need to carry out your
program. Supplies, materials and equipment are critical to instruction. Forgetting a particular item cam sometimes destroy the continuity of an instructional sequence of training exercise. A checklist is help to insure that all of
the necessary items have been considered.
Once of the first things that must be done is to take inventory of all equipment and materials in sock. Determine if available equipment is adequate to
conduct the lesson. For some lessons, each student will need one set of materials. For other lessons one set of materials per class may be all that is necessary. Order the necessary printed materials and have reproduction of other
materials done well in advance of the course.
Part of the instructors preparation and planning for equipment may include
ordering additional materials or borrowing them from another source. If no
additional equipment or materials can be ordered or borrowed it will be necessary to make use of whatever is on hand and to adjust the instruction to suit
the circumstances.
Make sure all equipment and materials are ready before class starts.
Co-
ordinate classroom set-up with other instructors participating in the same

course and use other emergency office personnel, as necessary in assisting
with classroom preparation. Getting other to assist also may mean that they
may be better motivated to participate in the lesson.

All Right Reserved
93
Considerations discussed here should also be applied to all audio-visual materials and other logistical items necessary for a given lesson. The point is to
make sure that the instructor plans very careful for each need.
6.0 PRACTICAL APPLICATION

6.1 Introduction, Objective and Overview
Objective 1:
The course participant will be able to apply the principles learned in units II
and III in presentations before his/her peers.
Practical application is a logical follow-up to the first two units of instruction.
From the beginning of the course each student has been developing a topic,
objectives, selecting appropriate teaching methods and visual aids, and preparing a lesson plan in anticipation of presenting a brief instructional session
to other members of the course.
Microteaching Session I
Group Debriefing
Preparation
Microteaching Session II
The participant Review Form contained in this until will be used to evaluate
each presentation. (Copies of the form will be provided by the instructor during the presentation sessions). A review of the form will provide the participants with insights concerning factors they should consider in preparing and
presenting their instructions.
These will be helpful in structuring your responses to students, in how you
provide feedback to your students, and in how you handle problems situations.

All Right Reserved
94
Presentation
Methodology
Instructional Aids
Classroom Dynamics
Methodology
Lecture
Illustration
Discussion
Conference
Demonstration
Instructional Aids
Chalkboards
Flipcharts
Charts, Posters and Models
Overhead projector and transparencies
Slides and slide /tape
Film
Video tape
Classroom Dynamics
Establishing rapport
Involving students through questioning skills
Students with special needs
Practicum

All Right Reserved
95
Instructional Methods
Lecture
Illustration
Discussion
Conference
Demonstration
6.2 Methodology
The method or mode of instruction is selected for use is dependent , to large
extent, on the type of content or skill identified in the objective. Some methods are more effective for teaching one type ob objective than for another.
For this reason, the mode chosen is extremely important.
There are five standards instruction methods. They are:
Lecture
Illustration
Discussion
Conference
Demonstration
6.2.1 Lecture
Lecturer Method
*
Can be used for large groups
Moves quickly through materials
Lecturer is the transfer of information through telling. Lecture is good

for providing large amounts information in short periods of time to
large groups. It require a clear and concise delivery of facts in a logical
sequence. There are a number of ideas that can be used to make a
lecturer move confident and more effective
All Right Reserved
96
a. Determine what students already know. If too much time is spent

on things that they have already know, the lecture will be boring. If
it is assumed that the student have knowledge or skills that they
don't actually possess, they will be frustrated. Knowing where to
start is critical.
b. The following list identifies ways to properly build a lecture.
Move from known to unknown

Move from familiar to unfamiliar
Move from simple to complex
Move from the whole to the part, then back to the whole
c. Keeps class members involved in the information being presented.

d. Use Appropriate examples of illustrations.
e. Keep lectures short and concise.
f. Intersperse lectures with discussion, question and answer periods,
and demonstrations.
6.2.2 Illustration
Illustration Method
*
Shows items that are small or hidden
Shows unusual occurrences
Shows complex processes
Illustration is a teaching method that involves clarifying through the use

of models, diagrams, charts, drawings, pictures, slide or film.
It makes clear what might otherwise be hard to see because the item is
small in size, too hidden to see, or too dangerous to have in the classroom.

All Right Reserved
97
Illustration can also be used when teaching a complex process. Each

step of the process might be shown on a separate chart to make the
steps more clear.
In order to avoid pitfalls and to use illustration effectively, the following
suggestion are made:
a. Illustration is best when aids are used to show detail or processes

too small or too hidden to be shown in normal demonstration. Be
sure aids are clear, uncluttered and show important detail clearly.
b. Aids should be large enough to be seen from a distance. Nothing is
more confusing than a chart with fine print that is almost invisible or
has details that are lost at a distance of three feet.
c. Aids should be clearly visible to all members in the class. This will
probably not be a problem with only four people, it will be a concern
in a training session with ten or more.
d. Show only one aid at a time. Unused charts sitting around the room
will only be distracting. Students may be busy trying to figure out a
chart while the instructor is trying to get their attention on another
part of the lesson.
e. Show a process step-by-step, chart by chart.
f. As in conducting a demonstration, explain once, then let a student
explain the process using the same aids, model or charts.
6.2.3 Discussion
Discussion Method
*
*
Sharing information among participants

High degree of student involvement

All Right Reserved
98
a.
A discussion is a good teaching method when you are teaching

topic in which a class members have some experience and
knowledge.
b.
A discussion encourages students to think about a topics
c.
A discussion is particularly useful when the program is dealing

with familiar material and the instructor wants to say that members are actively involved in a lesson
d.
A discussion can naturally follow a lecture or demonstration.
e.
When some class members have more experience that others, a

discussion will allow those members with more expertise to share
their knowledge with the less-experienced.
f.
A discussion is also the natural way to deal with questions and

What if.. situations that the group is likely to generate.
g.
In a discussion, class members can learn the facts, principles, or

techniques the instructor has determined the students need to understand. However, the students also learn through sharing with
one another.
h.
The following tips will help you improve the educational quality of
training discussions:
1.
Define the discussion objective clearly right from the

start.
2.
Make the topic clear to the group
3.
Let the group know how your intent to achieve the objective through an overview.
4.
Ask questions to start the presentation
5.
Keep the discussion centered on the topic.
6.
When someone becomes involved in discussing unrelated

information, bring the discussion back on the track by stating
Thats a good point, but what were concerned with today
is... or. True, but today were worried about mitigation, not

All Right Reserved
99
7.
A discussion is a good
Tactfully credit the student with shar-
ing interesting information , but make it clear that the time

available needs to be spent on the topics at hand.
8.
Encourage alternate answers from other class members.
9.
In a discussion, no other person is the expert. When one

person offers a suggestion, encourage further thinking. You
might ask the group, Is there any other ways of handling this
type of situation?
10. Encourage participant from everyone.
When one person
seems to be doing all the talking involve another.

11. When an agreement is reached, summarize, and list the key
points.
6.2.4 Conference
Conference Method
*
Sharing information among participants
High degree of student involvement
The conference is a method to direct thinking of a group towards the solution

of a problem.
The conference members should have the power to our their solution into effect, or to make recommendations to those who have that power.
The following procedures will enhance the conference method:
1. Insure that your audience has knowledge to handle a conference.

2. Inform class members thoroughly about the topics well before the time of
the actual conference.

All Right Reserved
100
3. Information will include shared experiences. The instructor has the responsibility for supplying copies of any report or articles on related incidents to the conference.
4. The instructor must also provide handout materials, if available, to broaden the conferences perspective in trying to solve the problem under consideration.
5. Allow adequate time for the group to reach a workable solution.
6. Expect and allow differences of opinion.
7. Use the flip chart to record positions and conclusions.
8. Give the group feedback from time to time.
Summarize what has been said or ask a question to get the discussion
moving.
6.2.3 Demonstration
Related theory to performance
Allow
Demonstration is a method of instruction in which the instructor (and/or assistant) explains the procedure while performing it.
The procedure is described as it would be done on the job while students see
the action correctly carried out step-by-step.
Difficult demonstrations, such as those which require seasonal weather conditions, may be recorded on film or video tape to be shown at later date.
Demonstration as a primary teaching method should be utilized when a skill is
thought.

All Right Reserved
101
Demonstrations can be improvement by use of the following techniques:

1.Thoroughly prepare and rehearse the demonstration.
2.Arrange space so everyone can see clearly.
Have students in a circle or ask some to sit on the floor or low chairs while others stand
or sit on tables. Be sure everyone can see the small movements, as well as the details.
3.First, identify the action at normal speeds so class members can see how the skill is
usually performance and how much time is needed to complete the action.
4.Second, conduct the demonstration again slowly. Explain key points and why procedures are performed in a certain way.
5.In a third demonstration let the student explain the process and the key points as you
demonstrate.
6.Answer questions or repeat demonstration steps if requested to do so.
7.Ask questions to see if participants have learned key steps of the skill.
Efficient use demonstrations will enhance the learning process.
6.3
Instructional Aids
6.3.1 Reasons for Using Instructional Aids

Instructional aids improve and enhance instruction for many reasons.
Student s
would rather get involved in a situation that just sit back and watch. For this reason
the instructor should seek to involve class members as mush as possible, even in the
presentation step.
Instructional aids work because they introduce another level of involvement into the
presentation. When using lecture alone only the sense of hearing is involved. Adding and overhead visual, a chart, slide, or film increase impact by involving two senses - hearing and sight. Using models can add a third sensetouch.
By making the presentation easier to remember, training aid increase the long-term
learning retention of the student.
The instructor must insure that instructional aids support the lesson and do not detract from the lesson objectives.

All Right Reserved
102
6.3.2 Types of Instructional Aids

Selection of the proper instructional aid for a given situation is very important as
each aid has specific advantages and disadvantages. There are also certain techniques that can be used which enhance the value of each aid.
1.Chalkboards
Removable
Excellent for problem covered teaching
Aspects of diagrams can be easily changed
Responses can be listed during instruction
a)Advantages
Readily available
Flexible in application
Require no special equipment
Can be used in a variety of situations
b)Disadvantage
Work must be organised to avoid clutter
Difficult to write and hold class attention
c)Techniques
Be sure board is clean
Talk to the group, not to the board.
write main points and diagrams before class

Cover materials until needed
If capturing ideas on board during discussion, ask one student to write main
points
Keep writing and diagrams simple and clear

Printed lettering should be at least two inches high
Use the Lock-point-look technique
*
look at board
Points to the area under discussion
Look at class and begin discussion

All Right Reserved
103
2. Flipchart
Prepared in advance
Covered until ready
Can be saved
Inexpensive
Used to capture student ideas
Pages can be separated and posted
a) Advantages
Permanent, transportable
Can be prepared outside of classroom
Fairly inexpensive
Can be used to capture students ideas
Diagrams can be drawn ahead of time
Pages can be separated and posted
b) Disadvantage
May Be difficult to see in large group

c) Techniques
Prepare diagrams and charts ahead of time

Use simple, uncluttered diagrams
Write clearly and keep it simple
Avoid using colors that are predominant in the classroom
Cover until ready for use
Use a pointer
Separate and post pages when appropriate
3. Charts, Posters and Models

Purchased or prepared in advance
Reusable
Can be left around room for future reference
All Right Reserved
104
a) Advantage
May be purchased or prepared in advance

Can be prepared outside of classroom fro reference
Models allow students to see objects in multiple planes
b) Disadvantages
Details may be small and difficult to see

Designers, not the instructor control the amount of detail and
complexity
May be very expensive

c) Techniques
Explain size relationship scale i.e. 1 + 1

Explain the whole model, then the parts in logical order, then
the whole again
Use a pointer to assure all student can see.

4. Overhead Projector & Transparencies
Inexpensive to preparation
Can be made from printed materials using different copy machines
Can be save and reused
Can be written on during presentation
Lights can be left on
Overlays can be added to transparency to add information
sequentially.

All Right Reserved
105
a) Advantage
Inexpensive preparation
Can be made from printed material using photocopy machine and specialized film
Frame can carry instructor notes

Prepared material can be saved and reused
Problems can be worked on and projected simultaneously
Lights can be left on during projection allowing the student to take notes
Overlays can be added to transparency to add information sequentially
b) Disadvantages
Keystone effect requires screen adjustment

Projection equipment expensive and not very portable
Long term use may tire students
c) Techniques
Make sure that all transparencies are prepared in advance of

class
Transparencies can be photocopies from black-ink paper

masters.
Transparencies can also be drawn by hand using special

transparency markers.
Stacks Transparencies in order or use

Mark transparencies to indicate upper right corner
Place transparency on projector before turning on light
Use a blank mask to reveal one portion of transparency at
a time

All Right Reserved
106
Mask should be under transparency to as sure mask does not fall.
5.
Slides and Tapes
Inexpensive
Adaptable
Equipment if portable
Title Slide can be produced by using a menu board
Programs can related to local community
a)
Advantage
Inexpensive to produce
Pen or pencil can used as a pointer the projector which will project on screen
Prepared overlays can be used to add detailed information on transparencies.
Once the transparency has done its job turn off the projector
Mask or turn off the projector while changing transparencies.
Can be easily updated

Production and projection equipment is relative portable
Title slides can be made upon a menu board and photographed
Slide as independent units can be used in various presentation in the order
and pace to suit the instructor
Music and text can be synchronized with a tape recorded for presentation of
slides
b)
Disadvantages
Cameras, projector and tape recorder are expensive

Trays, projectors and tape recorders must be compatible
Slides can be improperly inserted
Rooms needs to be completely dark for effective presentations making note
taking difficult

All Right Reserved
107
c)
Techniques
Production
Start with objectives and develop shooting script
Slides are inexpensive, shoot more slides than needed
If detail is complex or explanation is long, shoot a number of slides of
same subject
Edit slides using only the highest quality
Mix in a non-related slide from time to time to allow the participants a brief
rest from subject area
Presentation
Preview Presentation
Assure adequate length of power and control cords
Have spare bulb on hand
Check the machines
Focus projector and have tape cued before students arrive
Introduce the slide presentation relating it to previous aspects of the
course.
Leave slide on long enough for group to study and/or understand it
Involved the students through questioning
6.
Films
Large audience
Strong Impact
a)
Advantages
Unexcelled to slow motion, timing, and phasing including changes occurring over extended periods of time with outstanding visual fidelity
Shows operations either accelerated or in slow motion
Realistically presents scenes and sound which otherwise would be impossible to see and hear
Large numbers of people can view at one time
Strong impact
b)
Disadvantages
Room must be dark

Films are expensive to rent or buy
Films get out of data quickly
Projectors are expensive to rent or buy
Difficult to secure desired films at the tine and for the length of time needed
Do not permit student interaction
Instructor cannot edit of change film
Films can be easily damaged
Negative points are strongly reinforce.

All Right Reserved
108
c)
Considerations and Techniques

Before showing
Preview film
Have spare bulbs on hand set screen at least four feet from floor
Focus projector and cue
Introduce film, identify key points and related to course
During showing
Keep others from entering
Intercept phone calls if possible
After showing
7.
Follow-up presentation by summarizing key points

Discuss key points, examples and incidents
Question student
Video-tapes
Ease of use
Instant playback
Physical skill evaluation
Student instructor evaluation
a)
Advantages
Easily used and instantly shown
Physical skilled can be recorded and played back for the student to observe and critique
Student instructors can see their own performance before a class
b)
Disadvantages
c)
Equipment is very expensive

Display equipment is not very portable
Quality depends on skill of camera operator
Disadvantages
May need multiple monitors for a large class

All Right Reserved
109
6.4 Classroom Dynamics

6.4.1
Establishing Rapport
Speaking Voice
Eye Contact
Gesture
Dress
a)
Speaking Voice
Use a normal speaking voice and a microphone if necessary
Sound interested and be interested
b)
Eye Contact
Look at people, making contact with each student for a few moments during
the presentation
Students eyes will indicate whether the message is getting through
Resist the temptation to look at the wall, the clock, or over the students
head.
If the students eyed wander it may be time to change the instructional format.
c)
Gestures
Gestures should be used sparingly for emphasis
Use posture and movement to signal change of topic or point of view
Make movement conscious and meaningful
Make language and facial expression can lend support and encouragement
to students
Be cautions of overusing gestures as they may be distracting to students.
d)
Dress
The instructor should dress appropriately to suit the agency being represented and the material being presented
The instructor should dress appropriately for the group and material being
taught.

All Right Reserved
110
6.4.2 Involving Students Through Questioning Skills

One of the most effective presentation tools is effective questioning.
Good questions involve the student in the topic, force thinking, and reinforce learning. There are a number of different types of questions
that can be used and serve a specific purpose.
6.4.3 Types of Questions
Rhetorical
Knowledge
Comprehension
Application
Analysis
Synthesis
Evaluation
Directed
Overhead

All Right Reserved
111
a) Rhetorical Questions
Rhetorical questions are not really questions at all the sense that a
immediate answer is expected. Rather, they are asked to a whole
group without the expectation of a spoken answer. They are used
to generate thinking, set the tone for presentation and often tied
are to general knowledge. They are often used during a lecture.
b) Knowledge Questions
Knowledge questions are asked to determine weather students remember what they have read, seen, or heard. These are important
since they help to set a base for further discussion or consideration.
c) Comprehension Questions
Comprehension Questions check whether the students understand
what they have read or seen. An example might be to find how
there would define an emergency.
d) Application Question
Application question require students to apply certain rules to solve
a problem or interpret the meaning of a given situation.
e) Analysis Questions.
Analysis questions ask the students to explain relationships or to
interpret the meaning of a given situation.
f) Synthesis Questions
Synthesis questions ask the students to develop solutions to problems or to make predictions.

All Right Reserved
112
g) Evaluation Questions
Evaluation questions ask the students to think critically, judge the
worth of an idea, or from an opinion about an issue.
h) Direct Questions
Direct questions are questions directed to a specific person.
i) Overhead questions
Overhead questions are questions addressed to an entire group.
They are used to get whole group thinking. Anyone may volunteer
to answer.
6.4.4 Questioning Techniques
Relay Questions
Ask-Pause Call
There are a number of techniques that may be used to make questioning more effective.
a) Relay questioning is the process of redirecting questions from one
student to another rather than providing an answer. It is used to
generate discussion, get other class members involved and to acquire more information rather than simply airing a particular point
of view.
b) Use the Ask-Pause-Call techniques for the overhead or relay questions. To us this techniques, ask the question, and then give the
group five to fifteen seconds before calling for an answer. Good
thinking takes time.

All Right Reserved
113
c) All questions should be asked in a sincere attempt to involve student in the lesson. By asking the students to share opinions and
experiences, the instructor is sometimes asked to find out the extend of their learning or knowledge.
d) Do not ask questions in a way that is punishing or embarrassing.
Credit the portion of partially correct answers to encourage the students thinking.
e) Do not relay questions to which you to do not know the answer unless you inform the group.
6.4.5 Students with Special Needs

Fast Learner
Argumentative student
Students with hidden agenda
Timid Students
Slow learners
Inattentive students
Even when working with strongly motivated adults, the instructor may
find students that have special needs. In any group of adults or more
of the following types of students may be present:
Fast learners
Argumentative students
Timid Students
Slow learners and
Inattentive students
Frequently adults will connect training with experiences that they may
have had in formal education. If individuals had difficulty listening to
an English teacher lecture in high school, they may cause this resentment over to their current training program.

All Right Reserved
114
6.4.6 How to handle students with Special needs

Motivate
Speak Involvement
Personal Attention
Reinforcement
Feedback
Adults may also feel uncomfortable with an instructor who makes them
feel like children. Keep in mind that it can be insulting to an adult to be
talked down to.
An argumentative student may be an instructors most difficult problem. Frequently this student is bidding fro attention. It is best to address this situation on an individual basis after class by informing the
student that actions such as this are disruptive.
Some class disruptions occur due to the social needs of the students as
discussed in Unit II, It is important to encourage in when it is disruptive to the class. This can be done by building group work, discussion
and team practical work into the curriculum.
If the instructor finds that small groups are being disruptive but are discussing the current subject matters, the instructor should take it as a
sign of the need for group discussion on the subject.
The timid student may not ask questions or participate for fear of ridicule. He/she may be someone who is new and inexperienced, or may
be someone with a new and inexperienced, or may be someone with a
lot of experience who fear making an error.
Some students may be slow learners with reading problems or problems with mastering a skill in the psychomotor domain, with other students progressing more rapidly, the slow learner may try to mask the
problem by following quietly along, without asking questions, and by
pretending to understand.

All Right Reserved
115
As problems are identified by the instructor, he/she can plan training

activities likely to be less threatening to students with special needs.
Call on these students only when it is obvious that they can respond
positively to the questions. Allow additional time to application when
these students performing in front of their peers.
7.0 INTRODUCTION, OBJECTIVE AND OVERVIEW

7.1 Practical Application
Objective:
The course participant will be able to define in writing appropriate teaching
methods and appropriate instructional aids for a given topic and an identified
audience
Objective 2:
7.0

All Right Reserved
116

All Right Reserved
117
1.0 INTRODUCTION
With the skills and knowledge you have gained so far, you can now put together a
lesson plan. A lesson plan is a detailed overview of all that you will be covering and
doing in your training session. Your training lesson plan should include such things
as:
the training outcomes/objectives,
where the training will take place,
key areas to be covered,
the training methods,
resources you will use,
assessment tasks and criteria (what will they be required to know or do after
training?).
A well planned training plan will:

Help you stay focused on the training objectives.
Outline the sequence and priorities of the skills and knowledge you need to cover.
Provide a record of the training session.
Be able to be used again or modified if necessary.
2.0 COMPONENTS OF A LESSON PLAN

Lesson plans come in many forms and as you become a more experienced trainer
you will find the methods that best work for you.
A session plan usually has the following components:
a) Topic
The topic is a brief heading of what the lesson is about.

All Right Reserved
118
b) Training Outcome/Objective
Training Outcomes describe what must be achieved within the constraints of
time, resources and learner's ability.
c) Content of Lesson
Content of Lesson is the knowledge and skills taken from the curriculum of the
award. The trainer prepares this material clearly and in sequence indicating:
Definitions.
Key points.
Examples.
The Trainer presents the material to:

Define - the concepts/terms/key points.
Explain - and gives examples
Question - ask for further examples.
Revise - repeats definitions and key terms.
The trainer can present the material all at once in the first part of the lesson or in
parts interlinked with practice.
d) Learning Strategies
This section on learning strategies should show how the trainees are to be
involved. It describes how the lesson is to be organised and presented to the
trainees. The Learning Strategies section may consist of some of the training
strategies we have already looked along with some of the following ideas:

All Right Reserved
119
Introduction
How will you start the lesson? The introduction serves to present the topic
and key purpose of the lesson in a stimulating and novel way. How will you
gain the attention of the class?
Be yourself and comfortable with your introduction. Remember INTROA.
Talk
This is the simplest form to introduce the lesson. Present the topic
title and move into the presentation of the content. Use some anecdotes to emphasise the outcome.
Video
Play a video which introduces the topic.
Icebreaker
Have trainees introduce themselves, or do a practical task not related to the topic.
Puzzle/Task
Hand out a thought provoker to get trainees minds on the job.
Presentation
The Trainer presents the knowledge and skills of the lesson and the
appropriate OHT, visual aids and examples/demonstrations to explain the
knowledge and skills being presented.
What is an effective to deliver the content?

All Right Reserved
120
Lecture
A period of uninterrupted talk. Good for reaching a large audience and covering a lot of material. Talk on material should be
kept to a minimum to keep trainee interest. Use good visual aids
such as OHTs and videos.
Discussion
A free exchange of opinions, knowledge and ideas

allowing demonstration of skills and analysing of
problems. Ensure trainees do not stray from the topic. Be wary
of time.
Demonstration
A Trainer performs a skill while students observe, improving

trainees understanding of skills and
techniques. Involve
all students and ensure pace of the demonstration is suited to
trainees capabilities.
Class Activity
Trainees learn when they are actively involved. Therefore, class tasks/
activities/projects are set and assessment tasks identified to the trainees. The
Trainer observes trainees involved actively and can identify success or a need
for repetition.
Brainstorming
Spontaneous suggestions in response to a question or problem.

Encourages trainees to be creative and to be a leader. All
suggestions are accepted and used.
Role-play
Trainees act out certain situations. An active learning example

however, trainees may be embarrassed at acting in front of
others or
see it as childish.
Scenarios
A simulated real-life situation,. Reinforces practical work,

encourages trainees to solve problems and show initiative.
Ensure roles and scenarios are clearly defined and understood.
Practical Work
Hands-on situations. Used to work on basic skills and

techniques. Ensure instructions are clear and equipment works.

All Right Reserved
121
SAMPLE 1
General Training Program (1-hour)
Topic: Personal Protective Equipment
Overview of the Legal Requirements
OSHA 1994 requires employers to protect their employees from workplace hazards
through the use of engineering or work practice controls. When these controls are
not feasible or do not provide sufficient protection, the use of personal protective
equipment (PPE) is required.
Employers are required to assess the workplace to determine if hazards are present,
or are likely to be present, which necessitates the use of PPE. If employees use PPE,
employers must establish general procedures, called a PPE Program, to give
employees necessary protective equipment and to train them to use it properly.
Step 1: Planning the Lesson

a) Instructional Materials.
1. PowerPoint presentation
2. Instructor notes.
3. Other materials.
b) Instructional Objectives.
1. Complete the required topics for the OSHA 10- hour course.
2. Complete the following optional topics:
a.
b.
c.
3. Present Personal Protective Equipment to [number] participants.
4. Incorporate active participation in each lesson.
5. Provide a quiz or short evaluation at the end of the course.
6. Ensure feedback from participants at various points in the training.
Guest Speakers/Presenters
and Topics/Responsibilities.
This Material
is for Training Purposes Only
All Right Reserved
122
Step 2: Presenting the Lesson

a) Lesson Introduction
Introductory remarks or transition from previous lesson.
b) Learning Objectives/Outcomes.
Upon completion of the lesson, participants will be able to:

1. Describe the two primary means of protecting employees from workplace hazards
prior to considering personal protective equipment (PPE).
Possible responses:
Engineering Controls. Physically change the machine or work environment to

prevent employee exposure to a potential hazard.
isolate the process
change the process
enclose the process

use proper ventilation
consider design specifications
substitute less harmful material.
Work Practice Controls

Remove employees from exposure to the potential hazard by changing the
way they do their jobs.
Use of wet methods to suppress dust.
Personal hygiene.
Housekeeping and maintenance.
Job rotation of workers.

All Right Reserved
123
2. Explain what should be include in the PPE training
Possible responses:
Training should give the employees information and hands-on experience with
the PPE. This includes:
guidance on when PPE is necessary
specifics about what types of PPE are necessary under certain circumstances
practice to properly put on PPE, take it off, adjust and wear it
information about limitations of PPE
guidance about the proper care, maintenance, useful life and disposal of PPE
3. List PPE that may be used to protect the eye, face, head, feet, hands/arms,
bodies and hearing.
Possible responses:
Eyes - goggles, safety glasses and face shields
Face shields
Head hard hats

Feet - safety shoes
Hands/Arms gloves and sleeves
Body coveralls, body suites, vests, aprons
Ears/Hearing earplugs, ear muffs, canal caps
4. Identify hazards that are lessened or eliminated by using the appropriate PPE for
eye protection, hearing protection, foot and hand protection, face protection and
body protection.

All Right Reserved
124
Possible responses:
Goggles and safety glasses protect against:

dust, flying particles, shavings or sawdust
splashes from molten metal, acids or chemicals
splashes from blood or potentially infectious body fluids that might
splash, spray, or splatter
intense light caused by welding tools or lasers
Face shields protect against:

nuisance dusts
potential splashes or sprays of hazardous liquids
intense light caused by welding tools or lasers
Hard hats protect against:

falling objects
bumping head against fixed objects
contact with exposed beams or pipes

contact with electrical conductors
Ear plugs, ear muffs and canal caps protect against:

intermittent, sudden or prolonged exposure to high decibel sounds
Safety shoes protect against:

heavy objects falling on or rolling against the foot
exposure to nails or other sharp objects that might pierce the foot
molten metal that might splash on the foot
hot, wet, or slippery surfaces

All Right Reserved
125
Gloves protect against:

burns, bruises, abrasions, cuts, and punctures
fractures and amputations
chemical exposure
Coveralls, body suits, vests, sleeves and aprons protect against:

intense heat
splashes of hot metal or other hot liquids
impacts from tools, machinery, or materials
cuts
hazardous chemicals
contact with potentially infectious material like blood
radiation
Planned Activities, Discussion or Participant Interaction
Step 3: Evaluating Student Learning and Instruction

Lesson Evaluation and Comments.
Reference
OSHA 1994, Regulations and Orders.
FMA 1967, Regulations and Rules.
Part 6V, Personal Protective Equipment Management, SSS Student Handout.

All Right Reserved
126
SAMPLE 2
COURSE TITLE : Site Safety Supervisor
TOPIC NO
TOPIC
TIME
60
min
: Introduction to OHS Management System
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1
To identify basic elements of ILO-OSH MS:2001.
To identify basic elements of a successful OSH Management System
To enable the participants perform their duties as stipulated under Regulations

25 & 26, Factories & Machinery (Building Operations & Works of Engineering
Construction) (Safety) Regulations 1986
SCOPE OF LEARNING
1
PDCA Concept - How to Manage OSH?
What is ILO-OSH MS:2001?
Benefits of ILO-OSH MS:2001.
Objectives of ILO-OSH MS:2001.
Elements of ILO-OSH MS:2001 at National & Organisational Level.
Basic Elements of a Successful OSH MS.

REFERENCES
Handout : Part 3 : Introduction to OSH MS, Page 59 - 67
Guidelines on Occupational Safety & Health Management System, ILO-OSH

MS:2001
MS 1722 OSH MS
Presentation Slides : Part 3 - Introduction to OSH MS

All Right Reserved
127
REQUIREMENTS
1
Presentation Slides - Power point.
Lap -Top Computer.
LCD Projector.
Electrical Extension Cords.
White Board.
Marker - 3 Colours.
Laser Pointer.
REMARKS
Participants should be advised to have a copy of the Guidelines on Occupational Safety and Health Management System, ILO-OSH MS:2001and MS
1722 OSH MS.

All Right Reserved
128
TIME
CUM.
TIME
1 min
PROCEDURES/INSTRUCTIONS
RESOURCES
Introduce yourself, if you just took over the

class.
Slide 1
1 min
2 min
To identify learning objectives of this topic.
Slide 2
2 min
4 min
To discuss the PDCA concept in managing OSH.
Slide 3
3 min
7 min
To discuss the development of ILO-OSH

MS:2001 - tripartite constituent, etc.
Slides 4 - 5
3 min
10 min
To discuss benefits of ILO-OSH MS:2001.
Slide 6
2 min
12 min
To identify main objectives of ILO-OSH

MS:2001.
Slide 7
3 min
15 min
To identify objectives of ILO-OSH MS:2001 at

national level.
Slide 8
3 min
18 min
To identify objectives of ILO-OSH MS:2001 at

organisational level.
Slide 9
2 min
20 min
To identify elements of ILO-OSH MS:2001 for

national framework.
Slide 10
3 min
23 min
To identify elements of ILO-OSH MS:2001 at

organisational level.
Slide 11
4 min
27 min
To discuss ILO-OSH MS:2001 at organisational

level - Policy and Organising.
Slide 12
4 min
31 min

level - Planning & Implementation & Evaluation.
Slide 13
3 min
34 min

level - Action for Improvement.
Slide 14

All Right Reserved
129
TIME
CUM.
TIME
PROCEDURES/INSTRUCTIONS
3 min
37 min
To identify elements of a successful OSH

Management System.
Slide 15
3 min
40 min
To discuss OSH Policy.
Slide 16
5 min
45 min
To discuss organisation.
5 min
50 min
To discuss planning and setting of objectives &

standards.
Slide 19
4 min
54 min
To discuss performance monitoring.
Slide 20
6 min
60 min
To discuss audit and review.
Slide 21
RESOURCES
Slides 17 -18

All Right Reserved
130

All Right Reserved
131
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Every presentation in a training program should be planned. The trainers who do not
plan their presentations are not doing their job properly. Unless the trainer is
particularly gifted, it is most unlikely that the presentation will be successful and
effective if it is unplanned. All effective trainers plan their presentations. They know
precisely how the presentation will flow before they begin. The trainer who does not
plan presentations is attracting trouble. Trainees are quick to sense a lack of
planning, and their response will reflect their disdain for the trainer.
2.0 LEARNING ENVIRONMENT

The facility you choose to conduct your training session can contribute significantly
to the effectiveness of your session.
A safe or positive learning environment is one in which participants are free from
harm, discrimination and teasing; where tolerance and acceptance are present;
where new ideas and creative problem solving are encouraged; and where
participants can ask questions and learn without fear of mental or physical
discomfort.
In-house facilities are usually convenient and are at a low cost or no cost.
3.0 TRAINING AIDS

All learning is through the senses. The more senses are brought into use, the more
effective is the learning; 97 percent of learning is achieved through simultaneous
appeal to the eye and ear. It is because of this that we should make use of
audiovisual aids in training.
Effective use of audiovisual aids can be included in any sort of presentation. Charts,
slides, videos, overhead transparencies and films can be used to add interest as well
as supplement verbal explanations.

All Right Reserved
132
Proper use of instructional aids saves time, adds interest, helps trainees learn and
makes your job easier. But remember that aids to training are aids only. They are
not substitutes for training.
Trainers should use training aids to supplement their training rather than to replace
all or part of it.
Training aids can be classified into the following categories:
Projective
Motion pictures.
Videos.
Colour slides.
Overhead projector transparencies.
Computer.
Non-projective
Blackboard.
Whiteboard.
Charts and diagrams.
Models.
Exhibits.
Handouts.
Tape recorder.
In selecting aids, take into account the following:

Practicability.
Attractiveness and interest; vividness.
Suitability.
Complexity.
Clarity.

All Right Reserved
133
Portability.
Serviceability.
Availability.
Location.
Preparation and presentation.

Time factor.
4.0 DELIVERING THE TRAINING

Even when demonstrating tasks during training there will always be a part of your
training session that involves new information. Presenting information neednt be
simply about participants sitting back and the trainer lecturing. There are many ways
that a trainer can present information in an interesting way which will allow
participants to practice and apply the new information. The following guidelines can
be used when planning your training session.
Present information in small chunks

Dont overload participants with too much new information at once.
Put chunks of information into an appropriate sequence.
Make it interesting
Create interest in the new information.
Link the new information with something they already know.
Use a variety of methods/resources

Combining a talk with a project or case study will make it more interesting.
Use flip charts, coloured pens and video to liven up the presentation.

All Right Reserved
134
Allow for breaks

Allow time for participants to absorb and reflect on the information.
Dont overload participants.
Check for understanding

Ensure that participants understand the information.
Ask appropriate questions.
Get participants to tell you what they know.
Get participants to practice the new information

Use activities which get participants to practice and apply the new
information such as role plays, brainstorming ideas and discussions. This
will get participants actively involved.
People want to see your face, expressions and read your body language. It is
impossible to connect with the audience or read the reactions to your presentation if
you are "out of the picture", hidden behind a lectern. As a presenter, you need to be
aware of and take care of your audiences needs. Keep your audience awake by talking to them, asking them questions, moving towards them and making
eye-contact. You need to be an integral part of your presentation, not just a
narrator.
Have some type of visual for participants to look at as they enter the room and
settle in which will inform them that your presentation will be different. For example,
you could display: a funny quotation or interesting, thought-provoking saying on the
overhead, a nicely done color flip chart, a fact and myth display.

All Right Reserved
135
Other ways to create an interactive, friendly atmosphere include:

familiarizing yourself and the participants with safety/housekeeping items
such as location of exits and washrooms.
beginning the session on time.
greeting people as they come in the room.
engage in casual conversation (create allies) but dont start giving your
presentation.
demonstrate positive, open body language even if someone challenges you.
introduce yourself to others if you are on a panel.
introduce yourself to several members of the audience using a firm
handshake.
being available during breaks
making eye-contact.
having participants fill out name tags so that you can call them by their name.
listening to the question and then answering - do not anticipate the rest of
the question as this will lead to a confused answer for the person asking the
question.
keeping distractions to a minimum, such as squeaky doors and flickering
lights.
If you arrive early enough, there is usually time to do something about it.
IMAGINE SUCCESS.
4.1 Tool-Box Talk

A tool-box talk is a hands-on way to remind workers that safety and health
are important on the job.
Tool-box talks deal with specific problems on site. They do not replace formal
training.
Through tool-box talks you can tell workers about safety and health
requirements for the tools, equipment, materials, and procedures they use
every day or for particular jobs.

All Right Reserved
136
Each talk will take about five minutes to present.

In delivering tool-box talks, your objective is to help workers RECOGNIZE
and CONTROL hazards on the project.
You give tool-box talks because you are responsible for advising workers
about any existing or possible danger to their safety and health .
Tool-box talks demonstrate the commitment of employers and workers to
safety and health on the job.
a) What makes tool-box talk work?
Choose a talk suited to site and work conditions.

Dont give a talk on quick-cut saws when none are being used on the
job.
Deliver the talk where it will be most appropriate.

That could be the job office, out on the site, or near the tools and
equipment you are talking about.
Introduce the subject clearly. Let workers know exactly what you are
going to talk about and why its important to them.
Refer to the Safety Talk for information. But wherever possible use
your own words.
Connect key points to things your crew is familiar with on the project.
Pinpoint hazards. Talk about what may happen.
Use information from the Safety Talk to explain how to control or
prevent these hazards.
Wherever possible, use real tools, equipment, material, and jobsite

situations to demonstrate key points.
Ask for questions. Answer to the best of your knowledge. Get more
information where necessary.
Ask workers to demonstrate what they have learned.

Keep a record of each talk delivered. Include date, topic, and names of
attendees.

All Right Reserved
137
4.2 Document the Training

Documentation on training should include includes:
Trainees and trainers name.

Date of training.
Subject(s) being trained - procedures, practices, related policies, rules, etc.
Certification - trainee and trainer signatures.
Trainee statement of understanding and intent to comply.
4.3 Evaluating the Training

Evaluation is the process of reflecting on and analysing the training session in
order to validate the methods or identify areas for improvement.
When evaluating your training session you will need to get information about:
the content of your training session,
your skills as the trainer,
the progress of participants,
results of training (eg, on the job results).
You can gather information about these areas from a number of sources:
participants,
supervisors/managers,
colleagues,
yourself.

All Right Reserved
138

All Right Reserved
139

All Right Reserved
140
1.0 SITE PLANNING
1.1 INTRODUCTION
Proper planning should be an integral part of overall preparation and budgeting for the efficient running of a construction operation. Clear procedures and
standards should be laid down at the start and adequate resources, in terms
of time, materials and money, should start with a pre-construction appraisal
on which administrative arrangements and layout of the site may be based.
1.2 SITE PLANNING

Prior to start work on site a pre-construction appraisal should be conducted
by examining contract documents, specifications and drawings in order to:
a)
Establish and determine any constrains which might effect the site
layout or method of construction;
b)
determine logical sequence of work and identify any high risk operations,
hazardous
process,
etc
which
might
require
specific
arrangements and attentions;

c)
identify and determine the type and capacity of plant and equipment
required and the need for competent or adequately trained operators;
d)
identify and determine material storage requirements whether special

arrangements and provisions are required such as storage for highly
combustible materials;
e)
identify and determine requirements for site security arrangements.

All Right Reserved
141
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE ARRANGEMENTS

1.3.1Statutory Notifications
Relevant statutory notification should be identified which shall include but not
limited to:

Department of Occupational Safety & Health;

Department of Environment;
Construction Industry Development Board;
Local Authorities, etc.
The following notifications are to be made to the Department of

Occupational Safety & Health:

Notification of Factory (JKJ 101) batching plant, fabrication yard, etc.

Site Registration (JKJ 103);
Installation of Machinery Requires Certificate of Fitness (JKJ 105); and
First Use of Any Other Machinery (JKJ 105).
1.3.2
Documentation
Identify and determine arrangements for:

statutory documentation such as safety policy, etc.;

copies of relevant Acts, Regulations, Standard and Codes of Practice;
approved design and calculations by professional engineers,
letter of appointment of safety personnel and safety & health
committee members, and
relevant companys documentations.
1.3.3 Appointment of Safety Personnel/Safety

Organization
Safety & Health Officer / Site Safety Supervisor;
Designated Person, and
Establishment of Safety & Health Committee.

All Right Reserved
142
1.3.4 Arrangements with Sub-Contractors

Identify and determine provision of standard Rules and Conditions for SubContractors, which shall include but not limited to:
safety policies;
codes and standards;
training;
reporting and investigation of accidents/incidents;
welfare and first aid facilities;
personal protective equipment;
permit-to-work/enter;
safe access and safe place of work;
fire precautions;
emergency procedures;
promotions;
site tidiness - housekeeping, etc.
1.3.5 General Site Rules

Determine general site rules, to include, where appropriate clients rules,
covering such as induction, wearing and use of personal protective equipment, etc.
1.3.6 Telephones and Other Services

Arrangement for early installation of services such as telephone, electricity and
water supply.

All Right Reserved
143
1.4 SITE LAYOUT

Information obtained from pre-construction appraisal will enable decisions to
be made on site layout. Details will very depending on operations to be undertaken and the environment but the following will provide as a guide.
1.4.1
Site Boundary
The site should be provided with suitable perimeter fencing. Where
practicable this should consist of 2.0M high close-boarded fence
with lockable gates. The need to protect the public from site hazards, the provisions of security and the location of the site (e.g.
whether the site is in densely
populated area) are considerations affecting the choice of fencing. Particular account must be
taken of the need to prevent children straying on the site.
1.4.2
Safe Access
Safe access and good visibility for plant and vehicles entering
and leaving the site must be ensured, where possible pedestrian
should be excluded from vehicle access ways. Trained banksman should be used on busy highways near public footpaths
and elsewhere if reversing is necessary. One-way
systems or other means of controlling site transport and avoiding
the need to reverse should be considered. The conditions both
vehicle and pedestrian routes must be maintained in good order.
Suitable warning and directional signs must be posted.
1.4.3
Storage of Materials
Location of store and storage areas will be determined by the
availability of space, the nature of the materials and any statutory requirements e.g. in relation to highly flammable materials or
explosives. Considerations must be given to suitable off loading
areas and lifting equipment.
1.4.4 Lifting Appliances

Physical features on the site, building under construction and
environmental constraints will determine positioning of cranes, hoist
and other lifting appliances.

All Right Reserved
144
1.4.5
Temporary Accommodations
Adequate roads of paths must be provided to all temporary accommodation offices, welfare facilities, compounds and workshops. The
special problems of stacked accommodation fire precautions, escape
routes, rubbish build up must be appreciated.
1.4.6
Temporary Services
The positioning and marking of temporary services should be carefully undertaken to avoid possibility of accidental damage
1.4.7
Temporary Structures
Adequate space must be allowed for lighting towers and for scaffolding
and other support work.
1.4.8
Waste Management
Rubbish dumping area must be allocated. Arrangements for regular disposal must be determined particularly for scheduled waste.
1.4.9
Car Parking
Consideration should be given in parking facilities either on or off site.

a) Section 15(2)(a) Provision and Maintenance of Plant and Safe System of Work,
Part IV General Duties of Employers & Self Employed Persons, Occupational
Safety & Health Act 1994.
b) Section 15(2)(d) Maintenance of Working Conditions, Part IV General Duties
of Employers & Self Employed Persons, Occupational Safety & Health 1994.
c) Section 34 Operation of Factory (JKJ 101), Part V, Notice of Occupation of Factory & Registration & Use of Machinery, Factories and Machinery Act 1967.
d) Section 35 - Construction Site Registration (JKJ 103), Part V, Notice of Occupation of Factory & Registration & Use of Machinery, Factories and Machinery Act
1967.
e) Section 36(1) - Installation of Machinery Requires Certificate of Fitness (JKJ
105), Part V, Notice of Occupation of Factory & Registration & Use of Machinery,
Factories and Machinery Act 1967.
f) Section 36(3) - First Used of Any Other Machinery (JKJ 106), Part V, Notice of
Occupation of Factory & Registration & Use of Machinery, Factories and Machinery Act 1967.

All Right Reserved
145
2.0 BUDGETING FOR OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH
2.1 INTRODUCTION
Planning means making arrangements for doing or using something. Budget
means estimate or plan of how money will be spent over a period of time.
The objective of this module is to enable the Site Safety Supervisor in

assisting his/her employer planning and estimating the potential health and
safety requirements and their cost in tendering and site pre-planning stages.
Prior to making any costing for a particular project, the contractors should not
focus on the cost of the work with respect to technical requirements only but
also the safety and health requirements. These may include:
legal requirements as stipulated under relevant legal acts and
reg-
ulations;
clients requirements as specified under relevant specifications and

conditions in the tender document;
examine the drawings and determine the logic of construction sequence

and identify any potential hazards that might arise during the execution
of the work;
identify for any potential usage or handling or hazardous substances,

etc.
Basically a checklist should be developed, so that every potential aspects of

safety and health could be identified and budgeted accordingly.

All Right Reserved
146
2.2 IDENTIFYING POTENTIAL HAZARDS

Identifying potential hazards for construction works may varies from one project to another as the nature and scope of work might be different form one
to another.
A checklist may be developed based on the following:
2.2.1
Special Hazards Applicable Legal Acts, Codes of

Practice and Guidelines
Identify whether the work involves any special or unusual hazards
that require compliance to relevant statutory requirements such as
asbestos, lead, isocyanides, excessive noise, etc. Check what are
the requirements stipulated under relevant statutory provisions.
2.2.2
Induction and Other Training

All site personnel are required to attend the Safety Induction for
Construction Workers program. Besides that requirements on site
safety induction and other continuous training for should be identified. The training programs should cover all level of site personnel
and may include general and specific or competency training. Trainings could be conducted internally or by outsource it externally.
2.2.3
Control and Monitoring

Requirements for the appointment of safety personnel such as competent designated person for specific task, full time site safety officer/supervisor and the establishment of safety and health committee.

All Right Reserved
147
2.2.4
Site Access
If site is adjacent to public roads, provision of vehicles washing bay, designated traffic controller and suitable warning and directional signs.
2.2.5
Safe Means of Access / Place of Work

Provision of scaffold - competent scaffold erector and provision of scaffold
components should be whose responsibility. Requirements for any other
means of access such power elevated working platform, ladders, fall arrest
equipment, etc. should also be considered.
2.2.6
Lighting
Identify the necessity for lighting such as compound lighting for the offices
and storage areas. The possibilities of executing works at night should be
considered.
2.2.7
Manual Lifting/Handling
Assess for works require manual lifting and handling and requirements for
mechanical handling aids.
2.2.8
Mechanical Lifting/Handling
Use of mobile cranes, tower cranes and any other specific lifting equipment to be identified including the provisions of competent operators, necessary
2.2.9
training, authority approval, etc.
Buried Services
Consult relevant authorities for the location of buried services in the vicinity. Possibility for re-aligns the services and establishment and implementation for permit-to-work should not be neglected.

All Right Reserved
148
2.2.10
Overhead Services
Existence of overhead services and height limitations for plant and machinery to move underneath and preventive measures required.
2.2.11 Electrical Safety

Requirements on the appointment of competent electrician, proper distribution an connections and inspection and maintenance electrical power
tools.
2.2.12 Work Over Water/Transport by Water

If there are works to be performed over water, provisions of transport,
working platform, rescue arrangements, etc. are essential considerations
to be made.
2.2.13 Fire Protection

Arrangements for disposal of debris and construction waste, storage of
flammable materials, fire fighting equipment, emergency procedures, separate cooking facilities for workers accommodation, etc.
2.2.14 Welfare Amenity Provision

Provisions of site offices, workers accommodations, washing and sanitary
conveniences, pest control program, canteen, etc. are to be identified.
2.2.15 Site Documentation

Identify arrangements for notifying relevant authorities on certain aspects,
keeping and controlling of document.

All Right Reserved
149
2.2.16
Clients Special Safety Requirements

Identify arrangements for complying with clients special requirements with
respect to safety matter stipulated in the tender document to be checked and
identified.
2.2.17
Promotion and Incentive Schemes

Consideration to be given for promotional and incentives program such as
safety campaign, etc. to encourage and stimulate workers participation.
2.2.18
Welfare Amenity Provision

Provisions of site offices, workers accommodations, washing and sanitary
conveniences, pest control program, canteen, etc. are to be identified.
2.2.19
Site Security
Provisions of perimeter fencing or hoarding, security guards, and site security
pass system, control of materials delivery and disposal.
2.2.20
Others
When identifying the potential hazards, relevant work processes such as excavation, piling, demolition, confined spaces, welding and cutting, etc should not
be neglected as they may pose significant hazards to the project.
2.3 ESTIMATING
Once identified, the potential hazards control measures should be estimated and incorporated as part of tender price. The companys contract division should do the costing.

a)
Section 15, Part IV General Duties of Employers and Self-Employed Persons,

Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994 .
b)
Code of Practice for Safety and Health at Work (MS 426:1994 .
c)
Sub-Section 3.10.4 - Procurement, ILO-OSH:2001.
d)
Sub-Section 3.10.5 - Contracting, ILO-OSH:2001.

All Right Reserved
150

All Right Reserved
151
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Occupational Health and Safety Legislation requires anyone in control of the
workplace to identify the potential hazards of the proposed work, assess the risks
involved and develop controls to eliminate, or minimize, the risk.
2.0 HIRAC - HAZARD IDENTIFICATION, RISK ASSESSMENT AND

CONTROL MEASURES.
2.1 Hazard Identification
Hazard identification is the process of identifying all situations or events that
could give rise to the potential for injury, illness or damage to plant or
property. Hazard identification should take into account how things are being
done, where they are done and who is doing them, and should also consider
how many people are exposed to each hazard identified and for how long.
The following should be accorded top priority in the hazard identification process:
a) High frequency accidents or near misses
Jobs with a high frequency of accidents or near misses pose a significant
threat to the safety and health of workers and should therefore be given
top priority.
b) History of serious accidents causing fatalities
Jobs
that
have
already
produced
fatalities,
disabling
injuries
or
illnesses, regardless of the frequency, should have high priority in the

hazard identification process.

All Right Reserved
152
d) Existence of a potential for serious harm

Jobs that have the potential to cause serious injury or harm need
hazard analysis, even if they have never produced an injury or illness.
e) Introduction of new jobs
Whenever a new job is introduced, a hazard identification process should
be conducted before any worker is assigned to it.
f) Recent changes in procedures, standards or legislations
Jobs that have undergone a change in procedure, equipment or materials,
and work affected by new regulations or standards will need risk
assessment.
Major methods for identification of hazards include:

a) Direct observation method
This involves observing an experienced worker with good safety awareness
carrying out the work several times. The job steps and hazard in each of
these are recorded.
b) Recall method
This should be done for that jobs that are rarely performed. The method
involves inviting the designers, engineers, supervisors and workers
involved in the job to attend a brainstorming session, during which they
would look into the materials, machines and equipment used, and the job
steps to identify the hazards inherent in such jobs.

All Right Reserved
153
In order to identify hazard and evaluate their associated risks, the

proprietor or contractor of the relevant industrial undertaking should in the
first place prepare a list of items covering premises, plant, people and
procedures, and gather information about them. When all the necessary
information is in hand, the hazard related to work activities can be
identified.
2.2 Risk Assessment

The risk associated with a hazard is a reflection of the likelihood that the
hazard will cause harm and the severity of that harm. The two elements of
risk, i.e. likelihood and severity, are independent of each other. The vast majority of hazards are relatively straightforward and requiring only simple method of risk rating. The method incorporates a judgment as to whether or not a
risk is tolerable. Such a method is illustrated as follows:
a) For each hazard identified, ask the question What If?. Realistically, what
is the worst likely outcome (i.e. the potential severity of harm)?
b) Is it a fatality, major injury/permanent disability including permanent ill

health, a minor injury, or no injury and only plant damage? For the
purpose of determination of risk, the severity of harm can be divided into
3 categories:
Slightly harmful - e.g.: superficial injuries; minor cuts and bruises;

eye irritation from dust; nuisance and irritation (e.g. headaches);
ill-health leading to temporary discomfort.

All Right Reserved
154
Harmful - e.g.: lacerations; burns; concussions; serious sprains; minor fractures; deafness; dermatitis; asthma; work related upper limb disorders; illhealth leading to permanent minor disability.
Extremely harmful - e.g.: amputations; major fractures;
poison-
ing; multiple injuries; fatal injuries; occupational cancer; other severe life
shortening diseases; acute fatal diseases.
2.3
Control Measures
Safety procedures and risk control measures are procedures and measures to be
put in place to reduce risk to a tolerable level. When deciding on safety procedures
and risk control measures, the list below should be
considered, in the
order given. Safety procedures and risk control
measures lower down the
list should only be used if it can be shown that
using a procedure and/or
measures higher up the list is not reasonably
practicable.
List of safety procedures and risk control measures:
a)
Procedures and measures to eliminate hazards at source: for example, using a

non-hazardous substance instead of a hazardous one.
b) Procedures and measures to reduce hazards at source: for example,
re-
placing a noisy machine with a quieter one.

c)
Procedures and measures to remove workers from the hazard: for
ex-
ample, paint spraying by unattended robots.

d) Procedures and measures to reduce to worker exposure: for example,
reducing exposure to noise by reducing the hours of work.
e) Procedures
and
measures
protective equipment as
to
ensure
the
proper
use
of
personal
the last resort: for example using hearing
protectors for workers operating noisy machines.

All Right Reserved
155
Control measures to be established based on the Hierarchy of Control as the following:

Elimination - Removing the hazard or hazardous work practice from the

workplace. This is the most effective control measure.
Substitution - Substituting or replacing the hazard or hazardous work practices with less hazardous one.
Isolation - Isolating or separating the hazard or hazardous work
practice
from persons at the workplace or the general work area.

Engineering control - If the hazard cannot be eliminated,
sub-
stituted or isolated, engineering control is the next preferred
measure
to control the risk. It may include modifications to tools or equipment, using

enclosures, guarding, mechanical ventilation or automating processes.
Administrative control - Introducing policies, and changes in work practice

and procedures that reduce the risk. This could include limiting the time employees are exposed to the hazard, reducing the number of employees exposed, rotating jobs, lockout or tag-out procedures, or prohibiting eating and
drinking in contaminated area.
Personal protective equipment - The risk control application of providing

personal protective equipment should be considered only:
When other control measures are not in practicable
When used in conjunction with other methods to provide a greater measure

of protection
When specified by legislation as a basic requirement.

Where personal protective equipment has been provided, its use must be
monitored to ensure it is adequate and being worn.

All Right Reserved
156
3.0 PERMIT-TO-WORK SYSTEM

3.1 What is a Permit-to-Work?
An area where work has to be undertaken in a particularly hazardous situation

or environment, such as working on or near existing line and in confined
spaces e.g. tunnel and in high voltage room, or where workers can be
jeopardized by unwitting action of others, or by their own failure to realize an
actual or potential danger etc.
Principles of operating a permit-to-work are:
a) The information given on the permit must be precise, detailed and

accurate;
b) The work to be carried out and the personnel involved must be clearly
stated;
c) Make sure and clearly specify what has been made safe before work could
be done;
d) Outlining and communicating all safety precautions that have been taken
and
need
to
be
taken
(e.g.
lock-in
and
lock-out)
by
contractors
e) The permit should have expiration time, A reissue of permit could be made
if the work assigned is not completed;
f) The permit should be recognized as the master instruction, which until it is
cancelled overrides an other instructions;
g) Work must limited to the area approved by the permit;
h) Making sure that the authorized person has\assured himself that, he has
taken all the necessary steps to make the operation and theoperator safe;

All Right Reserved
157
i) Reminding the contractors to carry out only the approved job and maintain
the same condition provided for with the permit to work;
j) A copy of the permit should be clearly displayed;
k) Where applicable monitoring of the working environment must be
carried out (noise, radiation or pressure);
l) All personnel not involved in the operation must be excluded from the area; and
m) The procedure for canceling the permit-to-work should be clearly stated so
that a smooth hand-over of responsibilities could be done.
A permit-to-work should be at least:
a) Be a formal written permission to carry out the work.

b) Emphasis in the written permission that the work must be carried out
using appropriate safety procedures.
c) Be given by the authorized person.
d) State that safety precautions and requirements have been defined.
e) Have a Signed Off by both trade person and authorized persons.
f) Have a time of expiry.
3.2 Procedures for Permit-to-Work

a) A user has to fill up a work permit with the following:
Time (duration of work);

Location;
Equipment to be worked on;
Description of work; and
Tools to be used.

All Right Reserved
158
b) Users supervisor review and sign upon discussion.

c) Review by production lead shift operator.
d) Review and sign by production supervisor.
e) Review and upon satisfaction that the permit is in order and the safe
condition exists, platform supervisor (shift supervisor) signs the permit. He
keeps a copy of the permit.
f) User sends a copy of the permit to the production control room and post /
display a copy of the work site / location.
g) A work permit is valid for a work shift.
h) After completing the work, users do the housekeeping and return work
permit to the control room.
i) Work permit can be cancelled, if one anticipates or observe an unsafe situation.
3.3 Types of Permit Used in Construction Works

Welding / burning (naked flame) work permit.
Hot work (no naked flame) work permit.
Flammable release work permit.
Vessel entry work permit (confined spaces).
Cold work permit.
Electrical permit.
Lift permit.
Safe excavation permit.

All Right Reserved
159
4.0 LOCK-OUT TAG-OUT SYSTEM
4.1 Introduction
Several serious and fatal accidents occurred on construction sites were
resulted from mistakenly assuming machinery or equipment was safely off or
de-energized before working on it.
In order to prevent such occurrences, it is absolutely essential for your

employer to have an effective lock-out tag-out system in placed and to ensure
it is diligently practiced without exception.
4.2 What is Lock-Out Tag-Out System?

A lock-out tag system is a written practice which when followed, will allow
workers to carry out their job functions without undue risks. The systems
procedure can be quite simple, yet precise, such as locking out and tagging
out simple piece of machinery or complex, such as the locking out of entire
process. A lock-out tag-out may applied to electrical and mechanical equipment in nature.

All Right Reserved
160
5.0 JSA - JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS

5.1 Introduction
A job safety analysis is a simple method for identifying risks associated with a
job task. By identifying hazards, risk can be reduced and appropriate safety
procedures developed. This is an essential process in reducing occupationally
related injuries.
There are many types of analysis, and their duties are varied. But perhaps the
most important analyst in your life is you. Job related injuries occur every day
in the work place. Often these injuries occur because employees are not
trained in the proper job procedure.
One way to prevent workplace injuries is to establish proper job

procedures and train all employees in safer and more efficient work
methods. Establishing proper job procedures is one of the benefits of
conducting a Job Safety Analysis (JSA) carefully studying and recording
each step of a job, identifying existing or potential job hazards (both safety
and health). And determining the best way to reduce or eliminate these
hazards. A JSA is used to review job methods and uncover hazards that:
a) may have been overlooked in the layout of the plant or building and in the
design of the machinery, equipment, tools, workstations, and processes.
b) result of changes in work procedures or personnel.
c) may have developed after production has started.

All Right Reserved
161
5.2 Selecting the Job

A job hazard analysis can be performed for all jobs in the workplace, whether
the job is special (non-routine) or routine. Even one step jobs, such as
those in which only a button is pressed, can and perhaps should be analyzed
by evaluating surrounding work conditions.
Jobs with the worst accident history have priority and should be analyzed
first. In selecting jobs to be analyzed and the order of analysis, senior
supervisors, supervisors, foreman should be guided by the following factors:
a) Frequency of Accidents - A job that has repeatedly caused accidents is

a candidate for JSA. The greater the number of accidents associated with
the job, the greater its JSA priority.
b) Rate of Disabling Injuries - Every job that has disabling injuries should
be given a JSA.
c) Severity Potential - Some jobs may not have a history of accidents but
may have the potential for a severe injury.
d) New Jobs - A JSA of every new job should be made as soon as
possible. Analysis should not be delayed until accidents or near misses
occur.
e) Near Misses - Jobs where near misses or close calls have occurred also
should be given priority.
After the job has been selected, the three basic steps in making a J.S.A. are:

All Right Reserved
162
a) Break the job down into successive steps or activities.

b) Identify the hazards and potential accidents.
c) Develop safe job procedures to eliminate the hazards and prevent the
potential accidents.
5.3 Breaking Down the Job

To do a job breakdown, select the right worker to observe. Select an
experienced, capable and cooperative worker who is willing to share ideas.
Explain the purpose and the benefits of the J.S.A. to the worker.
Be sure to record enough information to describe each job action, videotaping

the job can also be used for review in the future. To determine the basic
steps ask, What step starts the job? Then, What is the next basic step?
and so on.
Completely describe each step. Any deviation from the regular procedure
should be recorded because it is this irregular activity that leads to an
accident.
Number the job steps consecutively in the first column of the J.S.A. Each step
should stress the job functions, not how it is done. The wording for each step
should begin with an action verb like insert, open, or weld. Naming the item
to which the action applies completes the action; for example insert board
weld joint. Be sure to include every step of the job from the beginning to
the end.

All Right Reserved
163
5.4 Identifying Hazards and Potential Accidents
The next step in developing the J.S.A. is the identification of all hazards
involved with each step. Identify all hazards both those produced by the
environment and those connected with the job procedures. Ask yourself the
following questions about each step.
a) Is the worker wearing clothing or jewellery that could get caught in the
machinery?
b) Can the worker get caught in or between machine parts?
c) Can the worker be injured by reaching over moving machinery parts and
materials?
d) Is the worker positioned to the machine in a way that is potentially
dangerous?
e) Is the worker at any time in an off-balance position?
f) Is the environment hazardous to safety and health? Are there
concentrations of toxic gas, vapor, mist, fume, dust, heat or radiation?
g) Is there a fall hazard where the worker can fall to a lower level?
h) Can pushing, pulling, lifting, bending or twisting cause strain?
Close observation and knowledge of the particular job are required if the
J.S.A. is to be effective. The job observation should be repeated until the
worker and the observers are comfortable that all hazards and potential
accidents are identified.

All Right Reserved
164
5.5 Evaluating Hazards

The next step is to look into what would cause these hazards. You need to
think about what events could lead to an injury or illness for each hazard you
identified. Typical questions are:
a) Has the worker been trained to use appropriate PPE?

b) Are work positions, machinery, pits or holes, and hazardous operations adequately guarded?
c) Are locked out procedures used for machinery deactivation during
maintenance procedures?
d) How are dusts and chemicals dispersed in the air?
e) What are the sources of noise and radiation and heat?
f) Why would a worker be tempted to reach into moving machine parts?
All these questions can be incorporated into an inspection form that can be
filled out at regular intervals. Even if the questions may not apply at first it
may become relevant if there is a change form the standard operating
procedures. Using a checklist is a good way to be sure nothing is overlooked.
Employers should develop a checklist for each operation.

All Right Reserved
165
5.6 Develop Solutions

The last step in a J.S.A. is to develop a recommended safe job procedure to
prevent occurrence of a potential accident or incident. There are several
solutions that should be considered.
Find a new way to do the job.

Change the physical conditions that create the hazards.
Change the work procedure.
Reduce the frequency of job or task.
If a new way to the job cannot be found then try to change the physical
conditions (tools, materials, equipment, layout, or location) of the job to
eliminate the hazards. When changing the work procedure is the beat
solution, find out what the employee can do during the job to eliminate
hazards or prevent potential accidents. The employee should be able to
suggest ways to improve the safety on their work site.
Often a repair or service job has to be frequently repeated because a

condition needs correction again and again. To reduce the need of such a
repetitive job find out what can be done to eliminate the cause of the
condition that makes excessive repairs necessary.
Reducing frequency of job contributes to safety only in that it limits the

exposure. Every effort should still be made to eliminate hazards and to
prevent potential accidents by changing physical conditions or revising job
procedures or both.

All Right Reserved
166
List recommended safe operating procedures on the form, and also list
required or recommends personal protective equipment for each step of the
job. Be specific, says exactly what needs to be done to correct the hazard. If
the hazard is a serious one, it should be corrected immediately. The J.S.A.
should than be changed to reflect the new condition.
5.7 Revising the JSA
A Job Safety Analysis can do much toward reducing accidents and injuries in
the workplace, but it is only effective if it is reviewed and updated
periodically. Even if no changes have been made in the job, hazards that were
missed in an earlier analysis could be detected.
If an accident or injury occurs on a specific job, the Job Safety Analysis should
be reviewed immediately to determine whether changes are needed in the job
procedure. In addition, if accident results from an employees failure to follow
job procedures, this should be discussed with all employees performing the
job.
Any time a Job Safety Analysis is revised, training in the new job methods or
protective measures should be provided to all employees affected by the
changes.
Job
Safety
Analysis
also
can
be
used
to
train
new
employees on the job steps and job hazards.
To show how a Job Safety Analysis form is prepared, a sample worksheet for
grinding castings is given below. Both safety and health hazards are noted, as
well as recommendations for safer methods and protection.

All Right Reserved
167
6.0 METHOD OF STATEMENT

There are a number of project activities of which the potential hazards can only be
minimized or eliminated by a well-defined method statement. Such activities may
involve many people, insecure structures, several items of plant, sophisticated false
work, hostile environment, hazardous substances, etc. For activities such as these,
the system of work will be clearly defined in a written method statement in which
safety will be the prime consideration. All workers involved are required to follow the
statement strictly so as to ensure that the execution of activities is safe and free
from risk to health. Safety disclosure will be carried out at the same time of the
construction technical disclosure.
The method statement will be submitted to the safety manager / officer /

supervisors for comments and approval from the safety manager or officer. Method
statements will be subject to revision according to the project progress report.
Before any work is to commence the contractor or the relevant supervisor will submit
the method statement to the safety department for their comments and
recommendation. The safety manager / officer / supervisors will suggest
amendments on the basis of corresponding risk assessment, and then endorse the
method statement. By means of regular inspections and internal audit, the section
manager will monitor the implementation of hazard control measures. The safety
manager, officer, supervisors and the site safety committee members who will
review the effectiveness of the measures in the meeting.

All Right Reserved
168

a) Section 15(2)(a) Provision and Maintenance of Plant & System of Work, Part IV
General Duties of Employers & Self-Employed Persons, Occupational Safety and
Health Act 1994.
b) Section 15(2)(b) Arrangements for Use or Operations, Handling, Storage and
Transport of Plant or Substances, Part IV General Duties of Employers & SelfEmployed Persons, Occupational Safety and Health Act 1994.
c) Section 15(2)(c) Provision Information, Instruction, Training & Supervision, Part
IV General Duties of Employers & Self-Employed Persons, Occupational Safety
and Health Act 1994.
d) Section 4 Strategies for Control, Code of Practice for Safety & Health At Work
(MS 426 : 1994)

All Right Reserved
169

All Right Reserved
170
1.0 INTRODUCTION
What is an accident? Accident can be defined as an unexpected, unplanned and
undesired event in a sequence of events, that occurs through a combination of causes; it results in physical harm, damage to property, a near-miss, a loss, or any combination of the mentioned effects. In simple language accident can be defined as
the direct result of unsafe acts and conditions. Both these elements are
manageable. Therefore accident does not just happened but it is created.
Accidents/incidents need to be reported and investigated as part of the accident

prevention program in any organisation. With proper reported and documented
accidents/incidents statistic, analysis on trends and causes of accidents can be carried out thus preventive measures can be established, implemented and monitored.
Unattended minor accidents/incidents will lead to more serious accidents/incidents or

even fatalities. This was proven by Tye-Pearson Triangle (a study in 1974 by the
British Safety Council).
TYE PEARSON TRAINGLE

All Right Reserved
171
2.0 BASIC ACCIDENT CAUSATION - THE DOMINO THEORY

In 1930s based upon his studies, Heinrich put forward a notion that the occurrence
of an injury accident invariably results from a sequence of factors culminating in the
accident itself. This notion was known as the Domino Theory. Under this theory he
postulate five (5) factors or stages in the accident sequence, with the injury
invariably caused by the accident, and the accident in turn the result of the factor
that immediately precedes it. The five (5) factors are:
Bird & Loftus have extended this theory to reflect the influence of management in
the cause and effect of all accidents that result wastage of companys assets. The
modified sequence of events becomes:

All Right Reserved
172
3.0 OBJECTIVES OF ACCIDENTS / INCIDENTS INVESTIGATION AND

REPORTING
Main objectives of accidents/incidents reporting and investigation are to:
ascertain the cause in order to prevent others being injured or placed at risk, not
to find scapegoat;
gather information for use in any criminal or civil proceedings;
confirm or refute a claim for industrial injury benefit; and
prepare notifications to be made to Department of Occupational Safety & Health
or other enforcing agency.

All Right Reserved
173
4.0 ACCIDENTS/INCIDENTS REPORTING

4.1 Get Prompt Reporting
Many accidents with loss potential never reported hidden to avoid
investigation.
Studies need to be conducted in order to understand why workers did not
report accidents.
Prompt reporting will initiate effective investigation thus actual causes can
be identified.
4.2 Common Reasons for Failure to Report

Fear of consequences.
Concern about safety records.
Lack of understanding of the importance of complete reporting.
4.3 How to Get Accident Reported?

Reporting Procedure.
Communicate.
Educate.
Train employees on the need for reporting and why it is so critical.
React in a positive way to timely reporting.

All Right Reserved
174
4.4 What Types of Accident to be Reported?

In-House Reporting all accidents/incidents even minor injuries or near
misses should be reported in order to enable analytical studies on actual
trends and causes of accidents/incidents at the workplace.
Statutory Reporting employer/occupier of workplace shall notify the

authorities, particularly Department of Occupational Safety & Health of all
accidental/ incidents, occupational diseases and occupational poisoning as
specified under the following Schedule of Factories & Machinery Act 1967.
First Schedule Dangerous Occurrence

Second Schedule Serious Bodily Injury
Third Schedule Notifiable Industrial Diseases
Notification shall be done by the possible quickest means available to the
nearest Department of Occupational Safety & Health Officer followed by
the least possible delay report in writing in prescribed forms.

All Right Reserved
175
5.0 ACCIDENTS/INCIDENTS INVESTIGATION

5.1 What Needs to be Investigated?
Common sense any incident occurred at the workplace should be
investigated.
Include near misses, injuries, illnesses, property damages, chemical
spills, fire, theft, vandalism, etc.
5.2 Who Should Investigate?

Safety & Health Committee.
Safety & Health Officer/Supervisor.
Work Supervisor.
5.3 How to Investigate?

a) The Procedure
There should be a defined procedure for accident investigation, include

utilization of standard forms or checklists.
Provisions of equipment and other aids to facilitate investigation such
as measuring tape, camera, notebook, etc.
b) The Investigation
The investigators should consider the following when conducting an

investigation:

All Right Reserved
176

get the big pictures first.

Interview witness separately.
Interview on site whenever feasible
Put person at ease.
Get he individual version.
Ask question at the right time.
Give witness feedback of your understanding.
Record (in writing) critical information quickly.
Use visual aids.
Use re-enactment sparingly and carefully.
End on positive note.
Keep line of communication open.
5.4 Investigation Report

Investigation report should answer the following:

What caused the accident?

Who was involved?
When did it occur?
Where did it occur?
Why did it occur?
How could it have been prevented?
How can a recurrence be prevented?
Whether the report is made on a standard form, or specially written, it should

contain the following:

A summary of what happened.

An introductory summary of events prior to the accident.
Information gained during investigation.
Details of witness.
Information about injury or loss sustained.
Conclusions.
Recommendations
Supporting materials (photographs, diagrams to clarify).
The date, and be signed by the person or persons carrying out
investigation.
The report should be submitted to management for further action.

All Right Reserved
177
6.0 WORKERS COMPENSATION

6.1 Introduction
The Social Security Organization (SOCSO) was set up to implement,
administer and enforce the Employees Social Security Act 1969 and the
Employees Social Security (General Regulations) 1971.
6.2 SOCSO Protection Scheme

SOCSO contributors are entitle to make claims through SOCSO Protection
Scheme for industrial mishaps. The protection scheme is categorized as the
following:
Employment Injury Scheme

Invalidity Pension Scheme
a) Employment Injury Scheme
This scheme provides an employee with protection for industrial accidents

that occur at work and while traveling on a route between his residence
and his workplace and the place where he takes his meals during an
authorized break or during journey which is directly connected to his job
(so long as the accident does not occur during a stoppage or a deviation
from the route). The scheme also provides coverage for occupational
diseases.
The benefits provided under this scheme are:

All Right Reserved
178
Medical Benefit;
Temporary disablement Benefit;
Permanent Disablement;
Constant Attendance Allowance;
Dependents Benefit;
Funeral Benefit; and
Rehabilitation Benefit.
b) Invalidity Pension Scheme
Invalidity is a serious disablement or disease of a permanent nature that is

either incurable or unlikely to be cured as a result of which an employee is
unable to earn at least 1/3 of what a normally able person can earn.
This scheme provides the employees with a 24 hours coverage for

invalidity or death resulting from whatever cause. The benefits of this
scheme are:
Invalidity Pension;
Invalidity Grant;
Constant Attendance Allowance;
Survivors Pension;
Funeral Benefit; and
Rehabilitation Benefit.

All Right Reserved
179
6.3 How to Claim?

a) Employment Injury Scheme
Medical Benefit
When an employee meet with an accident or suffers from any occupational diseases, he/she is entitled to treatment at the SOCSO Panel
Clinic or at any Government Hospital or Clinic.
The employee or his/her representative is required to bring along an

Accident Report Form (Form 21) or an Identification Latter or report of
Occupational Diseases Form whichever is relevant from his/her
employer when he first comes for treatment to enable him/her to get
free treatment. SOCSO will settle his/her medical bill.
However, if the treatment is received in a SOCSO Panel Clinic, the

employees must continue the treatment at the same clinic until he/she
recovers unless he/she is referred to a Government Hospital.
In case of a serious injury, the treatment should be at the nearest

Government Hospital. The employee is eligible for second class
treatment at the Hospital if he/she is requires in-patient treatment.
Specialist treatment, if required will also be provided at a Government

Hospital.

All Right Reserved
180
Temporary Disablement
This is a cash benefit paid to an employee who has been certified by a

doctor to be unfit for work for not less than 4 days including the day of
the accident. This is paid for as long as the employee is on medical
leave.
The claimant or his/her representative has to submit:
Form 10 (Claim Form).

Doctors Certification (Form 13) or the original copy of the Medical
Certificate.
In the case of commuting accidents which involve the payment of

temporary disablement benefit of permanent disablement benefit,
the following action should be taken:
The insured or his/her representative should inform the formers

employer verbally or in writing about the accident as soon as
possible;
The insured or his/her representative should make a police

report of the accident;
The insured or his/her representative should obtain a copy of

the police report and submit to his/her employer; and
The employer should submit the police report together with the
Accident report in Form 21 to the Local SOCSO Office.

All Right Reserved
181
Permanent Disablement
This is a cash benefit paid to an employee who has been certified by a

Medical Board or the Appellate Medical Board to be suffering from
Permanent Disablement as a result of an employment injury.
The claimant or his/her representative has to submit:

A written application to the SOCSO Local Office for reference of the
Medical Board.
Medical report 9if any).
Form 10 (Claim Form).
Dependents Benefit
Claimant should submit Form 24 (Claim Form) and certified copies of
the following documents:
Birth certificate.
Post-mortem report (if any).
Birth certificate of all his/her children.
Marriage certificate.
Widows identity card (if relevant).
If there is no widow, widower or an eligible child, the claimant should

submit Form 24 (Claim Form) and certified copies of the following documents:
Birth certificate of deceased.
Birth certificates of all the younger brothers and sisters (if relevant).
Identity card of parents or guardian of grandparents (if relevant).
Death certificate.

All Right Reserved
182
Funeral Benefits
The claimant should fill-up Form 26 (Claim Form) and return it to the
SOCSO Local Office, together with a certified copy of the Death
Certificate.
b) Invalidity Pension Scheme
Invalidity Pension
Claimant should the following documents:
PKS Form (P) 41Notice of Invalidity.
Medical Report.
Identity Card/ Birth Certificate (certified copy.
Survivors Pension
Claimant should submit Form 24(Claim Form) and certified copies of
the following documents:
Death Certificate.
Birth Certificate of all children.
Marriage Certificate.
Widows Identity Card (if relevant).
If there is no widow, widower or an eligible child, the claimant should
submit Form 24 (Claim Form) and certified copies of the following documents:
Birth certificate of deceased.
Birth certificates of all the younger brothers and sisters (if relevant).
Identity card of parents or guardian of grandparents (if relevant).
Death certificate.
All Right Reserved
183

a) Part IV Notification of Accident, Dangerous Occurrence & Dangerous Diseases.
b) Part VIII Notification of Accidents, Dangerous Occurrence, Occupational
Poisoning & Occupational Diseases and Inquiry.
c) Regulation 13 Investigation Into Any Accident, Etc., Occupational Safety &
Health (Safety & Health Committee) Regulations 1996.
d) Regulation 18(c) Investigation Into Any Accident, Etc., Occupational Safety &
Health (Safety & Health Officer) Regulations 1997.
e) Sub-Section 5.8 Accident Investigation, Section 5 Organization &
Arrangements, Code of Practice for Safety & Health At Work (MS 426 : 1994)
f) Sub-Section 3.12 - Investigation of Work Related Injuries, Ill-Health, Diseases,
Incidents and Their Impacts on Safety & Health Performance, ILO - OSH:2001.

All Right Reserved
184

All Right Reserved
185
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Safety & Health inspections and audits often have negative implications, associated
with faultfinding. A positive approach based on fact finding will produce better
results, and cooperation from all those taking part in the process.
2.0 WORKPLACE INSPECTIONS

2.1 Objectives
The objectives of inspections are:
to identify hazardous conditions and start the corrective process; and

to improve operations and conditions.
2.2 Types of Inspection

There are a number of types of inspections:
statutory compliance with relevant legislative requirements;

external by enforcement officials, insurers, consultants.
executive senior management tours.
scheduled planned at appropriate intervals, by supervisors.
introductory check on new or reconditioned equipment.
continuous by employees, supervisors, which can be formal and
pre-planned, or informal.

All Right Reserved
186
2.3 Pre-requisite of Inspections

For any inspection, knowledge of plant or facility is required, also knowledge
of applicable statutory requirements, standards and codes of practice.
Some system must be followed to ensure that all relevant matters have been
considered and, an adequate reporting system must be in placed so that
remedial actions necessary can be taken and that the results of the inspection
are available to management.
2.4 Principles of Inspection

Before any inspection, certain basic decision must have been taken about
aspects of it, and the quality of the decisions will be a major influence on the
quality of the inspection and on whether it achieves its objectives. The
decisions are reached by answering the following questions:
a) What needs to be inspected?
Some form of checklist, specially developed

for the inspection, will be helpful. This
reminds those carrying out inspection of
important items to check and serves as a
record. By including space for action by,
date, comments and signatures, the
checklist can serve as a permanent record.

All Right Reserved
187
b) What aspect of the item listed needs checking ?

Parts likely to be hazards when unsafe because of stress, wear, impact,
vibration, heat, corrosion, chemical reaction or misuse are all candidates
for inspection, regardless of the nature of the plant, equipment or
workplace.
c) What conditions need to be inspected?
These should be specified, preferably on the checklist. If there is no
standard set for adequacy, then descriptive works give clues to what to
look for items which are exposed, broken, jagged, frayed, leaking, rusted, corroded, missing, loose, slipping, vibrating, etc.
d) How often the inspection be carried out?
In absence of statutory requirements, or guidance from standards and
codes pf practice, this will depend upon the potential severity of the failure
if the item falls in some way, and the potential for injury. It also depends
upon how quickly the item can become unsafe. A history of failures and
their results may give assistance.
e) Who carries out the inspection?
Every worker has a responsibility to carry out informal inspections of his /

her part of the workplace. Supervisors should plan general inspections,
and take part in periodic inspections of aspects of the workplace considered significant under the above guideline. Workers representatives may
also have rights of inspection, and their presence should be encouraged
where possible. Management inspections should be made periodically, the
formal compliance inspections should take place in their presence.
All Right Reserved
188
2.5 Techniques of Inspection

The following observations have been assistance in improving inspection skill:
a) Have necessary experience and knowledge
Those carrying out inspection must be properly equipped to do so, having
necessary knowledge and experience and knowledge of acceptable
performance standards and statutory requirements. They must also
comply fully with local site rules, including the wearing and use of personal
protective equipment, as appropriate, so as to set an example.
b) Use Checklist
Develop and use checklist as discussed earlier. They serve to focus
attention and record results, but must be relevant to inspection.
c) Write thing down
The memory should not be relied upon, interruptions will occur, and
memory will fade, so notes must be taken and entered onto the checklist,
even if a formal report is to be prepared later.
d) Read previous report first
It is desirable to read the previous findings before starting new inspection.
This will enable checks to be made to ensure that previous comments
have been actioned as required.
e) Ask questions
Questions should be asked, and the inspection should not rely upon visual
information only. The what if question is the hardest to answer. Workers
are always undervalued as a source of information about actual operating
procedures and of opinions about possible corrections. Also, system and
procedures are difficult to inspect visually, and their inspection depends
upon the asking of the right questions of those involved.

All Right Reserved
189
f) Follow up on problem
Items found missing or defective should be followed up and questioned
about, not merely recorded on the form. Otherwise there is a danger of
inspecting a series of symptoms of a problem without ever querying the
nature of the underlying disease.
g) Correct dangerous condition at once

All dangerous situations encountered should be corrected immediately
without waiting for the written report, if their existence constitutes a
serious risk of personal injury or significant damage to plant and
equipment.
h) Measure and record where possible

Where appropriate, measurements should be taken of conditions. This will
serve as baseline for subsequent inspections. What cannot be measured
cannot be managed.
i) Correct unsafe behavior seen

Any unsafe behavior seen during the inspection should be noted and corrected, such as removal of machine guards, failure to use personal
protective equipment as required, or smoking in authorized areas.
j) Check risk assessment

Risk assessment should be checked as part of the inspection process.

All Right Reserved
190
3.0 SAFETY AUDIT

3.1 What is a Safety Audit?
Under Section 2 Interpretation, Part I Preliminary, Occupational Safety &
Health (Safety & Health Committee) Regulations 1996, safety audit
defined as
the safety and health audits of plant and systems of work to

ensure the safety and health of persons employed as place of work.
3.2 Types of Audit

Basically there are three (3) types of audit and they differ mainly in their
depth and scope. Although there are significant differences, similar principles
are applied so each needs to be addressed separately.
a) Internal / First Party Audit
An audit carried out by the organization on its own Occupational Safety
and Health Management System. This type is variously called a process
audit or a compliance audit.
b) External / Second Party Audit
An audit carried out by or on behalf of an organization to determine its capabilities to meet the Systems requirements. This type sometimes called a
system audit.
c) Independent / Third Party Audit
An audit carried out on an organization and its activities by an
independent party. It can be a certification or regulatory body. Often
called Third Party Assessment or Certification Assessment.
For this module only First Party Safety Audit will be discussed.

All Right Reserved
191
3.3 First Party Safety Audit

a) Purpose
A safety audit is a tool, which can help management to take stock of the
companys safety and health performance. In general safety audit is
usually conducted to for the following purposes:
to identify hazards that exist in the workplace;
to assess the risks associated with the identified hazards;
to take corrective measures to eliminate or minimize the risks; and
to evaluate the companys safety performance against statutory
requirements, set standards and clients requirements
b) Phases of Audit
Planning & Preparation
When the need for an audit is apparent, the vital first phase involves
defining the objectives and scope, arranging the necessary resources
to undertake it and ensuring that Auditor and Auditee are prepared.
Performing the Audit
The second phase involves visiting locations where relevant activities
are being carried out, collecting objective evidence and, in particular,
identifying failure to meet agreed requirements. At the end of this
phase, the Auditors recorded findings are reviewed, properly
documented and presented to the Auditees Management.
Reporting the Audit
The third phase, following completion of the audit visit, is the formal
reporting of the audit findings, together with any requests for
corrective action.
Follow-Up & Close Out
When an audit has resulted in corrective action requests being issued,
it will be necessary to verify at a later date, the effectiveness of the
corrective action.

All Right Reserved
192

a) Section 15(2)a) Duty to Provide & Maintain Plant & Safe System of Work, Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994.
b) Reg. 12 Inspection of Place of Work, Occupational Safety & Health (Safety &
Health Committee), Regulations 1996.
c) Regulation 18(b) Inspect the Place of Work, Occupational Safety & Health
(Safety & Health Officer), Regulations 1997.
d) Reg. 25(4)(a) Inspect & Rectify Unsafe Place of Work, Factories & Machinery
(Building Operations & Works of Engineering Construction) (Safety), Regulations
1986.
e) Sub-Section 5.7 Work Methods, Code of Practice for Safety & Health At Work
(MS 426 : 1994).
f) Sub-Section 3.11 - Performance Monitoring and Measurement, ILO-OSH:2001.
g) Sub-Section 3.13 - Audit, ILO-OSH:2001.
h) Sub-Section 3.15 - Preventive and Corrective Action, ILO-OSH:2001.

All Right Reserved
193

All Right Reserved
194
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Sudden serious event or situation requiring immediate actions
Oxford Fajar Dictionary.
Potential emergencies on a construction site may include fire, collapse of structure,
flood, riots, explosion, etc.
2.0 WHOSE RESPONSIBILITY?

It shall be the duty of the site management to minimize the effects of an on site
emergencies. Therefore it is vital for the site management to provide the necessary
resources to prepare, implement and maintain an effective Emergency Response
Plan.
3.0 WHAT IS AN EMERGENCY RESPONSE PLAN?

An emergency plan means a written plan which, on the basis of identified potential
accidents on sites together with their consequences, describes how such accidents
and their consequences should be handled, both on site an of site.
4.0 HOW TO DEVELOP AN EMERGENCY RESPONSE PLAN?

The development of an effective emergency response plan should usually involves
three phases:
a) Initial Evaluation includes the definition of potential emergencies on site, risk

assessment and the development of emergency action plan.
b) Actual Development this phase is performed based on the outcome of the
initial evaluation process, should include the type of emergency, establishment of
emergency response team, notification and reporting procedures, evacuation
plans, etc.

All Right Reserved
195
c) Testing, Checking and Reviewing this is necessary to ensure competency

and effectiveness of the plan, and should include emergency drill. Management
should ensure that all personnel are aware of their required responses in the
event of emergency. The effectiveness of the plan and the training must be tested and checked by holding regular emergency drills. After each drills, the emergency response plan should be reviewed in consultation with workers and emergency services to consider any omissions or problems highlighted.
The plan must be reviewed when any changes have been made.
5.0 WHAT ARE THE CONTENTS OF AN EMERGENCY RESPONSE

PLAN?
The following should be incorporated in the written emergency response plan:
a) Introduction stating the site management policys on emergency response
planning and define the objective and purpose of the plan.
b) A consideration of the size and nature of possible emergency events .
c) Liaison with emergency services, other regulatory authorities and neighbors.
d) Detailed emergency action plan, including alarm, methods of communication and
personnel counting.
e) Establishment and appointment of emergency response team and definition of
their duties.
f) Designing and equipping of an emergency control centre.
g) On-scene coordination of rescue operations, evacuation arrangements and first
aid provisions.
h) Emergency shut down procedures.
i) A site plan showing the location of emergency assembly points.
j) Declaration and communication of the emergency status.

All Right Reserved
196

a) Section 15, Part IV General Duties of Employers and Self Employer Persons,
Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994.
b) Sub-Section 5.9 Emergency Planning, Section 5 Organizational Arrangements,
Code of Practice for Safety & Health at Work (MS 426 : 1994).
c) Sub-Section 3.10.13 - Emergency Prevention, Preparedness and Response, ILO OSH:2001.

All Right Reserved
197

All Right Reserved
198
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The
organization
should
document
and
maintain
up-to-date
sufficient
documentation, as it can become hard evidences to indicate that safety and health is
being managed effectively within the organization. The results of workplace
monitoring should be collected in standardize way. Employer to keep the records for
a period determined by the relevant authorities. . This need not be a complicated
task and in some cases, a simple diary of events, procedure, instructions or the like,
may be all that is needed.
All documents and data containing critical information for the occupational safety
and health management system and its performance should be identified and
controlled.
2.0 WHY?
The main purpose for documenting occupational safety and health matters is to
facilitate monitoring, reviewing and revising of the elements of the management
system.
3.0 WHAT ARE THE DOCUMENT?

Basically, an occupational safety and
health management system document
and records should comprise of:
Occupational & Safety & Health
Manual;
Management Procedures;
Standard Instruction;

All Right Reserved
199
Permit-To-Work;
Work Instruction; and
Forms, Checklists and All Monitoring Records.
3.1 OSH Manual

The top level document, normally called the Occupational Safety & Health
Manual, states the companys and gives outline description of the
Occupational Safety & Health Management System. Typically it comprises the
following:
OSH Policy;
Planning for Hazard Identification, Risk Assessment & Risk Control;
Legal & Other Requirements;
OSH Management Programs;
Structure & Responsibility Organization Chart;
Training, Awareness & Competence Awareness & Specific Training;
Consultation & Communication;
Documentation;
Documentation & Data Control;
Operational Control Based on List of Register of Significant Hazards &
Risks;
Emergency Preparedness & Response;
Performance Measurement & Monitoring;
Accident, Incidents, Non-Conformance and Corrective & Preventive
Action;
Records & Records Management;
Audit; and
Management Review.

All Right Reserved
200
If the company is having several sites, it is often sensible to a have a manual

for each site and overall Occupational Safety and Health Manual covering corporate issues with references the site manuals.
3.2 Management Procedures

A management procedure is a document, which prescribes the control of a
process, which involves actions, two or more individuals, groups or
departments. It should state the who (responsibility), what (action required),
how (method or technique), when (time or frequency) and where (location or
environment). Typically this level of document consist of:
Planning for Hazard Identification, Risk Assessment & Risk Control;

Legal & Other Requirements;
Training, Awareness & Competence;
Consultation & Communication;
Documentation & Data Control;
Emergency Preparedness & Response;
Performance Measurement & Monitoring;
Accident, Incidents, Non-Conformance and Corrective & Preventive Action;
Records & Records Management; and
Audit.
3.3 Standard Instructions

A standard instruction is a document developed to cover situations where
their absence could lead to deviations from occupational safety and health
policy and objectives. Typically this document may comprise of instruction for
the following:

All Right Reserved
201
Earthwork and Excavation

Scaffolds
Erection of Structures
Lifting Operation
Concrete Work & Temporary Supports
Etc.
3.4 Permit-to-Work
An operational control system developed to ensure works are done in
accordance with specific safe operating procedures and may comprise of:
Confined Spaces;
Working at Height;
Excavation;
Hot /Cold Work; etc.
3.5 Work Instructions

A work instruction may appear in many different forms. Its purpose is to
instruct on how to carry out particular task. It can be in the narrative form,
flowchart or schematic diagram.
3.6 Forms & Checklists

Forms and checklists contain information on the functioning of the
management system they are classified as records. Records invariably
account for bulk of paper in a company. They include such documents as;
policy statement, minutes of meetings, inspections and audit records,
maintenance records, training records, etc.
All Right Reserved
202
3.7 Other Document

a) Safety Plan
The Occupational Safety & Health Manual together with procedures and
other
lower
level
documents
describe
the
management
systems
established to meet agreed client requirements. However, frequently the

clients may need something significantly different to suit with their specific
requirements. Additional planning is needed and he product of this
planning is usually termed as Safety Plan. Its form and content will vary
according to the scope and complexity of the task involved in meeting
contractual requirements. For major projects, the Safety Plan may
comprise a top level document similar to the Occupational Safety & Health
Manual itself and a list of project or contract-related procedures.
b) Codes of Practice and Guidelines
Codes of Practice establish standards and guidelines, which unlike

procedures are advisory rather than mandatory. Some like the Code of
Practice for Safety and Health at Work (MS 426:1994) and Guidelines on
Trenching for Construction Safety Department of Occupational Safety &
Health : 2000.
4.0 DATA CONTROL

All documents and data containing information critical to the operation of the
management system and the performance of the occupational safety and health
activities should be identified and controlled. Basically:

All Right Reserved
203
the document and data can easily be located systematic indexing and filing;
the document and data are periodically reviewed and revised;
only the current version of document and data are available;
all obsolete document & data are promptly removed;
archival documents & data retained for legal or knowledge preservation
purposes; and
they are stored in safe location.

a) Regulation 27(2) Employer to Keep Minutes of Meeting for Seven Years, Part IV
Meetings of Safety & Health Committee, Occupational Safety & Health (Safety
& Health Committee) Regulations 1996.
b) Regulation 20(3) Employer to Keep Safety & Health Officers Reports for Ten
Years, Part V Duties of Safety & Health Officer, Occupational Safety & Health
(Safety & Health Committee) Regulations 1997.
c) Sub-Section
3.5
Occupational
Safety
&
Health
Management
System
Documentation, ILO-OSH:2001.

All Right Reserved
204

All Right Reserved
205

All Right Reserved
206
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Loss of plant, tools and materials is a very serious problem in the construction
industry. It can have profound, and often hidden effect on the profitability of the
contractors involved. Not only including the cost of the items lost but also progress
delays caused by the immediate non-availability of those items.
2.0 SECURITY ARRANGEMENTS

2.1 Responsibilities & Planned Surveillance
Site security is a complex subject and should be regarded as site
management disciplines and skill. It is vital to employ one or more well
trained and numerate security officers. The security officers role, are to:
carry out regular independent security assessments and surveys and

provide reports and advice;
perform investigations when crime is suspected or known to have

occurred;
quantify property loss and produce statistics thereon;

produce and co-ordinate site security standards and procedures;
liaise with the local police in relevant circumstances;
be involved in the security planning of the project; and
obtain, produce ad circulate security publicity within the project.

All Right Reserved
207
2.2 Site Security Standards

Before any project starts the following need careful consideration (and costing
where relevant):
Level of Crime Risk location of site is in a high, medium or low crime

risk area? Consultation with local police will always establish this.
Standard of Site Accommodation should be related to level of

expected crime.
Perimeter Fencing and Gates types of perimeter fencing or hoarding.

Stores and Storage Compounds location should not be too closed to
perimeter fencing or isolated areas.
Intruder Alarm System is such alarm necessary?

Artificial Lighting compound lighting during nighttime.
Site Security Pass identification purposes especially on large site with
high number of workers.
Private Vehicle Parking designated parking area to discourage easy

removal of property from site.
Site Security Surveillance on large high risk site surveillance by a

professional security company may be required.
Site Notices vital for control of visitors, delivery drivers, etc.

Store Keeping and Material Control to control movement of
materials.

All Right Reserved
208
2.3 Site Organization & Control

a) Site Entrances entrances should be restricted to the minimum and
arrangements for blocking off the site roads after working hours to
discourage ready vehicle access and in turn easy removal of property from
site.
b) Site Notices properly sited and written notices impart a sense of

professionalism
and
control.
Discourage
visitors
from
going
to
unauthorized parts of the site.
Visitors a notice indicating where and to whom visitors are to

report.
Car Parking a notice giving car-parking instructions, preferably

indicating parking of private vehicles is only allowed in a designated
area.
Good Delivery / Collection Vehicles a notice indicating where

good delivery / collection vehicles to report, and that all drivers are
to obtain the signature of authorized supervisors/personnel before
leaving the site.
Children / Trespassers notice warning that the site is

potentially dangerous and that children / trespassers are not allowed thereon.
c) Location of Site Office And Stores - wherever possible site

accommodation, including stores units, should be located at least 2 M
away from perimeter fencing. Additionally, accumulation of materials,
plant, etc (up which thieves/vandals/ children might climb) must be avoided in the immediate vicinity of the fence.

All Right Reserved
209
d) Control of Personnel both from the security and safety point of view,
control of site personnel and visitors should be tactful. Particularly on large
sites, within fixed premises. To be meaningful the site security pass should
be issued after all personnel has underwent the site induction course.
e) Control of Private Vehicles private vehicles should be parked at

designated areas only.
f) Control of Plant, Tools and Materials :
Notice for Delivery Drivers notices should be posted at the site

entrance including to delivery drivers where and to whom to report.
Delivery Notes and Purchase Orders check delivery notes

against original copy of purchase order, goods delivered should tally in
nature and quantity with the purchase order.
Goods Checks the receiver should accompany the delivery vehicle

to the off loading point and ensure full delivery by volume. Deliberate
short delivery by delivery drivers is a well-known example of fraud in
the construction industry and can only be countered by through such
checks.
Disposal of Scrap and Surplus Materials - Dishonest disposal of

scarp and surplus materials by local site staff is one of the commonest
forms of theft in construction industry. If the above thefts are to be
controlled, a clear policy and procedures on scarp/surplus materials
disposal must be enforced. It should be established that scarps or
surplus materials might not be disposed of locally without written
authorization.

All Right Reserved
210

a) Section 15(2)(d) Maintenance of Working Condition Including Provisions of Safe
Means of Access & Egress, Part IV General Duties of Employers and
Self-Employed Persons, Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994.
b) Section 15 (2)(e) Provision and Maintenance of Working Environment Including
Welfare Facilities, Part IV General Duties of Employers and Self-Employed
Persons, Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994.
c) Section 8 Workplaces and The Working Environment, Code of Practice for Safety and Health At Work (MS 426 : 1994)

All Right Reserved
211

All Right Reserved
212
1.0 INTRODUCTION
When we discussed and emphasized on the importance of safety and health on
construction sites, we tend to neglect the site office safety.
Whereas this aspect is
equally important compared to other aspects of safety and health in construction.

It is important to create and maintain a comfortable working environment in the
offices so that workers will feel less exhausted and stressed after spend some time
on the field.
2.0 GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS

2.1 Office Environment & Health
Temperature a comfortable temperature must be maintained at the
range of 200 300 Celsius.
Humidity the optimum comfort range for relative humidity is 40% 60%. Low humidity can cause dryness of the eyes, nose and throat and
may also increase the frequency of static electricity shocks.
Whereas high humidity, above 80% can be associated with fatigue.
Ventilation in all work rooms there must be effective and suitable

means of ventilation by the circulation of adequate supplies of either
fresh air or. Adequate ventilation for each person must be at a minimum rate of 10 liters fresh air per second per person for general office
space is recommended. Office should be ventilated either naturally of
artificially. Where mechanical ventilation or air-conditioning is provided
makes sure the system is regularly checked, kept clean and well maintained to prevent a growth of legionella bacteria or other organisms.

All Right Reserved
213
Contaminated Air contaminants in the office can include bacteria,

viruses, mould spores and dust, solvent vapors, or chemicals generated or
used in the building. Air conditioning unit that do not provide adequate
amounts of fresh air can cause high levels of carbon dioxide. Stale air due
to poor ventilation and excessive heat build-up or humidity can also
contribute to air contamination. These can be overcome by ensuring
effective air filtration and adequate amount of fresh air enter the building.
Air-conditioning units must be properly and regularly maintained.
Smoking environmental tobacco smoke is an indoor contaminant and

there is growing recognition that non-smokers may suffer adverse health
effects through inhaling tobacco smoke. Therefore smoking should be
prohibited in the office open area. Smoking should be confined to a
particular room or area only.
Ozone & Photocopiers ozone does not build-up in the air, it breaks
down into oxygen quickly after released into the air. Photocopiers and
laser printers are two most common ozone producers in the office.
Concentration of ozone above 0.1ppm can cause eye and upper
respiratory tract irritation, headache and temporary loss of ability to smell.
Besides that photocopiers can create discomfort from the heat, light and
noise generated during photocopying process. It is recommended that
photocopiers and laser printers not to be placed on or close proximity to
the personal workstations.
Sick Building Syndrome it is believed that the syndrome is caused by

a
combination
of
poorly
adjusted
ventilation,
air-conditioning,
temperature, humidity, lighting and psychological factors such as stress,

management style and tedious work schedules.

All Right Reserved
214
The symptoms that characterize sick building syndrome are sore eye,
running nose, headaches, mucous membrane irritation, dry skin, dizziness
and nausea.
Lighting there must be provision of suitable and sufficient lighting,

either natural or artificial, in every part of the premises in which persons
work or pass. Windows and skylights used for lighting must be kept clean
and free from obstruction. Artificial lighting apparatus must be properly
maintained. Suitable level of illumination based on Malaysian Standard for
interior lighting (Refer to COP for Interior Lighting) are:
general background
200 lux
routine office work
400 lux
work with poor contrast
600 lux
Color color determines the level of reflectance. Walls should have a

reflectance between 50% - 70% have a gloss or semi-gloss finish. Floors
should be reflect less than 20% of light and therefore should be dark in
color. The reflectance level of certain colors are as the following:
white
75% or more of light.
light colors
50% - 75% (subdued cool colors).
medium colors
20% - 50% (bright warm colors).
dark colors
20% or less.
Use of colorful posters and pictures can relieves the monotony

surrounding and provides relief from eye strains.

All Right Reserved
215
Office Floor Space a room which people work must not be

overcrowded as to cause risk of injury and health. Workstations should be
comfortable with safe and suitable chairs and sufficient space. As a
general guideline, a workstation should be at least 6.25M2 per individual,
including furniture and fitting, but excluding passageways and amenities.
Welfare Facilities welfare facilities such as eating, sanitary, washbasins, etc. should be available. These facilities should be kept clean and
well maintained.
Cleanliness all premises, furniture, fittings and furnishing must be kept

in a clean state. No dirt or refuse must be allowed to accumulate, and
floors and passageways and steps must be cleaned at least once a week.
2.2 Safety in the Office

Office Accidents most office accidents result from slip, trips and falls,
lifting objects, punctures or cuts and being caught in or in between things.
These can be avoided by simple planning and good housekeeping.
Manual Handling a common office hazard is the manual movement of

loads leading t back injuries and pain in hand, wrist and neck. Manual
handling problem can be eliminated or reduced with the aid of mechanical
equipment and through training on the proper techniques of manual
handling.
Work Equipment work equipment in the office such as photocopiers,

fax-machines, paper shredders, etc. should be operated and used in
accordance with suppliers instructions and should be kept in good working
condition at all time. Any dangerous moving parts should be protected.

All Right Reserved
216
Chemical small quantities of chemical are used in the office, these

include printing inks, photocopier toner, cleaning chemicals and correction
fluids. Ensure office workers aware of their hazards as specified in the
chemical safety data sheet or manufacturers instructions as printed on the
labels.
Emergencies the type of emergencies that could occur in the site office
include fires, collapse of structures, etc. To ensure an orderly evacuation
from the office an emergency plan should be prepared and tested on regular basis.
Stress stress arises when the demands on the worker exceed the capacity to cope. Stressful situations should be identified in the office and
safeguards must be implemented at organizational level to minimize the
risk.

a) Section 15(2)(d) Maintenance of Working Condition Including Provisions of Safe
Means of Access & Egress, Part IV General Duties of Employers and
Self-Employed Persons, Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994.
b) Section 15 (2)(e) Provision and Maintenance of Working Environment Including
Welfare Facilities, Part IV General Duties of Employers and Self-Employed
Persons, Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994.
c) Section 8 Workplaces and The Working Environment, Code of Practice for Safety and Health At Work (MS 426 : 1994).

All Right Reserved
217

All Right Reserved
218
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Accidents and fatalities involving site transport continue to be one of the major
contributors to accident and fatality statistics in construction industry. Improving the
safety record of transport on construction site needs more than safety awareness
and compliance with regulations. It demands safe system of work, planned in the
company safety policy, incorporated into training and strictly adhered to on site.
2.0 HAZARDS
2.1 Site Conditions
Poor conditions on site obviously affect driving safety. It is bad practice to
regard situations as too temporary to justify the trouble and expense of
making them satisfactory. The result can be that uneven ground; debris,
unprotected excavations and congested loading and storage areas create
unnecessary hazards.
2.2 Knocking Down Pedestrians

Danger is inherent in situation where vehicles whose drivers are intent on
their particular work and pedestrian similarly preoccupied, are moving about
in the same limited space at the same time.
2.3 Overloaded
As a resort to minimize traveling time, lorries and trucks always has been
overloaded and lost its stability while traveling and overturned.

All Right Reserved
219
2.4 Over Speeding

Over speeding is another common bad practice amongst the lorry hantu drivers, as they are being paid according to the trips they made for the day. The
consequences are collision and overturn.
2.5 Contact With Structures

This scenario usually occurred while reversing the vehicles.
2.6 Contact With Overhead Power Lines

This hazard arises when working near or under overhead power lines.
2.7 Fall from Vehicle/Transport

Misuse of mobile plant and other unsuitable vehicles as mode of transport can
lead to mishap. The passenger might slip and fell from the moving vehicle or
plant. Very often this incident resulting in fatality.
2.8 Poor Maintenance of Vehicles

Poor maintenance that leads to vehicles being used in a bad mechanical state
often leads to injury-producing accidents.

All Right Reserved
220
3.0 CONTROL MEASURES

3.1 Selection of Drivers
Persons selected to drive site vehicles should be physically fit with normal
eyesight and hearing. They should be mature, reliable and have the capacity
to carry out the work in a responsible manner.
The possession of a valid driving license is not itself an indication that the
holder is capable of taking control of any vehicle/machine. At least it indicates
a minimum driving standard, and any endorsements can be taken into
consideration in driver selection. Each driver should be trained and tested for
the specific vehicle he is required to drive.
3.2 Site Conditions

The main access and egress point into and from site should be appropriately
planned. Where conditions permit vehicles route must be separated form the
pedestrian walkway. If the access and egress point is facing a public road, a
traffic controller should be employed to direct and control the vehicle coming
in and out of the site.
Roads on site must be regularly maintained and should be free of potholes

and uneven surfaces.

All Right Reserved
221
3.3 Vehicles Maintenance

Planned maintenance procedures prevent accident and delays due to mechanical failures, minimize repair downtime and prevent excessive wear and breakdown.
Drivers and operators are usually the first to notice when defects develop,
therefore drivers and operators on a daily or weekly basis should carry out
basic inspection and maintenance. A system of inspection/servicing carried
out by competent foremen at regular intervals must also be established, complying with the manufacturers or companys requirements. A record of
maintenance and repairs must be kept.
Vehicles checklist should cover but not limited to the following:
brakes;
headlights;
stoplights and indicators;
tyres;
screens and wipers;
steering wheels;
glass;
horn;
mirrors;
instrument;
exhaust system;
emergency equipment;
ignition problems;
connecting cables, etc.
All Right Reserved
222
3.4 Speed Limits

Speed limit should be established early and clearly displayed for traveling on
site. These limits must be changed for special conditions such as heavy dust.
3.5 Protection of Pedestrian and Public

Where works being performed over, or on close proximity to highways or any
other public places, the work area should be barricaded and suitable warning
and directional signs posted at strategic locations.
3.6 Unauthorized Passenger

Unauthorized passenger should be prohibited, only vehicles designed for such
purposes should be allowed to carry passenger.

a) Section 15, Part IV General Duties of Employers & Self-Employed Person,
b) Regulation 18 Public Vehicular Traffic, Part II General Provisions, Factories &
Regulations 1986.
c) Section 13 Vehicle Operation, Code of Practice for Safety & Health at Work (MS
426 : 1994).

All Right Reserved
223

All Right Reserved
224
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Every year, many workers are killed or seriously injured when working in
excavations. Excavation works are unavoidable in construction processes it is an
essential element particularly in the construction of foundations, drainage, sewerage,
etc.
During excavation work, soil conditions can vary widely, often in short distances. No
excavated soil can support its own weight for any length of time let alone if
imposed by any additional loads such as plants and machinery. One (1) cubic meter
of soil is approximately 1.3 tonnes, a small fall of earth is capable of causing serious
injury and even worse might result in fatality.
Therefore, excavation work has to be properly planned, managed, supervised and

carried out in such a manner to prevent accidents.
2.0 HAZARDS
The most common causes of accidents in excavation works are due to:
collapse of side due to lack of or inadequate or weak shoring;

workers falling into excavation due to lack of
barriers or inadequate fencing;
asphyxiation from exhaust gases from plant,

machinery and other work process which collected at the bottom of excavation;
falling of spoil placed at edge of excavation;

All Right Reserved
225
failure to maintain shoring / support system;

water seepage;
workers working too close together or to machinery;
falls through the unsafe means of access and egress;
workers not provided with proper and suitable tools and equipment;
vehicles being driven into the excavation due to driving errors, inadequate
barriers, or due to absence of stop-blocks;
striking of under ground services such as gas lines, water mains and electrical
cables; and
collapse of adjacent structure due to disturbance to its foundations.

3.1
Planning
It is impossible to predict the behavior of earth as its whole condition can
varies and change in short distances and time, therefore several consider
actions must be taken before commencement of work. These should include
but not limited to the following:
nature of soil and its failure mode, including the proximity of any made up
ground;
weather and moisture conditions;

size of the work;
method of excavation;
proximity of other structures and services;
duration of work;
means of protection safe slope, covered or shoring; and
if shoring is to be used, adequate supply of suitable shoring materials
available.

All Right Reserved
226
3.2
Protection of Public
Fence off all excavations in public places to prevent pedestrians and vehicles
from falling into them.
Provision of temporary pedestrian walkways with suitable and adequate

guards.
Employ flagman to direct movement of public vehicular traffic and pedestrian.
Work area adequately illuminated during darkness / at night including

provisions of warning lights or flares.
Provision of suitable and adequate warning and directional signs.

3.3 Collapse of Sides
Protect sides of excavation by battering the sides to safe angle or covering
with suitable material or supporting them with proprietary supporting systems.
All slopes and its protection require Professional Engineer design and
endorsement.
copy
of
such
document
should
be
submitted
to
Department of Occupational Safety & Health Office and another copy be kept
at the site office for inspection purposes.
Do not position superimpose loads such as spoil, machinery and plant at the
edge of the excavations.
Inform and train workers not to work ahead of protected or supported sides.
3.4 Material Falling Into Excavation
Do not store spoil and other materials and tools at the edge of excavations. Keep them at a safe distance, at least 600mm from the edges.
Make sure the edges are protected from falling materials by providing toeboards if necessary.
Train workers on the proper wear and use of
hard-hat when working in
an excavation.

All Right Reserved
227
3.5
Workers And Vehicles Falling Into Excavations

Where excavation is more than 1.2M deep provide substantial barriers e.g.
guardrails and toe-boards if necessary.
Keep vehicles away from excavation wherever possible.

Provide brightly painted baulks or barriers with suitable and adequate
directional and warning signs where necessary.
Where vehicles have to tip materials into excavation use stop blocks to prevent
them from over turning and sides of excavation need to be supported.
If use of stop block is not permissible engaged banksman assistance, the

banksman must wear bright or visible clothing.
Vehicles must be provided with rear mirror for good visibility while
reversing.
3.6
Workers Being Struck By Tools, Equipment or Plant

Train workers on safe working distance do not allow them to work too close
together or to machinery.
Machinery or plant operator must be trained and competent to perform the

task.
3.7
Nearby Structures
Make sure excavation does not affect the footings of adjacent structures.
Decide if the structure needs temporary support before excavation starts.
Seek professional advice if necessary.
3.8
Underground Services
Identify for obvious signs of underground services, e.g. valve covers or patching of road surfaces.
Use locators to trace any services, and mark the ground accordingly.
Make sure the person supervising the work has service plans and know how to
use it.
Consult local service providers for any uncertainties.

Workers doing the work should be trained on safe digging practices and emergency procedures.

All Right Reserved
228
3.9 Means of Access and Egress

In long trenching work suitable means of access and egress to be provided
at 30M intervals.
If timber ladder being used, it must be of good construction, positioned at

safe angle or secured either at the top of bottom and the ladder should be
extended at least 1M above the ground level.
3.10 Toxic Gases

Do not position petrol or diesel engine equipment in or near the edge of
the excavation unless fumes can be ducted away.
Any welding or cutting work should be provided with means of ducting

away the fumes emitted by the work process.
In contaminated site, engage authorized gas tester to perform gas test

prior to and while work in progress.
3.11 Supervision, Inspection & Maintenance

a) Supervision
A competent designated person must supervise the excavation work.

Such person must also supervise the installation, alteration or removal
of any supporting system
b) Inspection
A competent designated person must inspect excavations:

at the start of each shift before work begins;
after any event likely to have affected the strength or stability of
the excavations and its support system; and
after any accidental fall of rock, earth or other material.

The designated person must stop the work if the inspection shows the
work is to be unsafe to proceed.

All Right Reserved
229
c) Maintenance
Any damage or displacement of support system members should be
rectified immediately.
3.12 Record Keeping

All inspections must be recorded and documented.
Proper documentation system needs to be established and records should
be easily accessible by interested parties.

a) Factories and Machinery (Fencing of Machinery & Safety) Regulations 1970.
b) Part XII Excavation Work, Factories & Machinery (Building Operations & Works
of Engineering Construction) (Safety) Regulations 1986.
c) Guidelines on Trenching for Construction Safety Department of Occupational
Safety & Health : 2000.
d) Part 2 Excavation Work, Code of Practice for Building Operations Code MS 282
Part 1 To 9 : 1975 (ICS 91.040)

All Right Reserved
230
This Page is Intentionally Blank
231

All Right Reserved
232
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The need for deep foundations on any project typically results from many factors,
including subsurface conditions, foundation loads, and allowable foundation settlement criteria. Once a decision is made to use deep foundationsin particular, driven
pilesthe next step is the selection of the type of pile to be used and the design of
the pile. Selection of the pile type, in addition to local experience and practice, is frequently based on subsurface conditions, while the preliminary choice of pile size and
length is usually determined by static pile capacity calculations. The next
decision is how the pile should be driven, including the selection of the pile driving
system and the driving criteria. Accurate selection of the driving criteria will not only
affect the reliability of the pile foundation, but can also greatly affect the overall cost
of installation of the piles.
There are variety types of pile and methods of driving available in the market. For
the purpose of this discussion only generic safety and health aspects will be touched.
2.0 HAZARDS
Common safety hazards associated with piling works are:
a) lifting hazardsoverhead loads, swinging objects, rigging, loss of loads, etc.
b) ergonomicsmanual handling, noise and vibration hazards.
c) moving plantcollapse, run down other workers, etc.
d) crushing hazards.
e) overhead & underground services.

All Right Reserved
233

A designated person to be appointed to supervise the work.
Determine and select appropriate plant and equipment.
Review Safe Operating Procedures for applicable equipment and perform preoperational checks.
Determine the traffic control needs.

Park in areas that: provide safe entrance and exit of the work area; do not create
potential conflicts with other vehicles and equipment operating in the work area;
and provide maximum protection for workers getting in and out of the vehicles
Wear appropriate personal protective equipment consistent with the hazard. Hard
hats, safety shoes, safety glasses and vests are standard required equipment.
Hearing protection is often needed.
Avoid walking and working under suspended loads

Employees on foot must use extreme caution to stay clear of operating equipment. Always establish eye contact with the operator before approaching equipment.
Proper lifting techniques shall be used. Get help or use equipment if necessary.
Be aware of loose materials, excavation drop-off, tripping hazards and other
obstructions.
Allow ample space for each employee to work safely.

Locate all utilities in and near work site prior to commencing work.
Be aware of poisonous plants, insects and snakes. It is a good practice to wear
long sleeve shirts, gloves and high-top boots when hazards cannot be avoided.
Keep walk spaces and work areas free from loose materials or tools.
Dispose of salvage materials properly, use gloves and long sleeves when handling
treated timber, sheet piles or steel piles.
Be aware of pinch points and crushing hazards.

Only one person shall be designated to communicate with the crane operator and
shall review signals prior to commencing work.

All Right Reserved
234

a) Section 15, Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994.
b) Part XIV - Piling, Factories & Machinery (Building Operations & Works of

All Right Reserved
235

All Right Reserved
236
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Over the years, there have been a number of spectacular collapses of formwork, in
this country. The collapse of formwork has the potential for severe injury and death.
The causes of many past failures were foreseeable and could have been prevented
by proper consideration when planning, erecting, loading or dismantling the
falsework. Most of the causes of falsework collapses were due to a lack of
co-ordination between the various trades and suppliers of falsework as a major
cause.
Failures often occur on fairly simple structures erected by smaller falsework

contractors, who may not employ design staff.
2.0 WHAT IS FALSEWORK

Falsework is any temporary structure used to support a permanent structure while it
is not self-supporting, either in new construction or refurbishment.
3.0 HAZARDS
3.1 Erection
a) Sub-standard falsework - collapse due to poor design or poor erection (not

complying with approved design and drawings).
b) Poor Access - Slips, trips and falls; abrasions, strains and sprains.
c) Inadequate edge/opening protection - fall from the edge of floor/opening.

All Right Reserved
237
d) Manual handling - Strains and sprains; injuries such as back damage while
handling and fixing falsework.
3.2 Fixing Steel Reinforcement

a) Poor Access - Slips, trips and falls; abrasions, strains and sprains.
b) Inadequate edge/opening protection - fall from the edge of floor/opening.
c) Manual handling - Strains and sprains; injuries such as back damage while
handling and fixing reinforcement.
d) Sharp edges - Cuts from reinforcement bar ends or tie wire.
3.3 Concrete Pouring

a) Poor Access - Slips, trips and falls; abrasions, strains and sprains.
b) Inadequate edge/opening protection - fall from the edge of floor/opening.
c) Violent ejection of concrete from bucket/hose at first moment of delivery Struck by concrete which may cause body injuries; falls onto the floor or
off the edge of the floor.
d) Walking on wet floor - Slip on wet formwork or reinforcement and fall; trip
or twist ankle.
e) Wet concrete - Splashes into the eyes.
f) Noise from operating Machinery - Hearing damage from continuous noise
over a long period.
g) Vibration - muscoskeletal disorder/white fingers from using of concrete
vibrator for a long period.
h) Manual handling - Strains and sprains; injuries such as back damage while
carrying out shoveling and screeding.
i) Skin/eye contact with concrete - Skin rash or allergy/dermatitis; concrete
splashed in eye.
All Right Reserved
238
3.4 Dismantling of Falsework

a) Poor communication - Collapse of structure due to pre-mature dismantling
of falsework.
c) Dismantling not done in sequence - hit or struck by falling falsework
components.
d) Poor housekeeping - slip, trip and puncture hazards.

4.1 Planning
All concerned should contribute towards the preparation of a design brief,
which should serve as the starting point for subsequent decisions, design
work, calculations and drawings. Initial planning should cover:
what needs to be supported, and how it should be done; and

how long the falsework will be in use.
Planning stage should consider that all elements of the process are
conducted in a safe manner e.g. appointment of competent designated
person, ensuring operators such as crane operators are licensed, concreter
are trained, appropriate personal protective equipment is used etc;
4.2 Design
Significant falsework structures should be designed by a competent person to
ensure adequate:
Stability.
Strength.
Stiffness.
All Right Reserved
239
4.3 Materials
Falsework should be constructed, or adapted, so as to be suitable for the
purpose for which it is used:
it should be strong enough and stable in use;

damaged components should not be used; and
different proprietary components should not be mixed, unless expressly
approved by the designer.
4.4 Erecting
Before erection begins a risk assessment should be carried out and a safe
system of work developed. A method statement which includes how all the
hazards are to be managed should be prepared. This should be read and
understood by those doing the work.
To ensure safety, falsework should be stable at all stages of erection and be

regularly checked. Only Working Drawings should be used. Erectors should
know:
where to start;
whether the equipment supplied is the same as that ordered;
at what stage checks or permits are required; and
whether checks and permits have already been carried out or issued.

All Right Reserved
240
4.5 Loading and Concrete Placement

Prior to commencement of work, the following precautions should be taken:
a) safe access must be provided.

b) falsework and formwork have been inspected and approved for
concreting work to commence.
Precautions to be taken when placing concrete include:
a) concrete should not be poured too rapidly, or from such a height as to

overload the formwork or falsework.
b) when using crane, a properly trained signalman should be appointed to
ensure good communication between crane operator and concrete gang.
c) concrete spillage should not be allowed to accumulate on falsework.
d) all workers handling cement and concrete should wear suitable eye
protection, gloves and rubber boots.
In the use of vibrators:
a) care must be taken that form ties are not broken.

b) vibrator motors on elevated platform should be firmly secured.

All Right Reserved
241
4.6 Dismantling/Striking Off the Falsework

The designated person should agree the time of striking for each section of
the falsework (a written permit-to-strike procedure is strongly recommended.)
During dismantling, ensure that workers can work safely and cannot be
injured by falling objects. A sequence for dismantling should be agreed and
detailed.
Considerations during dismantling include:
a) a striking sequence should be established and followed.

b) suitable temporary platforms must be provided for workers carrying out
dismantling work.
c) Loose fittings and materials should be removed before dismantling begins.
d) Dismantled materials should be placed directly into storage areas.
e) Materials sticking into concrete and liable to fall should be removed as
work proceeds.
f) Projecting nails must be removed or hammered down.
g) Suitable nets should be fixed where necessary to prevent or control the fall
of materials.
h) Openings must be securely covered or guarded.
i) Debris should be cleared as work proceeds.

All Right Reserved
242

Health Act 1994.
b) Section 15(2)(d) Maintenance of Working Condition Including Access & Egress,
Part IV General Duties of Employers & Self-Employed Persons, Occupational
Safety and Health Act 1994.
c) Part III - Concrete Work, Factories & Machinery (Building Operations & Works of
d) Regulations 7 Access to Place of Work, Factories & Machinery (Safety, Health &
Welfare) Regulations 1970.

All Right Reserved
243

All Right Reserved
244
1.0 INTRODUCTION
There are quite a number of work activities in construction that need to be performed at heights, where they cannot be reached from the ground. Means must be
provided to raise the workers to a suitable working level where they can carry out
the task safely.
Factories & Machinery (Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction)

Regulations 1986 defined working at height as any work perform at a place
from which the worker will be liable to fall a distant of more than 3.0M
2.0 HAZARDS
Fall hazards create the greatest exposure to injury on construction sites. These
hazards includes:
Falls from elevation;

Falls on the same level; and
Being struck by falling objects.
The most common hazards, falls from elevation, generally includes fall from ladders,
and scaffolds from elevated work place, through floor openings and from leading
edges. Falls on the same level are usually caused by slipping and tripping hazard.
Objects that are improperly stored, disposed of, or mishandled at elevation cause
accidents involving falling objects.
A fall is created when a construction activity expose the employee to an unprotected

fall, which may result in injury or death.

All Right Reserved
245
3.0 SOURCES OF HAZARD

To prevent fall hazards, it may be necessary to recognized where falls are most likely
to occur. Construction activities from the following locations require increased fall
hazards awareness.
Ladders.
Scaffolds.
Work platforms.
Form work.
Bridges.
Structural steel.
Openings.
Reinforcing steel.
Stay-in place decking.
Cluttered / congested areas.
Excavations.
Falls from any of these locations may occur while accessing, climbing, traveling, or
working at elevation. Once the fall hazards locations have been recognized, the next
step in the fall prevention process involves identifying the type of fall hazards that
may occur at these locations.

All Right Reserved
246

Fall prevention is any means used to reasonably prevent employees exposure to fall
hazards, either by eliminating work at elevation, using aerials lifts, scaffold, work
platform with guardrail or similar protection. The key to fall prevention is to develop
a plan, prior to construction, designed to eliminate exposure to fall hazards. Fall
prevention planning involves an in depth analysis of each construction activity that
exposes employees to potential fall hazards. Based on this analysis, the contractor
must select the most appropriate method of protection (elimination, prevention or
control). The primary objective during the planning phase of any construction
activity should be disposing of the need for fall arrest equipment in favor of fall
prevention measures that eliminate fall hazards.
4.1 Proper Access

Includes correct installation and proper use of ladder, scaffold stairs towers,
and stairways. Attach fall arrest system (life lines) to bridge steel and form
work before erection to accommodate safe access.
4.2 Guardrail Protection

Designed work locations requiring protection include: -

Elevated work platform (such as on form work).

Scaffolds.
Openings/holed in bridge decks, floors or other unprotected surfaces.
Unprotected sides of ramps/stairways/platforms.
Additional fall protection measures include using elevating equipment,

performing work on the ground, practicing good housekeeping, protecting
openings/holes, isolating areas below elevated work, and discussing fall
prevention measures with employees. All of these measures are intended to
prevent the fall before its occurrence

All Right Reserved
247
4.3 Fall Protection

Fall protection involved using personal fall arrest equipment to prevent the
completion of a fall and to reduce the possibility of resulting injuries.
Fall protection measures are taken when employees exposure to a fall hazards cannot be eliminated by using fall prevention measures.
For example, climbing forms or rebar requires complete and continuous

protection. Sometimes the only way to provide this protection includes using a
self-retracting device anchored overhead and attached to the employee. This
fall arrest system protects employees while climbing by preventing a complete
fall.
a) Selecting Proper Equipment
Establishing an effective fall arrest system begins with selecting the proper
personal fall arrest equipment to protect the employee in the event of a
fall.
The task being performed;

Requirement of workers mobility;
The number of employees requiring protection;
The distance of potential fall, and
The presence of concrete, dirt, moisture, solvents and other
environmental factors.

All Right Reserved
248
c)
Components of a Fall Arrest Equipment

Establishing an effective fall arrest system begins with selecting the proper personal fall arrest equipment to protect the employee in the event of a fall.
The purpose of a fall arrest system is two fold: To stop the fall, and
To distribute the impact energy experienced during fall arrest. Properly installed and used, fall arrest system can prevent or minimize possible injury,
the three basis components of a fall arrest system includes: -
Anchorage component and structure;

Body support full body harness; and
Connecting land yards, lifelines, devices.
A fall arrest system requires identifying the proper anchorage, wearing the appropriate body support and using a connecting means capable of attaching the
worker to the anchorage. This system is designed to control a free fall and minimized injury. A critical factor in the design of any fall arrest system is ensuring
that all components (anchorage, body support and correcting means) are compatible.

All Right Reserved
249
4.4 Ladders
Ladder safety begins with the selection of the proper ladder for the job and
includes inspection, set-up, proper climbing and standing, proper use, care,
and storage. In addition to the general safety rules for all ladders there are
special rules for using stepladders and for single and extension ladders.
a) Ladder Selection
Use the proper size ladder for the job. The average worker will generally
work most comfortably at his shoulder level, which is about 1.5 M above
where he stands. Since the worker must stand at least 600mm down from
the top of a ladder, the maximum working height would be about 0.9M
above the top of the ladder or 1.5M minus 0.9M. For example, a 1.5M
stepladder would give an effective working height of 2.4M or 1.5M plus
0.9M. When using straight or extension ladders, the workers stands 0.9M
down from the top, which gives an effective working height of 600mm
above the ladder top.
b) Ladder Set-Up
Place ladder feet firmly and evenly on the ground or floor. Make sure
the ladder is sitting straight and secure before climbing it. If one foot
sits in a low spot, build up the surface with firm material.
Do not try to make a ladder reach farther by setting it on boxes,

barrels, bricks, blocks or other unstable bases.
Do not allow ladders to lean sideways. Level them before using

All Right Reserved
250
Brace the foot of the ladder with stakes or place stout boards against
the feet if there is any danger of slipping.
Never set up or use a ladder in a high wind, especially a lightweight

metal or fiberglass type. Wait until the air is calm enough to insure
safety.
Never set up a ladder in front of a door unless the door is locked or a

guard is posted.
Use Safety shoes on ladder feet whenever there is any possibility of

slipping
c) Ladder Climbing and Standing
Keep the steps and rungs of ladders free of grease, oil, wet paint, mud,
paper and other slippery materials. Also clean such debris off your
shoes before climbing a ladder.
Always face a ladder when climbing up or down. Use both hands and
maintain a secure grip on the rails or rungs.
Never carry heavy or bulky loads up a ladder. Climb up yourself first,

and then pull up the material with a rope.
Climb and stand on a ladder with your feet in the center of the steps or
rungs.
Do not overreach from a ladder, or lean too far to one side.

Overreaching is probably the most common cause of falls from ladders.
A good rule is to always keep your belt buckle inside the rails of a
ladder. Work as far as you can reach comfortably and safely, then
move the ladder to a new position.
Never climb onto a ladder from the side, from above the top or from
one ladder to another.
Never slide down a ladder.

All Right Reserved
251
d) Proper Use of Ladder
Never use metal ladders around exposed electrical wiring. Metal

ladders should be marked with tags or stickers reading "CAUTION-Do
Not Use Around Electrical Equipment" or similar wording. RULE of
THUMB: If the overhead power line is 50 kV or less, then stay at least
3M away. For everything else, keep at least 100M away.
When using a ladder where there is traffic, erect warning signs or

barricades to guide traffic away from the foot of the ladder. If this is
not possible, have someone hold and guard the bottom of the ladder.
Do not try to move a ladder while you are on it by rocking, jogging or

pushing it away from a supporting wall.
Do not leave tools or materials on top of ladders. If they fall on you,

you can be hurt.
Never push or pull anything sideways while on a ladder. This puts a

side load on the ladder and can cause it to tip out from under you.
Allow only one person at a time on a ladder unless the ladder is

specifically designed for two people.
Never use a ladder as a horizontal platform, plank, scaffold or material

hoist.
Never use a ladder on a scaffold platform. If you need to reach higher,

the scaffold should be higher
e) Proper Ladder Care and Storage
Maintain ladders in good condition.

Keep all ladder accessories, especially safety shoes, in good condition.
Wood ladders, which are to be used outside, should be treated to
prevent weather damage.

All Right Reserved
252
f) Ladder Inspection
Always check a ladder before using it.

Inspect wood ladders for cracks and splits in the wood.
Check all ladders to see that steps or rungs are tight and secure. Be
sure that all hardware and fittings are properly and securely attached.
Test movable parts to see that they operate without binding or without
too much free play. Inspect metal and fiberglass ladders for bends and
breaks.
Never use a damaged ladder. Tag it "Defective" and report it to the

boss so that it may be removed from the job.
4.5 Scaffolding
A scaffold is an elevated working platform for supporting both personnel and
materials. It is a temporary structure, used mainly in construction and or
maintenance work. Scaffolding is the structure-made of wood or metal-that
supports the working platform.
a) General Safe Practices
Provide scaffolds for all works except that which can be done safely from
the ground or similar. A competent person should supervise the erection.
When scaffolding is leased or purchased, safety instruction for erection and
use should accompany the equipment. Do not interchange the scaffolding
components of different manufactures.
Scaffolds must be designed, constructed and maintained in accordance
with the manufactures instruction and the applicable industry standards.
Design scaffolds to support at least four times the anticipated weight of
the workers and materials that will be on them.
If these structures, including such accessories as braces, brackets, trusses,
screw legs and ladders are damaged or weekend from any cause they
should be repaired or replaced immediately.

All Right Reserved
253
It is important to keep scaffold, platform runways and floors free of

grease, mud or any other material or equipment that will make them
unsafe or hazardous to persons using them.
Determine the width of all scaffolds, ramps, runways and platform by the
purpose for which they are built. In no case, however, should they be less
than 1.8 in. (46 cm) wide. They should be wide enough for passage of
materials and movement of personnel.
Provide a safe and convenient means for workers to gain access to the
working platform. Means of access may be a portable ladder, fixed ladder,
ramp or runway, or stairway. Testing scaffold-planks.
Wood scaffold
planks should not be proof tested. This may result in concealed or

unrecognized damage that may cause later to check scaffold planks, the
following procedure is recommended:
Examine the planks for large knots, excessive grain slope, shakes,
decay and other. Defects that may render it unfit. Discard the plank
upon visible or audible evidence of failure, or if it has an obvious
deflection.
Determine the safe load for a plank based on its size and species.

All Right Reserved
254
b) Railings
Toe-boards, mid-rails, guardrails shall be installed on all open sides and

ends of platform more than 10 feet (3m) above the working surface
(floor). Standard railings consist of a top rail, an intermediate rail, a toeboard, and post. The top rail should be smooth throughout the length of
the railing. The intermediate rail should be halfway between the top rail
and the floor, platform, runway, or ramp. A standard toe-board shall be
minimum 8 inch. (200mm) of vertical height from its top edge of the level
of the floor, platform, runway, or ramps. Where material is piled to such a
height that a standard toe-board does not provide protection, provide
paneling or screening from the floor to an intermediate rail or top rail.
c) Tubular Metal Scaffold
Tubular metal scaffolding is readily available, versatile, adaptable to all

scaffolding problems, and economical to use. Most manufactures and
suppliers of tubular metal scaffolding provide engineering services to help
in the design of adequate scaffolding for any situation. Many suppliers also
furnish
erection
and
dismantling
services.
Erect
such
scaffolding
accordingly to the manufacturers instruction.
Do not exceed load limits, and do not use dissimilar metals together in one
scaffolding.
The following are some common-sense rules for erecting, dismantling and
using metal scaffolding, recommended by the scaffolding.

All Right Reserved
255
Post safety rules for scaffolding in a conspicuous place and make sure workers follow them.
Abide by all DOSH, OSHA Regulatory Codes, Ordinance, and regulations.

Inspect all equipment in good repair, never use equipment that is damaged or deteriorated in anyway.
Keep equipment in good repair, avoid using rusted equipment, is strength is not
known.
Inspect erected scaffolds regularly to be sure they are maintained is safe condition.
Consult the scaffolding supplier when in doubt. Never take chances.
Erect all such equipment in accord with manufacturers specifications. Do not exceed the loads limits recommended by the manufacturer. Use extreme caution,
when metal scaffolds are used in the vicinity of energized electrical circuits, prohibit
climbing of braces. Provide a ladder or stairway for entry and exit.
d)
Mobile (Rolling) Scaffold
Mobile (rolling) scaffolding is caster-mounted sections of tubular metal scaffolding

mobile scaffolding, mobile scaffolding can also be made of components specifically
made for the purpose.
Observe the following requirements for mobile scaffolding:
Mobile (rolling) scaffolding should be used only on firm

level, clean surfaces.
Stabilize the tower during movement from one location

to another.

All Right Reserved
256
Observe the following precautions when actually moving mobile scaffold:
Secure or remove all materials and equipment from the platform before
moving the scaffold.
Apply caster breaks at all times when scaffolding is not being moved.
Do not try to move rolling scaffolding without sufficient help.
Watch out for holes in the floor and for overhead obstructions.
No one is allowed to be on top of a mobile scaffold when its moving.
e) Tubular Welded Frame Scaffold

Tubular welded frame scaffolding is an assembly consisting of factory
welded frames and attached metal cross braces, leveling screws, jacks
and/or base plates and other accessories that are available to form a complete system. The requirements for tubular- welded frames scaffoldings
follow:
Metal tubular frame scaffolding including accessories such as braces,

brackets, trusses, screw legs, ladder etc. shall be designed, constructed, and erected to safety support four times the maximum rated load.
Spacing of panels or frames shall be consistent with loads imposed.

Scaffolds shall be properly braces by cross or diagonal braces for
securing vertical members together laterally. The cross- braces shall be
of such length to automatically square and align vertical members. In
that way, the erected scaffold is always plumb, square and rigid.

All Right Reserved
257

Health Act 1994.
b) Section 15(2)(d) Maintenance of Working Condition Including Access & Egress,
c) Regulations 7 Access to Place of Work, Factories & Machinery (Safety, Health &
d) Regulations 9 Openings Generally to be Fenced, Factories & Machinery (Safety,
Health & Welfare) Regulations 1970.
e) Regulations 9 Stairway, Factories & Machinery (Safety, Health & Welfare) Regulations 1970.
f) Regulations 10 Fixed Ladder, Factories & Machinery (Safety, Health & Welfare)
Regulations 1970.
g) Regulations 11 Catwalk, Runway or Gangway, Factories & Machinery (Safety,
h) Regulations 10 Access to Place of Work, Part II General Provisions, Factories
& Machinery (Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction)
(Safety) Regulations 1986.
i) Part V Cleaning, Repairing & Maintenance of Roof, Gutters, Windows, Louvers
& Ventilators, Factories & Machinery (Building Operations and Works of
j) Part VI Catch Platforms, Factories & Machinery (Building Operations and Works
of Engineering Construction) (Safety) Regulations 1986.
k) Part VII Chutes, Safety Belts & Nets, Factories & Machinery (Building
Operations and Works of Engineering Construction) (Safety) Regulations 1986.

All Right Reserved
258
l) Part VIII Runways & Ramps, Factories & Machinery (Building Operations and
Works of Engineering Construction) (Safety) Regulations 1986.
m) Part IX Ladders & Step-Ladders, Factories & Machinery (Building Operations
and Works of Engineering Construction) (Safety) Regulations 1986.
n) Part X Scaffolds, Factories & Machinery (Building Operations and Works of
o) Part 7 Scaffolds, Code of Practice for Building Operations Code, MS 282:Part 1
to 9:1975 (ICS 91.040).
p) Part 8 Ladders, Code of Practice for Building Operations Code, MS 282:Part 1 to
9:1975 (ICS 91.040).
q) Part 9 Temporary Floors, Stairs, Railings & Toe Boards, Code of Practice for
Building Operations Code, MS 282:Part 1 to 9:1975 (ICS 91.040).

All Right Reserved
259

All Right Reserved
260
1.0 INTRODUCTION
There is a wide and ever increasing variety of mechanical plant and equipment in
use in construction works. In practice includes everything from heavy machinery
such as bulldozers, earth graders, mobile cranes, etc. through portable items such as
electrical drills, grinders, disc cutters, etc. Accidents involving plant and machinery
are often severe and some cases fatal.
2.0 HAZARDS
Only hazards associated with general plant and machinery will be discussed in this
module as hazards for hand and power tools are discussed in another specific
module.
Operating mechanical plant or machinery in the vicinity of overhead or underground
services such as electrical cables, water mains, etc may present a very serious hazard. There are potentials for plant or machinery or their part s to get in contact with
those services, which may have severe consequences.
Normally mobile plant such as excavator, crawler cranes, etc, is large, powerful and
noisy while in operation. The noise generated not only cause nuisance to the
operator but also surrounding public. At certain level the noise might result in
deafness to the operator if not controlled.
Dust emitted from the work using plant and machinery is another hazard to be considered
especially works on roads where silica dust is generated from handling of
crusher run and other sub-base materials for the road. Exposure to silica dust for a
long period may cause workers to be infected by silicosis.
The operator also might have restricted visibility due to the position of the plant or
machinery or dust and other unavoidable obstructions. There is tendency for other
workers on site get hit or run over by moving plant or machinery or the plant or machinery might collide each other. Mobile plant or machinery being driven at high
speed is another contributor to accident on site.
Plant and machinery wrongly positioned is another contributing factor to accident on
site. Plant and machinery may be toppled or workers may be caught in between are
common hazards.
All Right Reserved
261

3.1 Selection of Drivers, Operators and Banskmen
All drivers, operators and banskmen for mechanical plant and machinery
must be competent to perform their duties.
3.2 Selection of Plant and Machinery

Plant and machinery to be selected must be suitable with the task to be carried out and operated or used as what they are designed for.
All moving or rotating parts are well covered and protected.
Certain plant and machinery require permission from the authorities for installation and certificate of fitness and certificated competent operator to be operated. Check with the authorities on permission to install and certificate of
fitness and competent operator requirements. Ensure plant or machinery with
valid certificate of fitness and certificated competent operators are allowed on
site.
3.3 Safe Operating Procedures

Procedures and arrangements must be established to ensure only authorized
drivers and operators driving or operating the plant and machinery.
3.4 Site Conditions

Site conditions such, as main access and egress and roads must be
maintained in good conditions. Movement of plant, machinery and other vehicles in and out of site must be controlled and guided by trained traffic controller.
Haulage roads must be maintained in good condition, potholes are patched
immediately, generation of dust are controlled, etc.
Good housekeeping must be practiced and provision of adequate clearance
between plant, machinery other adjacent structures must be maintained.

All Right Reserved
262
3.5
Inspection and Maintenance

All plant and machinery will remain safe to be operated if it is properly maintained in good working condition. A preventive maintenance program must be
developed, established and implemented. The inspection and maintenance
must be carried out on a regular periodic basis. The person in charge of the
program must be clearly identified.
A safe system of work while maintenance and repair work in operation must be
established so as not to endanger the person involved in the work. Permit-to-work
must be introduced. Identify any other requirements such as props for machinery
or plant while being inspected.
The appropriate manufacturers repair and servicing instruction must be made
available to workers responsible for carrying out the work.
3.6
Training
Training of drivers, operators and all other personnel who are to use, or
perform work connected with plant and machinery, is one of the most
important single safeguards of all.
Training program must be carefully designed and made as participative as possible
in relation to the workers involved. Training may be both theoretical and practical,
Basically the training program must cover the following subjects:
legal requirements affecting employers, employees and other related parties;
an outline of plant and machinery hazards and risks;

an outline of the plant and machinery safeguarding methods including use and
operations of any guards;
possible use and wear of personal protective equipment;

the need for good housekeeping and spacing or clearance around plant and
machinery; and
the needs and importance for periodic inspections and maintenance.

3.7
Record Keeping
All inspections, maintenance and training must be recorded.
All Right Reserved
263

a) Section 15(2)(a) Provision and Maintenance of Plant and System of Work, Part
IV General Duties of Employers and Self-Employed Persons, Occupational Safety and Health Act 1994.
b) Section 14 Construction of Machinery, Part II Safety, Health and Welfare,
c) Section 15 Dangerous Parts of Machinery, Part II Safety, Health and Welfare,
d) Section 16 Projecting Material, Part II Safety, Health and Welfare, Factories
and Machinery Act 1967.
e) Section 17 Machinery for Hire or Sale, Part II Safety, Health and Welfare,
f) Section 18 Machinery Manufactured or Repaired, Part II Safety, Health and
Welfare, Factories and Machinery Act 1967.
g) Section 19 Certificate of Fitness, Part II Safety, Health and Welfare, Factories
h) Section 20 Duties of Persons Employed, Part II Safety, Health and Welfare,
i) Section 21 Duties of Occupier, Part II Safety, Health and Welfare, Factories
j) Part III Persons In Charge and Certificates of Competency, Factories and
Machinery Act 1967.
k) Section 36 Installation of Machinery, Part V Notices of Occupation of Factory
and Registration and Use of Machinery, Factories and Machinery Act 1967.
l) Section 37 Application for Registration, Part V Notices of Occupation of
Factory and Registration and Use of Machinery, Factories and Machinery Act
1967.
m) Section 38 Register, Part V Notices of Occupation of Factory and Registration
and Use of Machinery, Factories and Machinery Act 1967.
All Right Reserved
264
n) Section 39 Moving or Alteration of or Addition to Machinery, Part V Notices of

Occupation of Factory and Registration and Use of Machinery, Factories and
Machinery Act 1967.
o) Section 40 Periodical Inspection, Part V Notices of Occupation of Factory and
Registration and Use of Machinery, Factories and Machinery Act 1967.
p) Section 43 Machinery or Factory No Longer In Use, Part V Notices of
Machinery Act 1967.
q) Section 44 Notice of Sale, Hire or Transfer, Part V Notices of Occupation of
1967.
r) Factories and Machinery (Certificates of Competency Examinations) Regulations
1970.
s) Factories and Machinery (Electric Passenger and Good Lift) Regulations 1970.
t) Factories and Machinery (Fencing of Machinery and Safety) Regulations 1970.
u) Factories and Machinery (Notification of Fitness and Inspections) Regulations
1970.
v) Factories and Machinery (Steam Boiler and Unfired Pressure Vessel) Regulations
1970.
w) Factories and Machinery (Compounding Offences) Regulations 1978.
x) Regulations 17 Power Driven Saw, Part II = General Provisions, Factories and
Regulations 1986.
y) Part XVI Hand & Power Tools, Factories and Machinery (Building Operations &
Works of Engineering Construction) (Safety) Regulations 1986.
z) Factories and Machinery (Noise Exposure) Regulations 1989.
aa) Section 9 Machinery Plant and Equipment, Code of Practice for Safety & Health
(MS 426 : 1994).

All Right Reserved
265

All Right Reserved
266
1.0 ELECTRICAL SAFETY

1.1 Introduction
Electrical energy is used extensively in the construction process. It can also be present in the form of existing installations. Although we use electricity day in and out
either at the work place or at home, only few of us really and truly understand what
is electricity and how it works. One problem with electricity is that it is invisible. Unless sparks are flying or smoke is coming from
somewhere that it shouldnt, an
electrically charged wire, component, or piece of equipment can appear to be harmless. And because electricity is such a common, everyday part of life, people tend to
forget how dangerous it really is.
A
common
perception
is
that
normal
electricity,
the
kind
available
at
standard 110-volt outlets, is not dangerous. In truth, at one time or another, most
people have experienced a mild electrical shock and never considered it to be harmful or even dangerous. Nothing could be further from the truth. All electricity should
be considered dangerous. It doesnt take much electricity to kill.
On construction sites there are two (2) categories of electrical installations, i.e. temporary installation meant for use during construction period and permanent installation meant for use by end user after completion of construction works.
1.2 Temporary Installation

Distribution of electricity on construction sites is essentially quite different from permanent installation. As construction work proceeds, the type of equipment in use
tends to change. From excavation to completion, there is constant need for convenient means of connecting plant which operate on a variety of voltages, phases and
current in different places and different times. Load requirements vary considerably.
Wiring problems can arise because runs require re-routing or extension. Site conditions themselves are scarcely conducive to planning a safe distribution system and
the long flexible cables for portable tools and lighting only make the overall situation
the most hazardous. Control gears need to be portable, its sitting carefully designed
fixed to a new wall, it will have to be moved to permit rendering and plastering;
set on a structural floor, it will have to be moved to permit screeding and surfacing.
All Right Reserved
267
1.3
Permanent Installation
The increasing complexity of building services carries with its growing requirements for efficient and safe testing and commissioning.
The use of modern control systems demands particular attention at the
commissioning stage.
Testing procedures may apply voltages to circuit other than those being tested
because of faults.
It is essential that sufficient time be allowed in the program for commissioning
the plant and services. Testing and commissioning, if neglected, may lead to
unsafe conditions and to the building owner being involved in additional and
unnecessary maintenance costs.
The use of permanent electrical installation by others for their particular
commissioning requirements may cause problem.
1.4
Hazards
The consequences of contact with electricity are:
electric shock, where the injury results from the flow of electricity through
the bodys nerves, muscle and organs and causes abnormal function to occur
(the heart stop, etc.);
electrical burns resulting from the heating effect of the current which burns
body tissue; and
electrical fires & explosion caused by overheating or arcing apparatus in contact with a fuel.

All Right Reserved
268
1.5 Causes of Failure

Failures and interruption of electrical supply are most commonly caused by:

damaged insulation;
inadequate system of work;
inadequate over current protection (fuses, circuit breakers);
inadequate earthing;
carelessness and complacency;
overhead apparatus;
earth leakage currents;
loose contacts and connectors;
inadequate ratings of circuit components;
unprotected connectors; and
poor maintenance and testing.
1.6 Control Measures

a) Temporary Installation
Organising & Planning

The design and installation of electrical power systems are matters for
specialists. Electrical power distribution for construction sites is no
exception and the conditions are more arduous then most, although
the availability of standardize equipment and practices greatly simplify
the task and should be used. Thus, in the case of quite small
installation the work might probably be executed by any competent
electrician, working to the specification prepare in accordance with relevant requirements. In
the case of
moderate
or large
size
construction sites however, the scale of the problem calls for a wider
and deeper knowledge of the engineering principles involved.
These problems must be considered at early stage of a construction
project. Good organizations and forward planning are essential for the
safe use of electricity.

All Right Reserved
269
Competent Person
Competent electrician as required by relevant laws and regulations must carry out all
electrical installation.
Distribution Boards
Distribution boards should be accommodated in weather proof positions and be so
arranged, if possible, that they will not need to be removed during the duration of
work. They should be protected from interferences or unauthorized operation and
they should be large enough to accommodate all the necessary apparatus required.
Each circuit should be clearly labeled and circuit diagram should be located at each
board.
For small portable panels or boards consisting two or three socket outlets, they must
be of robust construction, preferably all-insulated and should be supplied by heavyduty flexible cables.
Connectors
Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for AC and DC supplies must be of suitable made
and weather proof and of approved types. Industrial sockets are strongly recommended to be used on construction sites. The use of domestic connections should be
prohibited, as they cannot stand the robust and weather conditions. Damaged and
faulty connectors should be replaced and removed immediately.

Cables Layout
Overhead cables should be of a robust and approved type. These cables should be
sited as to present the minimum of obstruction on the site and to avoid danger and
breakdown. Never looped the cables on nails and steel brackets.
Underground cables should be buried at a safe depth and their routes clearly marked
both on the sites and site plans.
Distribution cables should be arranged as to prevent the need for long trailing cables. If laid on ground and floors they should be protected from moving vehicles and
plant. Important consideration to be borne in mind is, never allowed the cable to be
laid in wet areas of come in contact with water.

All Right Reserved
270
Hand & Power Tools

Electrical hand & power tools used should have double insulators and of suitable
voltage. Operators of such tools must be adequately trained in handling and maintaining the tools. Periodic inspection and maintenance are vital for the tools to safely
operated and used.
Safe System of Work

When working with electrical circuits and apparatus, the supply should be switched
and locked off, apparatus should be checked to ensure it is dead; permit-to-work
and lock-out tag-out system should be established and implemented in high risk situations. Records on permit issued, cancellation, etc. must be maintained.
Operations & Maintenance

All electrical installations must be properly earthed and provided with approved type
earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB).
The installations must be properly maintained to ensure safe utilization. Thus, inspection, test and maintenance must be carried out by
competent elec-
trician on a routine basis.
b) Permanent Installation
All permanent installation must comply with the approved design and statutory requirements. Testing and commissioning should be approved by the authorities.

All Right Reserved
271
2.0 HAND & POWER TOOLS

The majority hand and power tools accidents are caused by improper handling and
poor maintenance of the equipment.
2.1 Hand Tools

Hand tools in this context; refer to those tools for which the hand provides
the motive force. Those tools by themselves are incapable of causing
accidents, although some poorly designed tools may be inherently dangerous.
Therefore, accidents with them tends to arise from human failing;

carelessness, lack of common sense, not knowing the correct tool for the job,
ignorance of sensible safety precautions or failure to maintain tools in good
working order.
a) Types of Hand Tools
Most common hand tools used in construction works are hammers, chisels,
screw-drivers, wrenches, punchers, files, hand saws, hacksaws, shovels,
etc.
b) Hazards
Hazards involved in using of hand tools may include but not limited to eye
injuries due to splinters flying-off, hand injuries due to accidental knock or
tools being used slipped-off, etc.

All Right Reserved
272
c) Control Measures
Quality of tools - buying a cheap tool is a false economy; they do

not last and can be dangerous too.
Selecting right tools every tools has its proper application. The
correct type, size and weight of tool should be selected for the job. To
misuse a tool, or to use the wrong tool, is to invite personal accident
and damage.
Tools handles handles are necessary for ease of manipulation and

for protection of hand. They should regularly check for splits or cracks
and wedged where necessary to keep them tight.
Cleanliness grease, moisture and dirt should be regularly cleaned

off. Any moving parts should be lightly oiled to protect against
corrosion and to prevent tear and misalignment.
Cutting edges cutting edges should be kept sharp to permit

accurate working to avoid the hazards arising from unnecessary pressure.
Handling sharp tools both hands and body should be positioned

behind the sharp cutting edges to avoid unnecessary injuries due to
accidental slipped-off.
Repair and storage tools should be regularly checked and

thoroughly examined before use and storage. If worn or damaged they
should properly be repaired or discarded. When not in use, tools should
be stored in boxes or racked, cutting edges should be sheathed. Tools
should be kept clear of gangways so as not to present tripping hazards.

All Right Reserved
273
2.2 Power Tools

Numerous jobs can be done faster, more efficiently, even more accurately, and certainly more economically, using powered tools. Operative fatigue is reduced. It is essential, however, that these tools are used only for those jobs for which they were
designed .
a)
Types of Hand Tools

Power tools can be grouped into:

b)
pneumatic tools;
cartridge operated tools;
electrically operated tools; and
diesel/petrol-engine tools.
Hazards
Common hazards associated with the use of
power tools are:
noise & vibration;

electrocution / electrical shock; and
cut / puncture;
c)
Control Measures
Pneumatic tools
The compressor used should have a valid certificate of fitness and under supervision of competent person. The person should be responsible for regular
inspection and maintenance of the compressor.
Hoses used must be of the correct size for the tool and the length should be
kept as short as possible. They must be kept free from corrosive and puncturing materials.
Connections must be properly clamped.

All Right Reserved
274
Cartridge operated tools
All fixing devices should be used in accordance with manufacturers specifications.

Cartridge usage should also as defined in the manufacturers specifications.
All guards attached to the tools should not be removed.
Operators to be trained and provided with suitable hearing protection.
Electrically operated tools
All electrically operated tools should be used on reduced voltage as specified

to avoid the risk of lethal shock.
All tools to be properly earthed or doubly insulated while in use.

Tools to be safely disconnected from the supply while changing or adjusting
the attachments;
All attachments should be firmly fixed.

All guards must be in placed.
Operators to be trained and provided with suitable personal protective equipment.
Tools to be regularly inspected and maintained.

Petrol/diesel-engine tools
No fire or smoking should be allowed while refueling.

Should never be used in confined spaces unless there is suitable ventilation.
Hearing protection should be provided to operators.
a) Reg. 16 Electrical Hazards, Part II General Provisions, Factories & Machinery
1986.
b) Part XVI Hand & Power Tools, Factories & Machinery (Building Operations &
Works of Engineering Construction) (Safety), Regulations 1986.
c) Electricity Supply Act 1990, Regulations & Rules.

All Right Reserved
275

All Right Reserved
276
1.0 INTRODUCTION
In construction works, the use of explosives may arise when circumstances require
boulders to be blasted-off to make way for the works. Careful considerations must
be given while handling and storing the explosives. It is not only the hazards that
may arise on site but misuse of the explosives should not be neglected, especially
with the current global awareness on terrorisms.
2.0 HAZARDS
The main hazards likely to be encountered when handling of explosives and blasting
works are:
mineral dust generated from the drilling works;

accidental blast; and
misuse.
3.1 Purchase of Explosives
A police certificate must be obtained for the purchase of explosives, detonators of all types, capped fuses, and other relevant gadgets from licensed supplier.
3.2 Storage and Handling of Explosives

Explosives shall not be handled or used except in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and under immediate control of competent designated
person.
Normally permit given by the authority did not cover for storage unless under
certain circumstances. If permit granted, the type of store to be provided
must comply with the local authority and local police requirements. Basically
the store should be at all times being kept dry, scrupulously clean, free from
grit and exposed iron inside and the keys are held by a responsible person.
There should a distinct CAUTION and DANGER signs outside the store.
All Right Reserved
277
Explosives, detonators and fuses should be stored in bullet proof, fire proof
and weather proof magazines. The magazines shall be painted bright red with
words MAGAZINES DANGER EPLOSIVES distinctly painted in black
letters at least 150mm high on all four sides and on top of each magazine.
No matches, cigarettes lighters, or open flames shall be carried by any
person on the premise in which explosives are stored and no smoking
shall be allowed within 75M of the explosives.
3.3 Transporting Explosives

Lorries used for transporting of explosives shall be of ample capacity and
maintained
in
good
working
condition.
Lorries
exclusively
used for
transporting explosives shall be painted permanently with the words

DANGER EXPLOSIVES.
3.4 Drilling
Workers performing drilling works should have been adequately trained and
provided with suitable personal protective equipment particularly, respiratory
protective apparatus.
The holes must be made ready before the dynamite is brought to the work.
All drill holes shall be of sufficient diameter through out their length to permit
free insertion of cartridge without necessity of undue ramming or removing
the original wrapper from the dynamite. No person shall be allowed to deepen
holes once it is loaded.
3.5 Loading
In tamping is required, it should be done with a wooden stick having no metal parts, and pressure exerted only when necessary never a quick, sharp
blow. Provisions shall be made to segregate drilling and loading operations.

All Right Reserved
278
3.6 Warning Signs

Before a charge is fire, there shall be an efficient system of giving adequate
warning to all persons who may be endangered, and of giving adequate
notification that the danger period is passed. The local police should be
informed prior to firing of charges.
3.7 Protection of Personnel & Plant

The area in which there will be a risk to person or plant from the explosion or
flying material shall be clearly marked out, and after explosives are brought to
site, only competent designated person shall be permitted to enter or remain
in the defined danger area. Sentries should be posted to prevent unauthorized access.
Plant, which may be damaged by the explosion of flying debris, should be
protected before explosives are brought into the area.
3.8 Firing of Charges

No shotfirer shall fire a charge unless he has satisfied himself that the charge
is so placed as to be safe for the firing of the charge and that adequate time
has been allowed for all persons concerned to reach places of safety.
3.9 Inspection After Blasting

After a blast has been fired, the shotfirer shall make through inspection to
determine if all charges have exploded before other persons are allowed to
return to the operation. All loose pieces of rocks shall be scaled off.
3.10 Misfires
In the event of a misfire, no person should approach the charge until it has
exploded or an interval of 10 minutes should be allowed before it is inspected.
The shotfirer shall designate the necessary personnel to dispose of the misfire
and shall determine the safe and proper way of disposal.

All Right Reserved
279

a) Section 15, Part IV General Duties of Employers & Self-Employed Person,
b) Part XV Blasting & Use of Explosives, Factories & Machinery (Building
Operations & Works of Engineering Construction) (Safety) Regulations 1986.
c) Part 6 Blasting, Code of Practice for Building Operation Code MS 282 : Part 1
To 9 :1975 (ICS 91.040)

All Right Reserved
280

All Right Reserved
281
1.0 INTRODUCTION
There is continuous advancement in the size and variety of construction lifting
equipment used on construction site. Constant demand to lift, handle and erect
heavy modules, in order to keep on site work to a minimum, has resulted in the
development of lifting equipment from the smallest and simple type to very large
and sophisticated lifting equipment. The availability of such equipment has resulted
in a change of construction methods and design concepts. Heavy lifts are now
planned to take advantage of the greater versatility and capability of these lifting
equipment.
2.0 TYPES OF LIFTING EQUIPMENT

2.1 Cranes
a) Mobile Cranes
Truck Mounted Cranes

Crawler Cranes
Derrick Cranes
b) Tower Cranes
Hammer Head Tower Crane

Luffing Tower Crane
c) Hoists
Passenger Hoists
Goods Hoist
d) Other Types
Gantry & Bridges

Discussion in this module will be focused on cranes only.

All Right Reserved
282
3.0 HAZARDS
Main dangers stem from:
poor maintenance;
mishandling; and
lack or care by those working with or near lifting equipment;
resulting:
the equipment to collapse or overturn;

loss of control of load being hoisted; and
contact with overhead electrical cables;
workers being struck by load.

All Right Reserved
283

4.1 Crane Selection
The proper and suitable type of equipment to be selected in accordance with
the nature and task to be performed. For instance:
truck mounted mobile cranes are most suitable where the job duration is
short and good mobility is required around the site.
crawler cranes are best in off road position where ground conditions are
not suitable for wheeled vehicles. They do however require firm and hard
level standings where they are to carry out lifting duties. Transportation
and rigging times are normally longer with crawler cranes than mobile and
therefore wok duration is another factor to be considered.
derrick canes are most suitable for handling relatively heavy loads at long
radii and where the extent of work justifies the erection of such cranes.
tower cranes are suitable for the handling of relatively light loads to
extremes of height and reach and are particularly suitable when standing
is confined.
In selecting the equipment it is important to know the weight of the load to

be lifted, the radius of operation and the height of lift required.
4.2 Receiving a Crane on to Site

It is necessary to examine and check the following upon arrival of the crane
on site:

All Right Reserved
284
competency of the operator and banksman/slinger;

validity of the certificate of fitness;
the crane to be used is suitable for the task;
safety devices and lifting apparatus are in good
working conditions.
4.3 Crane Standing and Foundation

The positioning of a crane often requires to be precise.
There should be minimum clearance of 600mm

between slewing parts of the crane and any
fixed installations or structures to prevent
workers from being trapped. If this is not
practicable, access at these points must be
blocked off.
The correct preparation of the crane foundation is vital. The ground over
which a crane has to travel or operate should be carefully chosen or prepared.
There is often failure to realize that ground conditions may not be capable of
supporting the required total load. Foundations for tower cranes should be
designed and certified by professional engineers.
Underground hazards arise from cellars and basements, recently filled

excavations, tidal or floodwater areas where ground water table is high, buried pipes, etc must be given due considerations.
The same considerations should also be given to the overhead power lines
and height limits for tower cranes in certain areas such as in the airport.

All Right Reserved
285
On soft ground it will be necessary to pack solid material (timber, digger

mats, etc.) beneath crawlers and/or outriggers to allow for settling under
load. Bearing plates or grillage may be necessary to distribute the loads.
Outriggers should be fully extended and frequently checked to ensure that no
sinkage has occurred.
4.4 Work Area Control

Access to the working area during lifting and moving operations should be
restricted to those involved in the work at hand.
The wok area should be demarcated and where appropriate, process plant
etc., which may create risks, should be isolated.
4.5 Erection and Dismantling

It is essential that all the workers involved performing the task are totally
understood, familiar with and conform to the correct procedures specified by
the manufacturer.
There must be available all necessary parts and equipment to enable work to
be carried out safely. Substitution of parts with those of inferior quality or
even incorrect components can lead to structural failure.
Competent person should supervise the erection and dismantling processes.
4.6 Lifting Gears

a) Chains
Due to the multiplicity of the grades of chain available, a given chain diameter will give rise to varied Safe Working Loads (SWL). For this reason, it is
imperative to refer to the SWL marked on the chain.
The most common defect to be found with chains in service is that of
stretching and this includes stretched or distorted links, rings or hooks.
Other regular defects are:

All Right Reserved
286
cuts in the surface through bending round sharp edged objects these cuts
reduce the strength of a link out of all proportions to the depth of the cut;
hooks opened out, most frequently due to lifting on, or near, the point as the
result of using end links, rings or shackles that are too small and which therefore, cause the full load to be borne by some part of the hook not in line with
its support.
Chains derive their properties from close control over materials and the heat treatment of them. Proper heat treatment and testing are essential features of any repair.
Arc welding cannot provide the necessary conditions and thus it is impossible to affect any repairs on site. Suspect chains should immediately be removed from site.
b)
Wire Ropes
Wire rope is manufactured from a number of single wires, which are twisted together to form a strand. There can be any number of single wires in a strand and the single wires are laid round a core of fiber or steel. To make up wire rope, the strands
themselves are then twisted round core of fiber or steel. Obviously there can be
great variety in the arrangement of wire and strands.
The Safe Working Load (SWL) of a wire rope is determined from its
guaranteed breaking load. In all cases, the manufacturers own recommended SWL
should be strictly followed.
Effective examination of wire rope slings requires considerable experience. Before
sound judgment can be made, the following should always be
consid-
ered:
kinks usually caused by use around sharp bends can give rise to serious
weakening of the rope.
wear a wire rope is unserviceable, if wear on a rope results in flattening such

that there is a 10% reduction in rope diameter. Reduction in rope diameter may
be caused by other than surface wears, but this still warrant rejection.

All Right Reserved
287
broken wires it is vital that a rope must be taken out of use if the number of visibly broken wire in any length of 10 diameter exceeds 5% of the
total number of wires in the rope. Broken wires\are dangerous to hands.
These wires should be broken-off on or below the surface by bending
backwards and forwards (cutting always leaves a raised sharp edge). It is
a wise precaution to replace slings long before the permitted broken wire
limit is reached.
c)
Bulldog Grips
Bulldog grips must not be used to make up slings, which must be properly
manufactured and tested.
d)
Fiber Ropes
Only properly manufactured fibre rope slings may be used. Lengths of

ropes found on site must not be adapted for slinging purposes.
The strength and other properties of a rope will vary considerably with
the material from which it is made. For example, sisal rope will have only
about one-third of the strength of a polyamide (nylon) rope, of the same
diameter. Manufacturers should be consulted to ensure that the slings
performance would be appropriate to the application.
As all fiber ropes are very prone to mechanical damage, they should be
checked before each use and generally treated with great care.
Natural fiber ropes are subject to rotting and chemical attack.

Man-made ropes do not rot and their and resistance to chemical attack
may be considerable, depending on the materials they are made off.
As a precautionary measure, once a fiber rope used for towing, it should

not be used for lifting.

All Right Reserved
288
e)
Eyebolts
There are various methods of marking the Safe Working Load of eyebolts
and the user must be fully aware of the particular criteria applying. Where
hooks will not freely locate into the eye or link of the eyebolt, a shackle
should be used.
f)
Shackles
Shackles are widely used for making connections in slinging. They should b
matched to the grade of chain in use. They must have a record of test and
examination, be marked with their SWL an inspected prior to use.
The pin is a separate part of the shackle but belongs to it and there is always a great risk that
the wrong pin may be used, or an ordinary bolt
inserted if the proper pin has been lost. The
greatest care is always necessary to ensure that only the proper pins are
used and that they are fully tightened.
In circumstances where the load may rock

on a shackle pin (e.g. with brick cages) the
pin must be provided with a locking device
to ensure that it does not unscrew itself.
g)
Hooks
A load can become displaced by the hook falling back after it has been set
through an eye or hole in the load to be lifted, or particularly in the case of
multi leg slings, when the load is at rest. Loads can also become displaced
if the point of the hook catches against something during the lift.
Therefore it is vital to ensure the hook is provided with safety catch and
also from any defects such cracks, etc.

All Right Reserved
289
4.7 Slinging
a) Single-Leg Sling
Single leg sling should normally be used on loads with a single point of
attachment with the sling in a vertical position.
b) Two-Leg Sling
This type of sling will be used when two lifting points are required. The
angle between the legs of the sling should not exceed 900.
c) Three-Leg Sling
The sling may not be used when the angle between any leg and a line
vertically below the centre of the master ring exceeds 450.
d) Four-Leg Sling
The angles between legs on a four-leg sling are measured between
diagonally opposite legs and should not exceed 900.
e) Spreader Beam
This is a device, which is used when headroom is restricted and the wide
spacing of lifting points would require a long sling to maintain the 900
included angles. Alternatively, they are used when load will not sustain
the compressive force applied by sling used at an angle.
The slings should be protected form the loads sharp edges by placing
timber or any other material as padding.

All Right Reserved
290
4.8 General Operating Precautions

Prior to the operation, carefully check the weight of the load and
operating radius. Ensure that the ground / base will carry the crane plus the
load. Lookout for surface and overhead obstructions. Ensure also that the
crane is correctly rigged for the load and the outriggers are correctly installed
and supported.
Tag lines are used to control the movement of load being hoisted.
Standard signaling system adopted and only competent signalman should be

giving signals to the crane operator. Alternatively the use of walkie-talkie is a
better means for communicating.
4.9 Maintenance
All lifting equipment and gears to be regularly checked and maintained. Inspection observations and any repairs done must recorded in the
maintenance log-book.

All Right Reserved
291

a) Section 15 Section 15(2)(a) Provision and Maintenance of Plant and System of
Work, Part IV General Duties of Employers and Self-Employed Persons,
Occupational Safety and Health Act 1994.
b) Section 14 Construction of Machinery, Part II Safety, Health and Welfare,
c) Section 15 Dangerous Parts of Machinery, Part II Safety, Health and Welfare,
d) Section 16 Projecting Material, Part II Safety, Health and Welfare, Factories
e) Section 17 Machinery for Hire or Sale, Part II Safety, Health and Welfare,
f) Section 18 Machinery Manufactured or Repaired, Part II Safety, Health and
Welfare, Factories and Machinery Act 1967.
g) Section 19 Certificate of Fitness, Part II Safety, Health and Welfare, Factories
h) Section 20 Duties of Persons Employed, Part II Safety, Health and Welfare,
i) Section 21 Duties of Occupier, Part II Safety, Health and Welfare, Factories
j) Part III Persons In Charge and Certificates of Competency, Factories and
Machinery Act 1967.
k) Section 36 Installation of Machinery, Part V Notices of Occupation of Factory
and Registration and Use of Machinery, Factories and Machinery Act 1967.
l) Section 37 Application for Registration, Part V Notices of Occupation of
1967.

All Right Reserved
292
m) Section 38 Register, Part V Notices of Occupation of Factory and Registration

and Use of Machinery, Factories and Machinery Act 1967.
n) Section 39 Moving or Alteration of or Addition to Machinery, Part V Notices of
Machinery Act 1967.
o) Section 40 Periodical Inspection, Part V Notices of Occupation of Factory and
Registration and Use of Machinery, Factories and Machinery Act 1967.
p) Section 43 Machinery or Factory No Longer In Use, Part V Notices of
Machinery Act 1967.
q) Section 44 Notice of Sale, Hire or Transfer, Part V Notices of Occupation of
1967.
r) Factories and Machinery (Certificates of Competency Examinations) Regulations
1970.
s) Factories and Machinery (Electric Passenger and Good Lift) Regulations 1970.
t) Factories and Machinery (Fencing of Machinery and Safety) Regulations 1970.
u) Factories and Machinery (Notification of Fitness and Inspections) Regulations
1970.
v) Section 9 Machinery Plant and Equipment, Code of Practice for Safety & Health
(MS 426 : 1994).

All Right Reserved
293

All Right Reserved
294
1.0 INTRODUTION
For construction worksite, a confined space, as you might already have guessed, is a
work setting or place with limited access. At the same time, it might be subject to
the accumulations of toxic or flammable gasses or vapours. It might lack enough oxygen to breathe in. It might have physical hazards such as the potential for soil caveins, electrical shock, explosion, falls, or objects falling from above. The point is that
confined spaces, because of their confined ness, may inherently be a lot more dangerous than other spaces.
2.0 WHAT IS A CONFINED SPACE?

Technically, a confined space must meet each of three criteria:
The space must be large enough to enable an employee to physically enter and
perform work there.
The space must have restricted or limited means of entry or exit.

The space is not designed and constructed for continuous employee occupancy. A
submarine meets the first two
signed for
criteria, but fails the third, having been de-
continuous human occupancy.
The three characteristics noted above perform an important role in helping to

technically define a confined space.

All Right Reserved
295
Some confined spaces are not easy to recognize. Trenches with open tops may
contain hazardous gasses, which are heavier than air and consequently, remain
trapped at the bottom of the trench, ready to effect employees working at the
lowest reaches of the excavation. Again, were not keying solely on mandatory regulations and rules. Its critical for employees to understand the theory behind confined space hazards.
A few examples of confined spaces are as the following:
a) Manholes and sewers
Manholes are, of course means of entry to and exit from various vaults, tanks,
pits, sewers, and similar spaces. A variety of hazards are associated with
manholes, including oxygen-deficient atmospheres, explosive atmospheres, and
toxic atmospheres, as well as physical hazards such as the potential for falls
(cover can be left off, or never put on it the first place).
b) Pipe assemblies
Consider pipe assemblies, made of piping up to 900 mm in diameter, as

constituting particularly dangerous and often unrecognized confined spaces.
Potential hazards include oxygen-deficient atmospheres, welding fumes, or other gasses. Theres not much room to move about in pipe assemblies, and certainly its very difficult to extricate any employee who may experience an
in-
jury or other problem within. Electrical shock is another hazard, due to

ungrounded tools and equipment or inadequate extension or power cords. And
heat within a pipe can cause heat illness.

All Right Reserved
296
c) Sumps
Sumps are frequently needed to collect storm water. Employees entering sumps
may encounter oxygen- deficient atmospheres, or atmospheres loaded with
hydrogen sulphide or other gasses from rotting vegetation. Due to the wet nature
of a sump, electricity is a hazard here when power tools or portable lighting are
used. Inadequate lighting can also create a hazardous situation.
e) Electrical transformers
Electrical transformers may be located near the worksite. They often contain a
nitrogen purge or dry air. Before theyre opened, they have to be well vented by
pumping fresh air in. Electricians frequently enter these transformers through
hatches on top for various reasons. Testing for oxygen deficiency and for toxic
atmospheres is mandatory.
When certain confined space are linked together (in piping systems, for example),
welding fumes or gasses from another part of the system can easily migrate or
spread to contaminate another part of the system, causing a hazardous atmosphere
where works needs to be done. This poses a serious problem, Especially if workers
entering one space do not suspect or are not aware of hazardous materials leaking
into the area.
3.0 HAZARDS
The injuries historically associated with confined spaces within the construction
industry are typically quite serious, with fatalities heading the list. In some
circumstances, employees face several serious hazards at the same time: electrical
shock and oxygen-deficient atmosphere, for instance. The hazards come from within
the space themselves, and also from materials or work the employees introduce to
perform the tasks.
All Right Reserved
297
3.1 Oxygen-deficient atmosphere

A lack of sufficient oxygen causes the majority of confined-space injuries and
fatalities, and studies have indicated that more than 60 percent of the
fatalities occur among would-be rescuers of initial victims.
The typical air we breathe consist of approximately 21 percent oxygen, and

most of the rest is nitrogen. For the typical person, a 19.5 percent level is the
minimum amount of oxygen needed for normal functioning, and its also the
minimal percentage deemed acceptable for the atmosphere in a confined
space. The following lower oxygen percentages all have harmful-to-fatal effects on individuals breathing them in:
15 to 19 percent oxygen - Lessened ability to work strenuously. May

affect coordination and may trigger early symptoms in employees with
coronary pulmonary, or circulatory problems.
12 to 14 percent oxygen - Respiration labored in exertion, faster pulse,

poor coordination, impeded perception and judgment.
10 to 12 percent oxygen - Lips may turn bluish color, respiration faster, poor judgment. Exposure to atmospheres containing oxygen levels at
or below 12 percent can cause unconsciousness so quickly that the
individual cannot help himself.
8 to 10 percent oxygen - Mental facilities at low point, fainting,

unconsciousness, vomiting, nausea, blue lips, ashen face.

All Right Reserved
298
6 to 8 percent oxygen - Four to five minutes, recovery with treatment.

At six minutes, 50 percent fatal. At eight minutes, 100 percent fatal.
4 to 6 percent oxygen - Coma in 40 seconds. Convulsions. Respiration

cease. Death.
3.2 Mechanical hazards

Additional hazards encountered in confined spaces include material or
equipment, which has the potential for falling into space from an
over-
head access-way, striking employees as they enter, work in or exit the space.
Vibration could cause the materials on top of the space to roll off and strike
employees, if a manhole cover has been removed, or it has not been installed
at the first place, materials, tools, or other equipment could fall into space,
causing injury.

4.1 Preplanning Confined Space Entries
If you dont use a formal permit system for entries, at least teach your employees to pre-plan their entries by using a permit-style checklist so that nothing gets overlooked. Granted, most construction confined space entries will
not be facing the variety of hazards found within manufacturing industries,
but at least by using a permit-style checklist, all possibilities will be addressed.
Such a checklist should consider:

All Right Reserved
299
a) Atmospheric testing and monitoring
Procedures;
Initial plan;
Standby person;
Communication/ observations;
Rescue; and
The work.
b) Preparation
Isolate/lockout/tag out;
Purge and ventilate;
Cleaning processes;
Requirements for special equipment and tools; and
Labeling and posting.
c) Safety equipment and clothing
Head protection;
Hearing protection;
Hand protection;
Foot protection;
Body protection;
Respiratory protection;
Safety positioning belts; and
Lifelines and harness.

All Right Reserved
300
e) Rescue equipment first aid, breathing aid, etc.
Indeed, the safety of the workers will depend on their knowledge and
application of proper work procedures before the space is entered.
Atmospheric testing and monitoring, as well as preplanning of the work
and rescue procedures, are all critical aspects of job safety.
4.2 Entry Permits

A typical company pre-printed confined-space entry permit or checklist
contains a number of components:
The name of the space;

The permits activation signature;
The permits cancellation signature;
The scope of work to be done under the permit;
Hazards and exposure symptoms that are
expected or that may be encountered;
Hazardous energy controls completed;

Personal protective equipment needed;
Method
of
communications
used
for
emergency;
Sub-contractors work/hazards;
Atmospheric monitoring;
Rescue/retrieval preparations; and
Entry roster of entrants, observers, and entry supervisors.

All Right Reserved
301
a) General requirements
If the employer decides that the employees will not enter

permit-required spaces, the employer must positively ensure that they
wont.
If the employer sends employees into permit required spaces, the

employer must develop and implement a written entry program
(Method Statement).
b) Permit Required Space Entry Program (Method Statement)
Prevent unauthorized entry;

Identify and evaluate hazards before entry;
Establish safe practices, such as isolation, purging, ventilation, barricades, lockout/tag out, etc.;
Provide and maintain equipment necessary for safe entry, including

testing and monitoring, ventilation, communications, personal protection, lighting, barriers, ingress and egress, and rescue;
Test permits space and document results;

Provide at least one attendant outside permit space for the duration of
entry operations. Preferably Immediate supervisor for the employee;
Identify duties of each employee and provide training; and

Implement proper procedures for rescue.

All Right Reserved
302
5.0 TERM OF REFEENCES

Health Act 1994.
b) Section 15(2)(c) Provision Information, Instruction, Training & Supervision, Part
c) Section 15(2)(d) Maintenance of Working Condition Including Access & Egress,
d) Regulations 13 Confined Spaces, Factories & Machinery (Safety, Health &
e) Code of Practice for Safe Working In A Confined Space (DOSH 2001).

All Right Reserved
303

All Right Reserved
304
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Welding has been defined as the fusion of two pieces of metal by heat or by pressure or by both. There are many different types of welding process but the two (2)
most commonly used in construction are gas welding and electric arc welding.
In gas welding, metal fusions are achieved by the use of very high temperature
flames, produced by a mixture of oxygen and a fuel gas, such as acetylene or LPG,
at torch or blowpipe.
In electric arc welding, the arc is struck between an electrode and work-pieces. The
temperatures attained by the welding are approximately 40000C. At this
temperature, the work-pieces are melted and fused together.
2.0 HAZARDS
The main hazards likely to be encountered during welding and cutting processes are:
high temperature, causing burns and fires;

directly or indirectly evolves fumes, liable to cause injury to health;
thermal radiation causing burns and arc eye;
oxygen deficiency or enrichment within confined spaces;
electric shock, which may also lead to other hazard such as fall, etc.; and
explosion when performing work in confined spaces such as tanks, vessel and
drums where flammable contents not adequately cleaned prior entry.

All Right Reserved
305

3.1 Gas Welding & Cutting
a) Cylinder Identification
Oxygen cylinders are painted in black and the outlet valve threads are on
the right. The outlet valve threads of fuel cylinders are left hand and the
cylinders are painted maroon for acetylene and propane while red are
commonly used for LPG.
b) Gas Characteristics
Oxygen has no smell, and not it-self is flammable, however too much
oxygen in the atmosphere can be extremely dangerous. If the gas
impregnates materials that normally dont burn, they are liable to burst
into flame.
Acetylene is highly flammable and with air or oxygen, may form an

explosive mixture. LPG is heavier than air and may, therefore, collect in
low lying areas.
c) Storage of Cylinders
Oxygen cylinder must be stored at least 3.0M away from those containing
acetylene or LPG, since any mixture of them might result in explosion.
Gas cylinder must be kept on a hard standing in safe in the open air.
When cylinders need to be stored in store-room, the store must be
constructed from non-combustible materials with adequate high and low
level ventilation. Oxygen must not be kept in the same store with fuel
gases.

All Right Reserved
306
Acetylene and LPG cylinders, whether full or empty, are to be kept in

upright position and secured from falling. If they are kept horizontally, acetone or LPG liquid may be withdrawn from the cylinder and the nozzle
might be accidentally knock-off. Oxygen may be stacked horizontally with
maximum height of four cylinders with fully wedged to prevent them from
rolling.
Cylinders must be shielded from direct sun light or other heat to avoid any
build up of excess internal pressure that might cause them to leak or in
extreme cases it will burst.
d) Cylinder Handling
Hand and clothing must be free from grit, grease and oil when handling
cylinder to prevent them from slipping and to prevent the girt getting into
the valve or grease into the valve or nozzle.
Do not handle cylinders at the nozzles, as they are not designed to take
such weight.
Cylinders must be handled and transported with the aid of trolley.

Otherwise, the regulators and hoses must be detached and valves are
properly shut-off. Never allow cylinder to be rolled off on ground or floor.
While handling and transporting cylinders care to be taken to ensure they

are not subjected to fall and shock. They must be secured to avoid any
violent contact that might weaken its walls.

All Right Reserved
307
e) Regulators
Regulators must always be fitted to the cylinders, to regulate working
pressure of the blowpipe. The regulators must be inspected and checked
periodically for any leakage.
f) Hoses
Color code to be adhered for identification purposes red for acetylene
other fuel gas except LPG, the color is orange and blue for oxygen.
Hoses must be inspected daily to ensure they are free from cuts, scratches, cracks, burnt or worn patches.
They must be effectively clipped to the
equipment and protected from sharp edges,
falling materials, passing traffic and sparks
from the welding operation.
g) Non-Return Valves and Flashback Arrestors
The valves and arrestors must be fixed to avoid any flashback that might
occur in case the blowtorch nozzle becomes blocked.
h) Blowpipes
The blowpipes must be inspected, dismantled and
cleaned at regular intervals to avoid any reverse flow
of gas ad flashback might occur in the case the nozzle
is blocked or damaged.
i) Pressure Gauges
Pressure gauges must be in good working condition to ensure correct
mixture of gases is being released from the cylinders.

All Right Reserved
308
3.2 Electric Arc Welding & Cutting

a) The Circuit
Direct or alternate current may be used for the
electric arc welding and cutting work. Whichever
system is use, it is important to ensure that the
voltage be as low as is consistent with effective
welding.
Cables are usually dragged on rough surfaces therefore their insulators

must be suitable for resisting hard wear and must be frequently examined
for defects.
The part of the cable, which is connected to the electrode holder, must be
as flexible as possible, so as not to hamper the welders movement.
Joints between cable sections must be made with properly constructed

insulated cable couplings, adequately insulated so that live metal is not
exposed if the parts of the connectors are separated.
b) Electrode Holders
An electrode holder is essentially a pair of spring-loaded jaws, or a threaded sleeves, fitted to the end of welding lead. The holder must be fully insulated, so that the live portion cannot be touched accidentally.
c) Ground Return and Machine Grounding

A ground return cable must have a safe current carrying capacity equal to
or exceeding the specified maximum output capacity of the welding or
cutting unit.

All Right Reserved
309
3.3 Fire Prevention

Whenever practicable, the object to be welded or cut must be moved to a
safe location. When the object cannot be moved, all movable fire hazards in
the vicinity must be taken to a safe place otherwise protected. Practice good
housekeeping and suitable fire extinguisher must be provided at the work
place.
3.4 Ventilation
Works performed in confined spaces must be provided with
adequate means of ventilation to remove fumes and smokes
at the source.
3.5 Personal Protective Equipment

The workers must be provided with suitable eye and face
protection and welding apron.

All Right Reserved
310

a) Section 15(2)(a) Provision and Maintenance of Plant and System of Work, Part
IV General Duties of Employers & Self-Employed Person, Occupational Safety &
Health Act 1994.
b) Section 15(2)(a) Arrangements for Use, Operation, Handling, Storage &
Transport of Substance, Part IV General Duties of Employers & Self-Employed
Person, Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994.
c) Section 22(a) Ventilation, Part II Safety, Health & Welfare, Factories &
Machinery Act 1967.
d) Section 24 Personal Protective Clothing & Appliances, Part II Safety, Health &
Welfare, Factories & Machinery Act 1967.
e) Regulation 15 Containers for Volatile Inflammable Substances, Factories &
Machinery (Safety, Health & Welfare) Regulations 1970.
f) Regulation 16 Precautions Against Ignition, Factories & Machinery (Safety,
g) Regulation 21 Safety Provisions in Case of Fire, Factories & Machinery (Safety,
h) Regulation 22 Fire Fighting Appliances, Factories & Machinery (Safety, Health &
i) Regulation 25 Ventilation, Factories & Machinery (Safety, Health & Welfare)
Regulations 1970.
j) Part 3 Welding & Cutting, Code of Practice for Building Operation Code MS
282 : Part 1 To 9 :1975 (ICS 91.040)
k) Section 12 Fire & Explosion, Code of Practice for Safety & Health at Work (MS
426 : 1994)

All Right Reserved
311

All Right Reserved
312
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Demolition means the complete or partial dismantling of a building or structure.
It excludes refurbishment, provided this work does not involve the alteration of existing structural components.
Demolition work creates high potential for risks to workers and the general public.
There have been a number of instances of workers and others being killed or seriously injured by falling materials and unsafe removal of plant from demolition sites.
To counter the hazards, all personnel involved in a demolition work must be fully
aware the types of hazards and the safety precautions to take to control the hazards.
2.0 HAZARDS
Demolition work involves many of the hazards associated with construction. However
demolition incurs additional hazards due to unknown factors such as deviations from
the structures design introduced during construction, approved or unapproved modifications that altered the original designs, materials hidden within structural members, and unknown strengths or weaknesses of construction materials. These may
cause pre-mature collapsed of the structure being demolished.
Hazards in demolition works could also exist in the form of dangerous materials such
as lead dust, silica dust, asbestos dust and toxic gases or vapors.
High level of noise is another hazard that could be experienced by workers in
demolition work.

All Right Reserved
313

Before the commencement of any demolition work, a Method of Statement
describing the demolition site and the proposed demolition methods and work
processes must be prepared and approved by relevant parties.
In developing the Method of Statement risk management tools such HIRAC or JSA
should be adopted.
No demolition activity should commence until this Method of Statement is completed
and approved.
One of the most important factors to take account of in the planning stage is the
location of all utility services. All electric, gas, water, sewer and other service lines
not required in the demolition process should be shut off, capped or otherwise controlled, at or outside the building line, before demolition work starts. In each case,
the relevant utility service provider should be notified in advance, and its approval or
services gained if necessary.
The sequence in which a building or other structure is demolished can be critical to
the safety of the workers and the general public.
The sequence of demolition will depend on the type of construction. Except in special
circumstances, buildings and structures should be demolished in reverse order to
their construction.

All Right Reserved
314
More specifically,
Demolition should be carried out in
reasonably
even
stages,
commencing from the roof or top of the building or structure being

demolished.
Multi-storey buildings or structures should be demolished storey by storey.
Masonry and brickwork should be taken down in reasonably even courses.

Every gable and the protruding portion of every chimney should be demolished when the roof is removed, before the ceiling or floor joists are
removed.
3.1 General precautions

Access to areas affected by each phase of the demolition work needs to be
restricted or made safe. Restricted areas and safe distances may be required
during:
The dropping of debris

The operation of demolition machinery
Pre-weakening activities, and
The deliberate collapse or pulling over of buildings or structures.
3.2 Manual demolition methods
Before commencing any demolition work the condition of the floors and walls
of the building or structure to be demolished must be assessed so that injury
or damage through collapse can be avoided.

All Right Reserved
315
No floor or other surface of the building or structure being demolished should

be used for supporting workers, plant, equipment and materials unless the
floor or surface is known to be strong enough. Care should be taken not to
overload floors. If water is used to keep down dust, the increased weight of
the debris should be taken into account.
Walls and gables should be demolished course by course. All work should be
performed from safe working platforms. Workers should not work from the
top of a wall or partition being demolished.
Roof trusses should also be removed from safe work platforms. Care should
be taken that the removal of trusses does not cause instability of the walls.
Nails in timber should be removed or bent over flush to prevent puncture

wounds.
3.3 Mechanical demolition

All plant and equipment should be:
Operated by a competent person, who must hold a Certificate of

Competency for the plant being used if this is required by legislation.
Used and maintained as recommended by the equipments manufacturer

or supplier.
Provided, where appropriate, with overhead protection.

All cranes used on the site should be selected and used in accordance with
manufacturers specifications.

All Right Reserved
316
3.4 Demolition by explosives

The use of explosives should be in compliance with the provisions under Part XV, Factories and Machinery (Building Operations and Works
of Engineering Construction) (Safety) Regulations 1986, Explosives Act
1957 and Explosive Rules 1923.
3.5 Protection of Public

Throughout the demolition project adequate safety should be
maintained in public places adjoining the site. Control measures to
protect the public include street closures, hoardings, scaffolding and
other types of overhead protection, used either singly or in
combination.
Where demolition sites adjoin public places and there is a danger of

falling debris, coverways should be provided.
The method of protection should be:
Erected before the commencement of demolition work, and

Kept in position at all times during the progress of the work.
Access openings in the hoarding or fence should have doors or
gates which can be locked to prevent unauthorised entry after
hours.

All Right Reserved
317
3.6 Working At Height

Persons working at heights may be exposed to a risk of falling if the
work is not being carried out safely from a solid construction surface
that is:
Structurally capable of supporting people and materials

Protected from open penetrations
Protected at its perimeter and internally to prevent falls to lower
levels
Level and easily negotiable, and

Provided with a safe means of access and egress.
3.7 Protection of Openings and Edges
All penetrations in floors, roofs or any other place where work may be
carried out should be protected either by covering them with rigid and
fixed material of sufficient strength to prevent any persons or debris
falling through, or by installing guardrails and toe boards around the
opening.
The open sides of all floors, roofs, stairwells, lightwells, lift shafts and
any place from which a person could fall should be provided with
guardrails and toe boards, or should be securely boarded up.

All Right Reserved
318
3.8 Access to Workplace

All access to and egress from the site and its amenities and work areas
should be clearly marked, well lit and protected from falling objects or
material.
Site offices and all amenities should also be located in areas protected
from falling debris, and should not be in any area that might be
affected by a premature collapse of any part of the building or
structure. The level of protection should be no less than that afforded
to public places.
3.9 Structural Integrity

Danger of Collapse
The building or structure being demolished and all its components
should be maintained in a safe and stable condition. Temporary
braces, shoring or guys can be added for stability.
Precautions should be taken to ensure that sudden weather changes do not affect the stability of the structure. Poorly braced structures can be blown over and loose debris can become airborne.
Debris should not be allowed to accumulate or fall onto floors to

such an extent that a collapse might be caused. Debris should also
not be allowed to accumulate against walls to the extent that
adverse lateral loads are imposed.

All Right Reserved
319
If any part of any building or structure (including an undemolished

part) becomes unstable and there is a danger that it might collapse,
all practicable precautions must be taken to prevent persons from
being injured by such a collapse.
Further, if there is any risk of injury to persons in an area not under

the control of the demolition contractor, the relevant authorities
must immediately be informed of the danger.
Adjoining Structures
No part of the demolition process should adversely affect the
structural integrity of any other building.
Consideration may need to be given to the use of shoring and

underpinning and to the effects of changes in soil conditions as a
result of the demolition.
Lateral support for adjoining structures should be equal to or greater than that provided by the structure to be demolished. Provision
should be made for the erection of shoring before the existing lateral support is disturbed.
The layout of the shoring should be designed to enable any new

building to be constructed with the least possible interference. The
shoring should be checked for effectiveness as the demolition
proceeds.

All Right Reserved
320
Care should be taken to ensure that other buildings are not

adversely affected by vibration or concussion during the demolition
process.
Special precautions may need to be taken in the vicinity of hospitals

and other buildings containing equipment sensitive to shock and
vibration.
No part of the demolition process should cause flooding or water

penetration of any adjoining
building.
3.10 Removal of Debris

Debris should be progressively removed from the site to prevent any
build up of debris which could affect the integrity of a floor of the
building or structure, affect site access and egress, become a fire
hazard or cause a health hazard.
Demolished materials should not be allowed to fall freely outside the

structure unless they are confined within a chute or similar enclosure.
Similarly, demolished materials should not be allowed to fall freely

within a structure unless they are confined within a shaft or similar
enclosure which is clear of obstructions.
Debris dropping zones should be clearly identified. Any area where

there is a danger that persons might be injured by falling or rebounding
debris should be fenced or barricaded to prevent entry.

All Right Reserved
321
3.11 Hazardous Substances

Demolition work frequently includes the cleaning up of sites or
structures that contain hazardous substances.
The risks arising from potential exposure to hazardous substances

should be identified, assessed and controlled accordingly.
Before starting any demolition work, all areas of the site, including
basements, cellars, vaults and rubbish dumps, should be examined to
determine whether:
There are any items which could be a fire and explosion risk.
Any previous use of the site might cause a risk because of the
nature and/or decomposition of materials.
There are any toxic, radioactive or other hazardous materials.

3.12 Other Hazards
Before demolition commences all electrical wiring, apart from the
temporary electrical installations, should be disconnected and rendered
safe by an appropriately qualified electrician.
When mechanical plant is being used, and especially when cranes and
pusher arms are being used, care should be taken to ensure that no
part of the machines comes close to or in direct contact with overhead
or underground electricity or telephone cables.

All Right Reserved
322
Excessive noise can be reduced by:
Using silencers on jackhammers.

Using compressors insulated against noise.
Organizing and designing work practices to minimize the number of
people exposed and the noise levels to which they are exposed. In
some areas, the use of compressors and other plant may need to
be restricted to certain hours.
If excessive noise remains after all other practicable noise control

measure have been implemented, appropriate hearing protection
should be provided and worn.
The risk of manual handling injuries can be controlled by using

well-designed plant and equipment, providing a safe work environment
and using mechanical equipment such as cranes to lift and move
materials.
If there is a risk of injury from the breaking of glass in windows, doors

or other openings, all the glass must be removed or the windows,
floors or openings must be boarded up before the commencement of
the demolition work.
All welding and cutting operations should comply with relevant

standards. The appropriate personal protective equipment should be
supplied and worn. Gauges and hoses should be fitted with flash
arrestors and cylinders should be properly secured and supported in an
upright position.
Confined spaces should be entered only when absolutely necessary and

only after all appropriate safety measures have been implemented.

All Right Reserved
323
3.13 Emergency Preparedness

Before work commences, the demolition contractor should provide for
first aid requirements and prompt medical attention in the case of
serious injury. These emergency procedures should be documented in
the Method of Statement.
Contact numbers for emergency services should be prominently

displayed.
Evacuation
procedures
should
be
established
and
communicated to all workers.
A reliable and effective means of communication should be established

between all areas of work and the demolition supervisor, to permit and
ensure effective evacuation of danger areas.

a) Section 15, Occupational Safety and Health Act 1994.
b) Part XI Factories & Machinery (Building Operations & Works of Engineering

All Right Reserved
324

All Right Reserved
325
1.0 INTRODUCTION
A tunnel is an excavation beneath the surface of the ground, the longer axis of
which makes an angle not greater than 20 degrees to the horizontal. A tunnel could
also be defined as a confined spaces. Thus statutory provisions, codes of practice
and guidelines for confined spaces should be applicable for tunneling work.
2.0 HAZARDS
The construction of underground tunnels are essential yet dangerous activities.
Working under reduced light conditions, difficult or limited access and egress, with
the potential for exposure to air contaminants and the hazards of fire and explosion,
underground construction workers face many dangers.

3.1
Site Control
a) Check-in/Check-out Procedure
A check-in/check-out must be maintained procedure to ensure that above

ground personnel maintain an accurate accounting of the number of persons in the tunnel and to prevent unauthorized persons from gaining access to the site. This is especially important in the event of an emergency
but is a common sense requirement at all times.

All Right Reserved
326
The only time this procedure is not required is when an underground

construction project designed for human occupancy is completed to the
point that permanent environmental controls are effective and any
remaining construction activity does not have the potential to create an
environmental hazard or structural failure in the construction area.
Any time an employee is working underground, at least one designated

person must be on duty above ground. This person is responsible for
calling for immediate assistance and keeping an accurate count of
employees who remain underground in the event of an emergency.
b) Control of Access and Egress
In addition to establishing a check-in/check-out procedure, the employer

must ensure safe access to and egress from all workstations at the
construction site to protect employees from potential hazards, such as
being struck by excavators, haulage machines, or other moving
equipment.
To help control access, all unused openings, including chutes and man
ways, must be tightly covered, bulk headed, barricaded, or fenced off, and
posted with warning signs that read, Keep Out or similar language.
3.2 Ground Support of Portal and Subsidence Areas

Portal openings and access areas must be guarded by shoring, fencing,
head walls, shotcreting or equivalent protection to ensure that employees
and equipment have a safe means to access these areas. Subsidence
areas must be similarly guarded by shoring, filling in, or placing barricades
and warning signs to prevent entry.
All Right Reserved
327
Adjacent areas must be scaled or secured to prevent loose soil, rock, or

fractured materials from endangering portal, subsidence, and access
areas.
3.3 Ground support of underground areas

A competent person must inspect the roof, face, and walls of the work areas
at the beginning of each shift and as often as necessary to ensure ground
stability. The competent person tasked with such inspection responsibilities
must be protected from loose ground by location, ground support, or
equivalent means. The ground conditions along all haulage ways and travel
ways must also be inspected as frequently as necessary to ensure safe
passage and loose ground considered to be hazardous to employees must be
scaled, supported, or taken down.
A competent person must determine how often rock bolts need to be tested
to ensure that they meet the necessary torque, taking into consideration
ground conditions, distance from vibration sources, and the specific bolt
system in use. Only torque wrenches should be used when torsion-dependent
bolts are used for ground support.
Employees involved in installing ground support systems must be adequately

protected from the hazards of loose ground. The bottoms of any support sets
installed must have sufficient anchorage to prevent ground pressures from
dislodging the support base. Lateral bracing (including collar bracing, tie rods,
or spreaders) must be provided between immediately adjacent sets to
increase stability.

All Right Reserved
328
Any dislodged or damaged ground supports that create a hazardous condition

must be promptly repaired or replaced. The new supports must be installed
before removing the damaged supports. Some type of support, such as a
shield, must be used to maintain a safe travel way for employees working in
dead-end areas ahead of any support replacement operations.
3.4 Fire Prevention & Control

Open flames and fires are prohibited in underground construction areas
except as permitted for welding, cutting, or other hot work operations.
Smoking is prohibited unless an area is free of fire andexplosion hazards.
Signage prohibiting smoking and open flames should be placed throughout
work areas. Suitable and adequate fire extinguishers must be available.
Any spill of flammable or combustible material must be cleaned up

immediately. Gasoline may not be underground at any time for any purpose
due to its volatile qualities. Internal combustion engines (except dieselpowered engines on mobile equipment) are prohibited underground. Only
enough fuel gas and oxygen cylinders for welding, cutting, or hot work during
a 24-hour period are allowed underground.
3.5 Ventilation
Fresh air must be supplied to all underground work areas in sufficient
amounts to prevent any dangerous or harmful accumulation of dusts, fumes,
mists, vapors, or gases. If natural ventilation does not provide the necessary
air quality through sufficient air volume and air flow, the employer must provide mechanical ventilation.

All Right Reserved
329
3.6 Illumination
As for other workplaces, adequate illumination should be provided in the
tunnel.
3.7 Air Monitoring

The employer must assign a competent person to perform air monitoring. If
this individual determines that air contaminants may present a danger to life
at any time, the employer must immediately take all necessary precautions
and post a notice at all entrances to the underground site about the
hazardous condition.
3.8 Drilling & Blasting

Before initiating any drilling operation underground, a competent person
must inspect all drilling and associated equipment as well as the drilling area
and correct any hazards. Employees are not allowed on a drill mast when a
drill bit is in operation or a drill machine is being moved. Also, when moving a
drill machine, all associated equipment and tools must be secured and the
mast placed in a safe position.
Whenever an underground blasting operation in a shaft is complete, a

competent person must check the air quality and make sure that no walls,
ladders, timbers, blocking, and wedges have been loosened as a result of the
activity. If repairs are required, only employees involved in repair activity may
be in or below affected areas until repairs are complete.

All Right Reserved
330
All blasting wires must be kept clear of electrical lines, pipes, rails and other
conductive material (except earth), to prevent explosions or exposure of
employees to electric current.
3.9 Emergency Preparedness

Whenever an employee is working underground at least one designated
person must be on duty above ground, responsible for maintaining an
accurate count of the number of employees underground and summoning
emergency aid if needed. Every employee working underground must have a
portable hand lamp or cap lamp for emergency use unless natural light or an
emergency lighting system provides adequate illumination for escape.
3.10 Training
All employees involved in underground construction must be trained to
recognize and respond to hazards associated with this type of work. Training
should be tailored to the specific requirements of the jobsite and include any
unique issues or requirements.

All Right Reserved
331
4.0 TERM OF REFEENCES

Health Act 1994.
b) Section 15(2)(c) Provision Information, Instruction, Training & Supervision, Part
c) Section 15(2)(d) Maintenance of Working Condition Including Access & Egress,
d) Regulations 13 Confined Spaces, Factories & Machinery (Safety, Health &
e) Code of Practice for Safe Working In A Confined Space (DOSH 2001).

All Right Reserved
332

All Right Reserved
333
1.0 INTRODUCTION
With the higher demand for better infrastructure such a roads, bridges, etc.
engineering works are no more confined on land only. There are works to be done
either underwater or over water.
Working underwater or over water include underwater diving work to assemble,

construct, demolish, dismantle, install, photograph, film, video or sound record anything to do with constructing: bridges, piles, jetties, wharves etc, navigational aids,
pipes, cables, tunnels, scaffolding, drilling rigs, oils or gas rigs, weirs and vehicles. It
also includes work to do with removal or salvage, dredging or reclamation of land
and other earthworks.
2.0 HAZARDS
Working underwater or over water presents a number of problems in particular:
failure of diving equipment while performing task underwater;

swept by rapid rise of tide or strong current; and
fall or slip while performing task over water.
Whether or not the worker is injured, there is an immediate risk of drowning and/or
being carried away by the current.

All Right Reserved
334

3.1 Work Underwater
All diving equipment must comply with relevant authorities requirements and
in good working condition.
a) Appropriate Qualification
For construction diving work, the following people must hold an

appropriate diving certificate -
employers, self-employed people and workers doing construction diving

work;
dive supervisors;
stand-by divers; and
recompression chamber operators at the dive site.
b) Dive supervisors
There must be a dive supervisor:
appointed for the work or dive site; and

personally supervising the construction diving work from a position out
of the water at the dive site.
c) Stand-by divers
There must be a stand-by diver on the surface, except where the

regulation sets out circumstances when two divers can be underwater at
the same time without a stand-by diver on the surface.

All Right Reserved
335
b) Compression Chamber
There must be an operational recompression chamber and a qualified

chamber operator at the dive site. Otherwise arrangements to be made
with the nearest hospital in the event of emergency.
d) Limited Use of Open-Circuit Scuba
Construction diving work using open circuit scuba must be done in

accordance with the diving authorities requirements. In general it should
not be carried out in circumstances such as:
be at any risk of being injured or trapped as a result of anyones use of

mechanical lifting equipment or a buoyancy lifting device; or
be underneath something that would require the diver to move

sideways (other than at an upwards angle) if the diver were to attempt
to ascend.
e) Risk Management Process
The risk management process consists of the following steps:
identify the hazards associated with the work;

assess the risk of death, illness or injury that may result because of the
hazards;
decide on and implement control measures to prevent, or minimize the

level of expose to the risks; and
monitor and review the effectiveness of the implemented control

measures.

All Right Reserved
336
The risk management process is required to be performed:
before the commencement of any diving work; and

when there is a significant change in environmental conditions or a
significant change in the way the work is done.
Each time the risk management process is undertaken records must be

made and made available at the dive site. All workers must read,
understand and acknowledge that they have read the record of the risk
management process.
The following information is required to be recorded:
the date the process was carried out;

the date the work is to start and finish the work;
the location of the dive site;
the name of each person at the dive site who will be involved in the
work.
each hazard identified;

an assessment of risk for each hazard; and
each control measure decided on.

All Right Reserved
337
3.2 Work Over Water

a) Platforms, Gangways, Etc.
Platforms and gangways must be of the correct statutory width and
equipped with guardrails and toe-boards. At all edges from which a person
might fall into water, secure barriers or fences are to be installed.
Warning notices must be posted at all edges and boundaries near water
and set so that they are easily seen by operatives approaching the danger
points.
Where platforms or gangways are erected above tidal water, decking

boards should be secured so that they cannot become dislodged by rising
water or high winds.
The provision of additional handholds is always advisable as a precaution

in the event of storms.
Barges, pontoons, etc. used as working platforms, must be properly

constructed and sufficiently stable to avoid tipping. Special attention must
therefore be paid to good anchorage and ballasting; point loads near the
edge should be avoided; due account should be taken of the variation of
load at different radii of crane.
b) Ladders
Ladders must be sound, of sufficient length and strength and be securely
lashed to prevent slipping. Where ladders are permanently fitted to plant
over water, they should be fitted with safety hoops.

All Right Reserved
338
c) Safety Nets and Safety Harness

The use of safety nets should be considered. Safety nets should be
properly secured and slung sufficiently for above high water level for
anyone caught in them to remain clear and so that free access of rescue
craft is always possible.
Safety harness should be worn where appropriate.
d) Site Tidiness
Good housekeeping is of special importance in minimizing tripping
hazards. Tools, ropes and other materials not in use should be stored
away, rubbish should be cleared up promptly. Materials not in use should
be properly stacked.
Slippery surfaces are extremely dangerous and should be treated

immediately. Oily or greasy surfaces should be gritted.
e) Weather Condition
The local weather forecast should be obtained and publicized at the beginning of each day. Rain, rising winds, fogs, sea-mist, etc. are all potential
dangers.
f) First Aid Equipment

First aid facilities should be made available, in the charge of a competent
first aider.

All Right Reserved
339
g) Personal Protective Equipment

Besides the basic personal protective equipment such as hard hat, safety
shoes, provisions of buoyancy aid is vital.
Some form of buoyancy aid must be worn as a standard practice. A wide

range of life jacket available. The jacket must be suitable for both the
hazards and the wearers.
h) Means of Access - Water Transport

Where working places are situated on water and access is only possible by
passenger carrying boats, these craft should be subjected Merchant
Shipping Ordinance 1952.
i) Emergency Preparedness and Rescue Equipment

There should be written and approved Emergency Response Plan as to
facilitate emergency rescue. The Emergency Response Plan should
detailed out the formation of Emergency Response Team and actions to be
taken in the event of an emergency.
Rescue equipment to be provided should include but not limited to:
Lifebuoys and Rescue Lines.

Grab Lines.
Rescue Boat.

a) Section 15, Occupational safety & Health Act 1994.

All Right Reserved
340

All Right Reserved
341
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Plant commissioning is a uniquely complex activity, whereby thousands of
mechanical items, designed often over a period of years and built by many people,
are integrated as a process plant, filled with process materials which may be toxic,
asphyxiating, highly flammable or a combination of all three, and put into design
service, often under conditions of extremely high temperature and pressure.
What is a plant commissioning? The process comprises a series of operational

activities leading to the introduction of process feedstock's into plant for the first
time, and the setting up of the plant to design operating condition.
2.0 TESTING
Plant to be commissioned needs to be tested for its sustainability to underwent
actual processes as it is designed for. Some of the plant that requires to be tested
are as the following:
Steam Boilers;
Storage Tanks;
Pressure Vessels;
Piping, etc.
Prior to the commencement of any form of testing activities the following
documentation is normally required:
Detailed procedures describing tests to be performed and the limitations and

safety precautions to be observed.

All Right Reserved
342
Records of all relevant certificates arising from the vendors works.

Mechanical acceptance certificates for all equipment to be tested.
The companys written approval to commence testing.
Formal system for recording and approving all test activities, results and
approved procedural variations.
Test media must be selected with great care since unsafe conditions can be created
by incorrect selection, by their use under the wrong conditions or by incomplete removal of medium after test completion. The test medium must be compatible with
the equipment materials.
Prior to testing, a complete visual check of the plant is to be performed to verify correct installation, cleanliness and readiness for testing.
3.0 COMMISSIONING
The possible sources of plant hazards are many and various. They may arise from
the design of the plant, from the nature of the materials used or produced, from
flawed procedures in fabrication, construction or testing, or from commissioning or
operational errors.
Safety during commissioning consist not only of adherence to safe operating

procedures, and the wearing of appropriate personal protective equipment and
clothing - it is also the state of mind. It comprises of a sense of awareness, of anticipation and of examining critically every act and situation for unsafe consequences.

All Right Reserved
343
Before commissioning can be commenced it is necessary that a considerable number

of items of documentation are either produced or are available. Some are required to
demonstrate to authority/client that the plant is in fact in a state of readiness for
commissioning, and to secure approval to proceed. Test verification document may
include:
Vendor data.
Construction Test Certificate.
Pre-Commissioning Certification.
Commissioning Procedures.
Logs for recording all actions, conditions and deviation encountered.
Work permits.
Ready-for-Commissioning Certificate.
Commissioning personnel must be constantly alert for a whole series of potentially
hazardous conditions, Some of the possible occurrences are:
Leakage as feedstock introduced.

Leakage due to expansion as temperatures are increased.
Pressure kick as hot materials encounter residual water ( extremely dangerous).
Machinery failure.
Failure to control system to perform as designed.
Short cutting of procedures or operator errors.
Once the plant has been set to design conditions and has been fine tuned to produce
specification products, it will often be necessary to carry out a series of performance
tests in order to demonstrate that the plant can meet the process guarantees. This
may cover, for instance, achieving product specification under certain conditions.

All Right Reserved
344
On completion of handover, there remains one final safety related activity. This
consists of experience feedback and post commissioning safety audit.
A great deal of valuable experience will have been gained in term of the ease of testing the equipment, the correctness of the written instructions, ease of operation of
plant, and adequacy of safety and control features. The advantages of the site
modification should be analyzed in detail. All advantages and disadvantages should
be assessed carefully for incorporation in future designs.
Finally, a post-commissioning safety audit should be undertaken to evaluate the

safety aspects and procedures in retrospect.


All Right Reserved
345

All Right Reserved
346
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Good housekeeping means maintaining the necessary standards of domestic cleanliness and tidiness to make sites and work places safe, healthy, pleasant places at
which to work. It may be summarized by the phrase A place for everything and everything in its place. Bad housekeeping is the cause of large number of accidents on
site.
The objectives to promote good housekeeping on site are:
to eliminate accident and fire hazards;

to conserve space, time, material and effort; and
to obtain and maintain good working conditions.
The general layout of a site is extremely important in good house keeping.
2.0 HAZARDS
The most commonly identified hazards associated with poor housekeeping are:
fire hazards,
tripping hazards;
slipping hazards;
falling hazards; and
infestation of rodents and vermin, etc.

All Right Reserved
347

Generally a good housekeeping standard can be achieved by organizing periodic
housekeeping program. It can be further enhanced by encouraging every workers
to clean-p their own work place every day before going off for the day. Dustbins
must also be provided at strategic locations within the site.
3.1 Access ways, Passageways and Stairways

All access ways, passageways and stairways must be kept clear of
obstructions at all times. Materials must not be stacked or stored at these locations. Oils, grease or other slippery material patches to be cleaned and removed immediately.
3.2 Floors
Floors must be kept clear of small articles, tools, scrap metal, or any other
working material when any of those are no longer in use. Slippery materials to
be removed or attended immediately. Extra cautions to be taken on rainy
days.
Nothing must be thrown from one level to another.
3.3 Tools
Small tools and equipment must not be permitted to lie around where they
may present slipping or tripping hazards. They should be placed in tool-boxes
or racks.
3.4 Materials Storage

Improper storage of material must not be tolerated as they my pose major
hazards. Stacking of materials inside the building must be done in designated
places and located in a such manner can minimize falling hazards. Adequate
and proper clearance must be allowed between the stacks. Stack height must
be given due consideration. Wedges or other specially designed guards must
be provided to prevent materials from rolling.

All Right Reserved
348
3.5 Disposal of Construction Waste and Scraps

Collecting points for construction waste and scraps must be demarcated. Removal of collected waste and scraps must be done at appropriate intervals.
Do not allow waste and scraps to be accumulated and become fire hazards.
Disposal of waste or debris from upper floors to be carried out by using proper rubbish chutes.
Handling and disposing of scheduled waste must be carried out by authorized
disposal contractors at approved disposal areas.
3.6 Loose Timber

All timbers such as formwork and its supporting elements must be properly
stacked once stripped off and immediately removed when no longer in use.
Protruding nails to be bent over or removed.
3.7 Burning of Construction Waste on Site

No burning of construction waste, debris and scraps is allowed on site. All
collected waste, debris and scraps must be removed and disposed at approved disposal areas.

All Right Reserved
349

a) Section 15(2)(d) Maintain Working Condition, Part IV General Duties of
Employers and Self-Employed Persons, Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994.
b) Section 15(2)(e) Maintain Working Environment, Part IV General Duties of
Employers and Self-Employed Persons, Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994.
c) Regulations 14 Dangerous Liquid, Factories & Machinery (Safety, Health &
e) Regulations 15 Containers for Volatile Inflammable Substances, Factories &
Machinery (Safety, Health & Welfare) Regulations 1970.
f) Regulations 19 Objects On Inclines, Factories & Machinery (Safety, Health &
g) Regulations 20 Stacking of Materials, Factories & Machinery (Safety, Health &
h) Regulations 23 Cleanliness, Factories & Machinery (Safety, Health & Welfare)
Regulations 1970.
i) Regulations 29 Lighting, Factories & Machinery (Safety, Health & Welfare) Regulations 1970.
j) Regulations 12 Corrosive Substances, Factories & Machinery (Building Operations & Works of Engineering Construction) (Safety) Regulations 1986.
k) Regulations 20 Illumination of Passageways, Etc., Factories & Machinery
(Building Operations & Works of Engineering Construction) (Safety) Regulations
1986.
l) Regulations 21 Storage of Materials & Equipment, Factories & Machinery
(Building Operations & Works of Engineering Construction) (Safety) Regulations
1986.
m) Regulations 22 Disposal of Debris, Factories & Machinery (Building Operations
& Works of Engineering Construction) (Safety) Regulations 1986.

All Right Reserved
350

All Right Reserved
351
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The risk of fire on many construction sites is great. Examples include the situation
when work is being carried out within an existing high fire risk plant, or the final
stages of a project when finishing materials are in the course of being worked and
positioned, often resulting in the accumulation of substantial amounts of combustible
materials and flammable liquids.
2.0 HAZARDS
There are five (5) main hazards produced by fire:
oxygen depletion;
flame / heat;
smoke,
gases combustion products; and
structural failure.
3.0 COMMON CAUSE OF FIRE ON CONSTRUCTION SITES
These include:
use of unsuitable or badly positioned cooking appliances (particularly gas) in

temporary living accommodations;
wet clothing which has been placed over, fell upon source of heating intended
to dry it;
children playing with fire on site after working hours;

carelessly discarded cigarette ends / matches;

All Right Reserved
352
misused of faulty liquefied petroleum gas equipment;

welding sparks;
faulty or wrongly used portable electrical apparatus;
sub-standard or faulty electrical installation / connections;
improperly controlled rubbish burning;
malicious or intentional ignition;
spark from abrasive wheels and metal cutting;
spread of highly flammable vapor to a source of ignition many meters away
(petroleum based adhesives are often involved);
improper storage of highly flammable liquids and gases; and

internal combustion engine site vehicles (spark from unprotected exhausts,
induction of flammable atmosphere into engine intake, etc.)
4.0 THE CHEMISTRY OF FIRE

Fire, or the process of combustion, is extraordinarily complex, for a fire to occur,
fuel, oxygen, heat, and a chemical chain
reaction join in a symbiotic relationship
(as shown next page). In combustion heat energy is released in a self-catalyzed reaction involving a condensed-phase fuel, a gas-phase fuel, or both. The combustion
process is usually associated with rapid oxidation of fuel oxygen in the air. If the
combustion process is confined so pressure can increase, an explosion can result. A
similar process that takes place over long periods of time and at a lower temperature
is called oxidation. Rusting of metal is an example of this. A fire, then, is a combustion process intense enough to emit heat and light.

All Right Reserved
353
In addition, a fire can be classified into two general forms or modes - flame fire and
surface fire. Flame fire directly burn gases or vaporized fuel and include deflagrations. The rate of burning is usually high, and a high temperature is produced. The
following are two type of flame fire:
premixed flame fire exists in a gas burner or stoves are relatively controlled.
diffusion flame fire refers to gases burning on mixed vapors and air. Controlling
this fire is difficult.
Surface fire occurs on the surface of solid fuel and is often called a glow or deep amber seated fire. Surface fire takes place at the same temperature as do often flame
fire.
The surface fire is represented by the fire triangle heat, fuel, oxygen but not
chemical chain reaction. The flame fire includes chemicals chain reactions. These
two modes of fire are not mutually exclusive, and they may occur together or alone.
Knowing how and why a fire burn, suggest ways to control and extinguish it. The
surface fire has three (3) components that can be controlled, while the flame fire has
four (4) components. Fire can be controlled in the following ways;
heat can be taken away by cooling.

oxygen can be taken away by excluding the air.
fuel can be removed to an area where there is not enough heat for ignition.
the chemical reaction of the flame fire can be interrupted by inhibiting the rapid
oxidation of the fuel and the con-committing production of free radicals, the life
blood of the flame reactions.

All Right Reserved
354
5.0 CLASSIFICATION OF FIRE

There are four (4) categories of fire, based upon the fuel and the means of
extinction, these are:
5.1 Class A
Fires which involve solid materials,
predominantly
of
an
organic
kind,
forming glowing embers. Examples are

wood, paper and coal. The extinguishing mode is by cooling and is achieved
by the use of water.
5.2 Class B
Fires, which involve liquids or liquefiable solids; they are further divided into:
a) Class B1 : which involve liquids soluble in water, for example methanol.

They can be extinguished by carbon dioxide, dry powder, water spray,
light water and vaporizing liquids.
b) Class B2 : which involve liquid which not soluble in water, such as petrol
and oil. They can be extinguished by foam, carbon dioxide, dry powder,
light water and vaporizing liquids.

All Right Reserved
355
5.3 Class C
Fires, which involve gases or liquefied gases resulting from leaks or spillage,
e.g. methane or butane. Extinguishments can be achieved by using foam or
dry powder in conjunction with water to cool any leaking container involved.
5.4 Class D
Fires, which involve metals such as aluminum or magnesium. Special dry
powder extinguishers are required to fight these., which may contained
powdered graphite or talc. No other extinguisher type should be used.
5.5 Electrical Fires

Fires, which involve the electricity supply to live equipment, can be dealt with
by extinguishing mediums such as carbon dioxide, dry powder or vaporizing
liquids but not water. Electricity is a cause of fire, not a category of fire.
Electrical fires have recently been removed from the traditional categories of
fire, for this reason.

6.1 Design & Planning Stage
The fire risk must be assessed during design stage as to ensure that fire risk
and potential for damage are properly assessed and kept to a minimum
during construction, and the finished building will comply with all statutory
requirements in respect of fire precautions.

All Right Reserved
356
6.2 Construction Stage

a) Site Fire Safety Plan
The employer must develop, establish, implement and maintain Site Fire
Safety Plan. The plan shall include but not limited to the name of the Site
Fire Safety Coordinator, general site fire precautions, hot work permit
system, site accommodation, fire escape and communication including an
evacuation emergency plan, emergency lighting and procedures for calling
BOMBA, fire drills and training as appropriate; etc.
b) Site Fire Safety Coordinator

The person appointed as Site Fire Safety Coordinator should have attended
and received appropriate and adequate training with respect to fire
precautions and emergency.
c) Emergency Procedures
Written emergency procedures must be displayed in prominent location and made available
to all personnel on site. The procedures should
include on the means of alerting the alarms, reporting procedures, etc.
d) Extinguishers, Hydrants & Other Fire Protection Equipment

Adequate numbers of suitable types of portable extinguishers
must be available throughout the site. Those extinguishers must
be located and maintained in such ways that they are easily and
readily accessible.

All Right Reserved
357
e) Site Security Against Arson

Where ever possible site boundary to be fenced and manned by security
guards. Implement site security pass system for all personnel and visitors.
Illumination of the site is an additional deterrent to unauthorized access
and is recommended where appropriate.
Where 24 hours security is provided, fire checks should be undertaken
throughout the night, during holiday periods and at weekends.
f) Temporary Buildings
Temporary buildings should be separated from building under construction
or refurbishment and other permanent building
Temporary building should be constructed with materials that do not
significantly contribute to growth of fire.
Cooking appliances in canteen and kitchen must be properly installed and
adequate ventilation provided. Cooking in living accommodation should be
prohibited.
g) Highly Flammable Liquids & Liquefied Petroleum Gases

Highly flammable liquids and liquefied petroleum gases should be stored
separately from other combustible materials. They should be stored in
open compounds, which are securely fenced and shaded from the sun.
Where applicable the amount of those material to be stored on site to be
kept at minimum.
Appropriately worded warning and cautions signs must be displayed at the

entrances to stores and adequate numbers of appropriate extinguishers
should be sited in the same vicinity.

All Right Reserved
358
h) Hot Work
Hot work includes welding and cutting, brazing and the use of blow-lamps,
soldering equipment, bitumen boilers and other equipment producing heat,
sparks or having naked flames should be controlled and monitored as to
ensure they will not constitute fire hazards on site. Where applicable establish, implement and maintain Permit-To-Work System.
i) Electricity Supplies
Electrical installations, both temporary and permanent must be installed in
accordance with relevant statutory requirements.
Where possible, main switches, other than controlling security lights,
should be turned off when work ceases and all electrical equipment
unplugged when not in use.
Only authorized competent person should carry out all electrical installation, connection and maintenance.
j) Material Storage & Housekeeping
As far as possible, combustible materials must be stored in a safe place
outside the building under construction. When they have o be store in the
building, areas where any hot work or other ignition hazard is present
should not be used and quantities should be kept to a minimum. Suitable
fire extinguishers should be readily to hand.
Good housekeeping is essential on all sites. Waste materials if allowed to
accumulate, provide an excellent starting point for fire. Therefore all
wastes, packing materials, wood, shavings and oily rags must be regularly
removed. All collected waste materials awaiting disposal must be kept in
an area away from temporary building, stores or equipment.
Debris and rubbish should not be burned on site.

All Right Reserved
359
k) Plant
Wherever possible internal combustion engines should be positioned in the
open air, away from working areas or other buildings. They should be sited so that exhaust pipes and exhaust gases are kept clear of
combustible materials.
Fuel tanks must not be filled whilst engines are running. Where
appropriate, sand trays should be provided to absorb drips of fuel or
lubricants.
Plant and equipment must be provided against accidental impact and
provided with suitable extinguishers.

a) Section 15(2)(d) Maintenance of Working Condition, Part IV General Duties of
Employers & Self Employed Persons, Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994.
b) Section 13 Provision Against Fire, Part II Safety, Health & Welfare, Factories
& Machinery Act 1967.
c) Reg. 16 Preventive Against Ignition, Factories & Machinery (Safety, Health &
Welfare), Regulations 1970.
d) Reg. 21 Safety Provisions In Case of Fire, Factories & Machinery (Safety, Health
& Welfare), Regulations 1970.
e) Reg. 22 Fire Fighting Appliances, Factories & Machinery (Safety, Health &
Welfare), Regulations 1970.
f) Fire Service Act 1975 and Regulations.
g) Section 12 Fire & Explosion, Code of Practice for Safety & Health At Work (MS
426 : 1994).

All Right Reserved
360

All Right Reserved
361
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The objective of the Personal Protective Equipment Program is to protect employees
from the risk of injury by creating a barrier against work place hazards. Personal
protective equipment is not a substitute for good engineering or administrative
controls or good work practices, but should be used in conjunction with these
controls to ensure safety and health of employees. Personal protective equipment
will be provided, used, worn and maintained when it has been determined that it use
and wear is required and that such will lessen the likelihood of occupational injury
and / or illness.
This program will address head, hand, feet, eyes and face protection only. For other
specialized equipment it shall be established and addressed separately.
It shall be the duty of every employer and self-employed person to provide

necessary personal protective equipment to his / her employees at no cost.
2.0 SELECTION
Prior to providing personal protective equipment to workers on site, a preliminary
identification of the hazards and risks involved should be carried out and workers
need to be consulted as to ensure the personal protective equipment provided are
suitable, comfortable and convenient to them.
To be suitable, the personal protective equipment must be:
assessed as appropriate both to the risk and work involved;

be selected by considering the duration of exposure i.e. the length of time it
needs to be worn and the need to see and hear;

All Right Reserved
362
be capable of fitting the wearer correctly;

be compatible with other personal protective equipment such as hearing
protection devices, etc.; and
of approved types.
3.0 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
All personal protective equipment must be examined in accordance with
manufacturers recommendation, by trained persons before being issued to and
worn/used by workers;
the wearer/user must inspect the personal protective equipment provided to

ensure its cleanliness and condition;
where appropriate maintenance program must include examination, testing and

record keeping; and
there must be arrangements for cleaning and disinfecting FOR equipment used
by more than one worker,
4.0 STORAGE
personal protective equipment issued, must be properly stored while not in use;
competent designated person must be appointed to take charge of items such as
safety belts, safety harness, respiratory protective equipment, etc.; and
contaminated equipment must be kept separately from other items.

All Right Reserved
363
5.0 TRAINING
As stipulated under Section 15(2)(c), Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994, every
employer and self-employed person must provide suitable and adequate information,
instruction, training and supervision to his / her employees with respect to safety
matters. Thus, it should include the personal protective equipment program, where it
should cover such matter as:
the nature of hazards the workers will be exposed to;

the source of the hazard;
the effects of exposure to the hazard;
the way in which the equipment functions;
the way in which the equipment must be worn;
any limitations of the equipment;
the way in which the equipment must be inspected, maintained and stored; and
the person to whom any defects or loss to be reported.
6.0 RECORD KEEPING
Written records shall be kept of issuance of equipment, the names of persons
trained, the type of training provided and the dates when the training conducted.

All Right Reserved
364
7.0 COMMONLY USED PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

7.1 Head Protection
Regulation 24 - Use of Safety Helmets, Part II General Provisions, Factories
& Machinery (Building Operations & Works of Engineering Construction)
(Safety), Regulations 1986; stipulated head protection is a must on construction site. Therefore all employers and self-employed persons must
ensure all his / her workers are provided with the head protective equipment.
The main purposes are to protect the workers from impact of falling object,
risk of bumping the head against existing object and risk of chemical drips or
splashes.
Head protection selected must be suitable, compatible with the work being
carried out and comfortable to the wearer.
Instruction must be given on the correct use and maintenance of equipment.

All Right Reserved
365
7.2 Foot Protection

Everyday accidents occur on construction sites
these include accidents resulting in both serious
and minor foot injuries. Many of these accidents
can be avoided by the wearing of suitable foot
protection.
All personnel on site must be encouraged to wear proper and suitable foot
protection and arrangements must be made for their issuance. In general
safety footwear must be shoes having built-in steel toe-caps and reinforced
soles. For work carried out in wet or muddy conditions at or below ground
level, rubber boots should be worn. Comfort is important and care should be
exercised with the selection as well as the fitting of the correct and most
suitable type of boot or shoe.
7.3 Eye Protection

Where and when workers are potentially exposed
to eye injuries while performing work they must be
provided with suitable eye protection. The hazards
may involve flying objects, dust, spark, ultra violet
radiation; and chemical splashes.
Selection of eye protector should be based on the level of protection

required, comfort with which they can be worn and ease of repair if
permitted.

All Right Reserved
366
Workers issued with such protection must be trained in the use, wear and
maintenance of the equipment.
7.4 Hand Protection

Suitable gloves must be worn
when hazards from chemicals,
cuts,
lacerations,
punctures,
burns,
abrasions,
biological,
and harmful temperature extremes are present. Glove selection must be

based on performance characteristics of the gloves, conditions, durations of
use, and hazards present. One type of glove will not work in all situations.
7.5 Hearing Protection

It is now known that continuous
exposure to noise from plant, tools
or construction work on the site, can
cause progressive and irreparable
damage to a persons hearing.
Ear protections are used to prevent the loss of hearing when workers would
otherwise be exposed to level of noise, which are considered to be hazardous.
The permissible exposure limit is 90dB(A) for a period of 8 hours.
The noise levels in any particular working environment must be determined

by measurement with dosimeters, but as a rough guide, if it is necessary to
shout over a distance of 1.0M or less in order to be heard, then the level is
excessive.

All Right Reserved
367
The selection of hearing protection devices must be based on the following

factors:
correctly fit the wearer;

compatibility with job requirement; and
not prejudice to the health of the wearer.
7.6 Fall Prevention Equipment
The main reason for the use of safety belts is to restrict
movement of workers as to avoid him from falling while
harnesses is to limit the distance for any fall and thereby
minimize the risk of injury. They will also facilitate the
rescue of persons working in confined spaces such as
manholes, etc.
Safety belts and harnesses provide valuable protection

but not as a substitute for proper working platform with
guardrails, toe-boards and safe means of access and egress.
In choosing a belt or harness for particular application, care should be taken

to ensure that it must give the user as far as compatible with safety,
maximum comfort, freedom of movement and in the event of a fall, every
possible protection to the body from the shock of sudden arrest.
A full harness gives greater protection than a safety belt in the event 0f fall
and therefore preferable; the use of lanyards fitted with shock absorbers is
also recommended.

All Right Reserved
368
7.7 Respiratory Protection

Whenever toxic materials, which
are liable to produce dust, gas
or vapors, are being used, or
are present in the working environment, there is a always a respiratory hazard. Ideally the contaminants
should be controlled at the source to minimize this hazard, but this is often
not possible.
If it is necessary to provide respiratory protective equipment, the first step is

to determine the characteristics of the environment as to facilitate the
selection of equipment type. The overall choice of equipment is wide. As the
wrong choice could seriously affect the health of the wearer or lead to asphyxiation, expert advice is essential, combined with training, information being given to the wearer. In addition cleaning and maintenance facilities for the
equipment must be provided to ensure continued effective protection.

All Right Reserved
369

a) Section 15, Part IV General Duties of Employers & Self-Employed Persons,
b) Section 24(1)(c), Part VI General Duties of Employees, Occupational Safety &
Health Act 1994.
c) Section 25 Duty Not To Interfere With Or Misuse Things Provided Pursuant To
Certain Provisions, Part VI General Duties of Employees, Occupational Safety &
Health Act 1994.
d) Section 26 Duty Not To Charge Employees For Things Done Or Provided, Part
VI General Duties of Employees, Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994.
e) Section 24 Personal Protective Clothing & Appliances, Part II Safety, Health &
Welfare, Factories & Machinery Act 1967.
f) Reg. 32 Working Clothes, Personal Protective Clothing & Appliance, Factories &
Machinery (Safety, Health & Welfare), Regulations 1970.
g) Reg. 13 Eye Protection, Part II General Provisions, Factories & Machinery
1986.
h) Reg. 14 Respirators, Part II General Provisions, Factories & Machinery
1986.
i) Reg. 15 Protective Apparel, Part II General Provisions, Factories & Machinery
1986.
j) Reg. 24 Use of Safety Helmets, Part II General Provisions, Factories &
Machinery (Building Operations & Works of Engineering Construction) (Safety),
Regulations 1986.
k) Section 14 Personal Protective Equipment, Code of Practice for Safety & Health
At Work (MS 426 : 1994).

All Right Reserved
370

All Right Reserved
371
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The purpose of a system of safety colors and signs is to draw attention to objects
and situations, which affect, or could affect, health or safety. Unfortunately, safety
signs on most of construction sites come in a variety of colors and symbols. Some
even could not be understood and interpreted. Thus it beats the actual purpose of
having safety signs. Therefore there must be a standard colors and symbols to make
them understandable and effective. But, we have to bear in mind that the use of a
system of safety colors and signs alone does not replace the need for other
appropriate preventive measures.
2.0 STANDARD COLOR AND DESIGN

2.1 Definitions
a) Safety Color
A color to which a specific safety or health meaning or purpose is

assigned.
b) Contrasting Color
A color that contrasts with the safety color in order to make the latter
more conspicuous.
c) Symbols
A pictorial representation used on a safety or health sign.

All Right Reserved
372
d) Safety Signs
A sign that gives a massage about safety and health by a combination of

geometric form, safety color and symbol or text, or both.
e) Prohibition Signs
A safety sign that indicates that certain behavior is prohibited.
f) Warning Signs
A safety sign that gives warning of a hazard.
g) Mandatory Signs
A safety sign that indicates that a specific course of action is to be taken.
h) Safe Condition Signs
A safety sign that provides information about safe condition.
i) Supplementary Signs
A sign with text only that may be used in conjunction with a safety signs in
order to provide additional information.

All Right Reserved
373
2.2 Safety Colors and Contrasting Colors

a) General
The safety colors which shall be used and the meanings which shall be
assigned to them as in Table below.
* Red is used to identify fire fighting equipment and its location.
b) Danger Identification
If identification is required of places where there is risk of collision, falling,
stumbling, falling objects or where there are steps, holes in floor or similar
hazards; the following combination of fluorescent orange-red* or safety
color yellow in either black case.

All Right Reserved
374
This color provides high conspicuity, especially in conditions of poor natural lighting
3.0 SAMPLES OF SAFETY SIGNS

3.1
Prohibition Signs

All Right Reserved
375
3.2 Warning Signs
3.3 Mandatory Signs

All Right Reserved
376
3.4 Safe Conditions Signs
3.5 Supplementary Signs

All Right Reserved
377


All Right Reserved
378

All Right Reserved
379

All Right Reserved
380
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The Occupational Safety & Health Act 1994 requires employers and self-employed
persons to:
Provide and maintain plant and safe systems of work that are safe and risk free.
Make arrangements for ensuring safety and health in connection with the use or
operation, handling, storage and transportation of plants and substances.
Provide information, instruction, training and supervision to ensure employees

perform their work in a safe manner and without risk to health.
Maintain a place of work that is safe and without risks to health including means
of access and aggress.
To provide and maintain a working environment that is safe and without risks to
health with adequate health and welfare facilities.
Penalty for failure to comply is RM50,000.00 or TWO YEARS IMPRISONMENT or

BOTH.
2.0 WASHING FACILITIES

In pursuant to Section 25(1)(a) and (b) of Factories and Machinery Act 1967, there
should be provided for the use of the persons employed on the construction work
adequate and suitable facilities for washing.
The facilities should include at least one wash hand basin of ample size for every
twenty workers, clean water suitable cleansing and towels or other means of drying
agents in any of the following cases:

All Right Reserved
381
where workers are exposed to skin contamination from poisonous, infectious,

irritating, or sensitizing substances;
where workers are handling materials that are difficult to wash from the skin with
cold water;
where workers are performing work in offensive trades;

where workers have to clean the whole body; or
where, due to any of the circumstances mentioned above or where, because a
worker has suffered prolonged exposure to excessive heat or cold or is employed
for prolonged periods in unusually wet conditions, it is necessary for the worker
to cleanse the whole of the body, an adequate number of showers should be
provided.
The floors at all washing facilities should be made of impervious material and
properly graded for effective drainage.
3.0 SANITARY CONVENIENCE

Suitable and sufficient conveniences are to be provided for the exclusive use of the
males engaged or employed in about the place of work, and for the exclusive use of
the females so employed in or about a place of work.
Sanitary conveniences should be as the following:

All Right Reserved
382
Where conveniences for each sex are provided they shall be separated by walls of
full height.
They should be readily accessible, well-lit and ventilated, and protected from the
weather. If situated outside, good footpath access with lighting should be provided.
They should be constructed and situated in such a way as to ensure privacy for
persons using them, and built of materials that can be easily cleaned.
4.0 DRINKING WATER

An adequate supply of wholesome drinking water should be provided to all persons
on the construction work in accordance with the following conditions:
It should be readily accessible to all persons engaged in the work and clearly labeled
as drinking water. A common drinking container should not be used. If it is stored in
a container, the container:
should be clean and protected from contamination and from heat; and
should be emptied and refilled daily from a wholesome source.
5.0 FIRST AID FACILITIES
Every employer is required to provide adequate first-aid facilities, appliances and requisites.
Normally, first-aid is to prevent the condition of the injured person from becoming
worse until more skilled help becomes available.
Detail requirements will be discussed under Part 5DFirst Aid Management.

All Right Reserved
383
6.0
CANTEEN / MEAL ROOM

Adequate accommodation should be provided in which employees may take their
meals, spend their rest periods, and shelter from bad weather.
Any such accommodation should have a suitable floor, be furnished with suitable
seats and tables, and other furniture and equipment as to ensure that meals may be
taken with reasonable comfort and security from the weather.
A suitable receptacle with a tightly fitting cover should be provided for rubbish, and it
should be emptied and cleaned at suitable intervals.
Provision should made for boiling water at mealtimes and rest periods.
7.0 TEMPORARY ACCOMMODATION

If the need arise for workers to stay on site, temporary living accommodation must
be provided. The provision of such facilities must comply with the local authorities
requirements and approval. Basically the accommodation must be:
able to protect the occupants from weather;

located at strategic location separated from work areas;
provided with basic amenities such as for resting and sleeping, fire extinguishers,
first aid, sanitary convenience, etc.;
provided with separate common cooking facilities, cooking in sleeping quarters

must not be permitted;
provided with adequate supply of water for drinking, cooking and washing;
provided with regular pest control programs.

All Right Reserved
384
8.0 LIGHTING
Poor light can be a major contributor to accidents, and employers must ensure that
adequate lighting is provided. Generally, natural light is preferred, but where this is
not practicable, suitable and sufficient artificial lighting must be provided.
Lighting should be provided over the entire place of work including amenity
rooms, passages, stairs, ramps, ladders and gangways, which all should be capable
of being lit at such times as people pass along them or use them.
People passing need not be employees, and may include other persons lawfully in the
vicinity.
Adequate local lighting needs to be provided for detailed work, for dangerous
processes, or where machinery is being used.
Adequate emergency lighting should also be provided.
9.0 PEST CONTROL

To prevent infestation of rodents, vermin and other disease bearing insects at the
work place, necessary provisions must be made to get the service of competent
service provider. The control program must be conducted on regular basis.
Beside that good housekeeping practices must be enforced, enhanced and

monitored.

All Right Reserved
385
10.0 VENTILATION
All work sites should have an adequate supply of fresh air. This is not normally a
problem on construction work where it is carried on outdoors. However, there are
occasions when a supplementary supply of air has to be provided to ensure safe
working conditions.
Excessively dusty conditions, such as concrete cutting or grinding, the use of volatile
chemicals, such as adhesives, or sand blasting are examples of when extra
ventilation will be necessary. This can be supplied by portable extraction equipment.
Where this is not practicable, workers should be supplied with personal protective
equipment such as respirators and suitable eye protection.
Care must be taken when using extraction equipment to ensure that hazardous
fumes are not vented into other work areas or sources of ignition.
In some situations it may be appropriate to provide portable extraction equipment

and personal protective equipment, and ensure it is worn by employees.

All Right Reserved
386

a) Section 15(2)(e) Maintenance of Working Environment Including Welfare
Facilities, Part IV General Duties of Employers and Self-Employed Persons,
b) Section 22 Provisions Relating To Health, Factories & Machinery Act 1967.
c) Section 23 Exposure to Elements, Factories & Machinery Act 1967.
d) Section 25 Provisions Relating To Welfare, Factories & Machinery Act 1967.
e) Factories & Machinery (Safety, Health & Welfare) Regulations 1970.
f) Section 7 Occupational Health Services, Code of Practice for Safety & Health At
Work (MS 426 : 1994).
g) Section 8 Workplaces & The Working Environment, Code of Practice for Safety
& Health At Work (MS 426 : 1994).

All Right Reserved
387

All Right Reserved
388
1.0 INTRODUCTION
More and more work today is being done by machines. This increase in
mechanization and automation often speeds up the pace of work and at times can
make work less interesting. On the other hand, there are still many jobs in the
construction sector that must be done manually, involving heavy physical strain. One
of the results of manual work, as well as the increase in mechanization, is that more
and more workers are suffering from backaches, neckaches, sore wrists, arms and
legs, and eyestrain.
Ergonomics is the study of work in relation to the environment in which it is

performed (the workplace) and those who perform it (workers). The word
"Ergonomics" comes from two Greek words "ergon," meaning work, and "nomos"
meaning "laws." It is used to determine how the workplace can be designed or
adapted to the worker in order to prevent a variety of health problems and to
increase efficiency; in other words, to make the job fit the worker, instead of forcing
the worker to conform to the job. One simple example is raising the height of a work
table so that the worker does not have to bend down unnecessarily to reach his or
her work. A specialist in ergonomics, called an ergonomist, studies the relation between the worker, the workplace and the job design.
2.0 ERGONOMICS INJURIES

Most injuries in construction workers are sprains and strains of the muscles.
Construction work can also cause injuries to the joints, bones, and nerves. These
injuries often occur from constant wear and tear on the body. Taken together these
injuries are called musculoskeletal disorders. Generally, musculoskeletal disorders in
construction workers affect the hand and wrist, the shoulders, neck and upper back,
the low back, and the hips and knees.

All Right Reserved
389
There are a number of well-known diagnoses of musculoskeletal disorders. They

include:
Carpal Tunnel Syndrome, a problem of the nerve in the hand and wrist,
caused by repeated bending of the wrist, holding tools or materials tightly,
constantly
pressing the wrist against a hard object. Classic symptoms
include: numbness, tingling, burning and pain. In severe cases, there may be
wasting of the muscles at the base of the thumb; dry shiny palm; clumsiness of
the hand.
Raynauds Syndrome or White Finger Disease, a problem of the nerves and

blood vessels in the hands often caused by use of vibrating hand tools. Workers
have numbness and tingling of the fingers, often brought on by cold weather.
Fingers turn pale white, then blue and then red. Numbness and weakness
prevent a good grip and interfere with the ability to work. Smoking can aggravate
this condition by decreasing oxygen available to the fingers.
Tendinitis, an inflammation and soreness in tendons, caused by repeated

movement of a joint. Depending on where the injury occurs, a different name is
assigned to the disease. Common tendinitis problems include : Tenosynovitis
(usually in the wrist), Trigger finger (palm side of any finger other than the
thumb), De Quervains Disease (tendons in the thumb), Epicondylitis (tennis
elbow). Symptoms include a burning pain or dull ache, swelling or puffiness,
snapping or jerking movements (crepitus), Ganglionic cysts (a thick mucuous fluid which can form within a tendon sheath). Tendonitis is associated with work
that requires repetitive motions like using a staple gun (asbestos abatement
workers), rotating or twisting motions (screw driving). Tools that are tool small or
too large for the hand can also put stress on the tendons.

All Right Reserved
390
Thoracic Outlet Syndrome, a problem caused by reduced blood flow in the

shoulder and arm caused by overhead work or carrying heavy items in the hands
with the arms straight down.
Carpet Layers Knee, caused by repeated use of a knee kickers while laying
carpeting.
Back Pain, caused by repeated lifting of materials, by sudden movements,

whole body vibration, lifting and twisting at the same time, bending over for long
periods of time. Back problems, which seem to appear overnight, may have been
building up slowly over a period of time.
Degenerative disc disease is caused by damage to the gel-like cushions

between the spinal vertebrae or bones. Released gel presses on the nerve.
Symptoms of this disorder include numbness, pain and weakness, usually in the
leg and hips, but sometimes in the arms and upper back.
Of course there are many other types of musculoskeletal injuries and problems,
including strains and sprains, muscle and joint pains, broken bones, etc., which may
be related to work on the construction site. A sprain is an injury or tear to a ligament. Ligaments attach one vertebrae to another and help support the spine.
Strains is an injury to muscles that have been stretched or used too much.
Strained muscles and sprained ligaments both irritate the muscles around them. This
adds to the pain and discomfort.
Construction activities which could cause ergonomics injuries may but not limited to
the following:

All Right Reserved
391
2.1 Excavation Work

Excavation work exposes equipment operators to whole body vibration from
earthmoving equipment and ergonomic problems from poor seat and cab
design. Workers must often work in awkward postures, e.g. in trenches. Soil
tampers produce high levels of hand arm vibration when compacting soil.
2.2 Masonry Work

Masonry work requires a lot of heavy lifting and carrying of masonry blocks
and grout and constant stooping to pick up materials.
2.3 Concrete Work

Concrete formwork presents a risk of back injury from the use of heavy saws
that are poorly balanced, digging of ditches and footers, driving stakes with
sledge hammers, use of saw horses that are too tall or short, and carrying,
setting and stripping of forms. Power tools may also present a risk of injury
from vibration.
2.4 Structural Steel

Structural steel work requires many awkward postures (e.g., welding),
repetitive motions (e.g., welding), and use of pneumatic tools (for bolting).
Crane operators are also exposed to whole body vibration.

All Right Reserved
392
2.5 Concrete Floor Work

Concrete floor work requires a lot of bending to work at floor level which is
harmful to the back. Workers must bend to tie steel rebar together. Back injuries may occur while pumping concrete with an elephant trunk hose, raking it
into place and smoothing it with a straight edge (which requires work in a
bent over posture). Trowelling the edges has to be done bent over. Vibrating
the concrete into walls and edges exposes workers to hand arm vibration. Mechanical finishing of the floor may pose a vibration hazard and can require
great force at times.
Removal of set concrete with a chipping hammer exposes workers to

considerable hand arm vibration, which can damage the nerves in the hands.
It can also cause back strain from the weight and design of the tool.
2.6 Spray Fireproofing

Spray fireproofing exposes the sprayer to noise and vibration as well as
mineral wool while he/she is holding the sprayer all day aimed at the ceiling
and girders. Bystanders are also exposed.

All Right Reserved
393
2.7 Sheet Metal Work

Sheet Metal Work is primarily done overhead putting considerable stress on
the arms, shoulders and neck. They also use powder-actuated tools to shoot
straps into the ceiling to hold the ductwork. These tools can produce hand
arm stress from constant use and from the recoil. Application of metal trim
requires work at floor level on hands and knees.
2.8 Plumbing
Plumbing for a new building involves a lot of welding and pipe fitting in
cramped positions and considerable work overhead (e.g. for sprinkler fitters).
Welding has also been associated with wrist injuries due to the poor design of
the welding guns.
2.9 Electrical Work

Electrical work requires the use of a lot of hand tools that are not
ergonomically designed, such as pliers and screwdrivers, which can lead to
wrist injuries. Manual cable pulling also places strain on the back.
2.10 Elevator Construction

Elevator construction requires many awkward postures while working in a
narrow vertical shaft with heavy materials and hoisting materials from the
edge of the shaft.

All Right Reserved
394
2.11 Roofing
Roofing presents a risk of back injuries because of the heavy materials used,
such as buckets of hot tar and single ply roofing, and force used by the kettle
operator to break up tubes of asphalt to put into the kettle.
2.12 Building Exteriors

Building exteriors require a lot of work on scaffolds and may require lifting
and fastening heavy materials on the side of the building. This can present a
back injury and wrist injury risk. Sand blasting of exterior walls exposes the
blaster to vibration and the feeder to risk of back injuries from loading sand
into the hopper. Installing windows can injure your back due to the weight of
the windows. Inserting caulking for the windows can place stress on the hand
and wrist. Exterior surface finishes are sometimes trowelled on which requires
a lot of repetitive hand and wrist motion, as well as bending to get materials.
2.13 Scaffold Erection

Scaffold erection is very hard on the back and shoulders because heavy
materials must be hoisted overhead manually. Receiving and balancing heavy
materials while precariously balanced on a scaffold places a strain on the
back.

All Right Reserved
395
2.14 Drywall Installation

Drywall installation begins with shooting metal plates into the ceiling, which
means a lot of overhead work. Cutting the drywall to size involves stress on
the hands since the knives are not ergonomically designed. Drywall sheets
may be as large as 1.2M by 3.6M so moving them into place presents a risk
for back injuries. Fastening them requires the use of screw guns with a bent
wrist. Some drywall is placed overhead which is very stressful on the arms,
shoulders and back. Taping of the joints is often done on stilts, which places
great stress on the knees. Taping requires a lot of repetitive wrist movement
in awkward positions and work over shoulder height. Sanding the joints is
stressful to the back, arms and wrist.
2.15 Painting
Painting also places stress on the arms, shoulders, neck and back by the use
of long handled rollers overhead and at unusual angles, similar to drywall
sanding. Carrying paint materials, such as buckets of paint, can be stressful
on the hands, because of poorly designed handles.
2.16 Installation of the Suspended Ceiling

Installation of the suspended ceiling also requires a lot of
overhead work and use of hand tools that place stress on
the hands and wrist

All Right Reserved
396
2.17 Flooring Installation

Flooring installation requires spending most of the time in a kneeling position
and bent over. Carpet installation using a knee kicker is very injurious to the
knees. Moving large rolls of carpet can also place you at risk of back injuries.
Tile and terrazzo workers have similar problems, but also place great stress
on their wrist and hands during trowelling.
2.18 Trim Work

Trim work means installation of floor moldings, doors, etc. Much of this work
is done at floor or ceiling level. Door hanging is very stressful to the back,
because of heavy doors must be carefully manipulated into place.

All Right Reserved
397
3.0 SOURCES OF HAZARDS

3.1 Repetitive or sustained application of force
Repetitive
application
of
force
means using force repeatedly over a

period of time to move or support
an object. For example:
lifting and stacking goods onto a

pallet;
gripping and handling bricks

when bricklaying;
using a nailgun to fix palings to a fence;

pressing a pedal or button to operate a power press; and
typing and other keyboard tasks.
Sustained application of force occurs when force is applied continually over a
period of time. For example:
pushing or pulling a trolley;

holding down a trigger to operate a
power tool;
supporting a plaster sheet while fixing it to a ceiling; and
continuing to hold a tool when not

using it.

All Right Reserved
398
3.2 Repetitive or sustained awkward posture

An awkward posture is one in which any part of the body is in an
uncomfortable or unnatural position. Repetitive awkward postures include:
reaching sideways to pick up goods from a conveyor belt and pack them
picking up items from a conveyor belt
and turning them over for inspection and
packing
Sustained awkward postures include:
crouching to service plant or a vehicle;

lying underneath a vehicle and reaching upwards to service it;
kneeling while toweling concrete or laying carpet; and
continually standing while operating a power press with foot pedal
controls.
3.3 Repetitive or sustained movement

Repetitive or sustained movement means using the same parts of the body to
repeat similar movements over a period of time. Examples of tasks involving
repetitive or sustained movement include:
Painting;
lifting goods from a conveyor
belt and packing them in a
carton; and
using a socket and ratchet or

spanner to unscrew long bolts.

All Right Reserved
399
3.4 Application of high force

Application of high force occurs in any task that either most people, or the
employees likely to do the task, would find difficult because of the effort it
requires. For example:
lifting or carrying a heavy object;

pushing or pulling an object that is hard to move;
operating tools with squeeze grips that are too far apart;
throwing or catching objects; and
lifting a heavy item from a high shelf.
3.5 Tools
Hand and power tools are widely used in construction work. Those tools due
to its design and improper used may posed ergonomics hazards to the users.
a) Forceful Muscle Effort
The type of grip you use also makes a difference in the amount of effort you
have to use. A pinch grip which uses only the fingers to hold an item,
requires more muscle effort than a power grip. A power grip (full-hand grip),
which uses the larger muscles of your arm, has about four times the strength
of a pinch grip. A pinch grip can cause fatigue and injury.
A slippery handle or a handle with a small diameter is hard to hold, so you

tend to grip it more tightly (apply more force). When your hands and fingers
are cold, you grip tools more tightly to control them.

All Right Reserved
400
b) Repetitive Work
Nailing a deck and screwing drywall are examples of repetitive tasks. Doing
the same motions over and over again puts stress on muscles, tendons
and joints.
c) Vibration
Damage to the blood vessels and nerves in your hand and fingers can result from the long term use of powered hand tools. Rotary hammers,
chainsaws, grinders and jackhammers all cause vibrations to travel
through the hand. The risk of conditions, such as Raynauds Syndrome,
from powered hand tools is increased if you are also exposed to cold, because the cold causes you to use a much tighter grip on the tool.
d) Contact Stress
Tools and materials (wood, metal) can press against the soft part of the
palm of your hand or other soft tissues of your body. When tools or sharp
edges press into the palm of your hand, they can press on or compress
the soft blood vessels and nerves in your hand. When blood vessels are
compressed, the amount of blood that gets through to the tissues is reduced. Compressed nerves can cause numbness and tingling. Continuous
compression may cause irreversible damage to the blood vessels, nerves
and surrounding tissue.

All Right Reserved
401
3.6 Vibration
Vibration exposure is possible in many occupation where a worker comes in
contact with vibrating machinery or equipment. When a worker operates hand
-held equipment such as chainsaw or jackhammer, vibration effects hands
and arms and is called hand-arm vibration exposure. When a
work-
ers sits or stands on a vibrating floor or seat, the exposure affects almost the
entire body and is called whole-body vibration exposure. The risk of injury depends on the intensity and frequency of the vibration, the duration of exposure and the part of the body receives the vibration energy.
Hand-arm vibration causes damage to blood vessels and nerves in fingers.

The resulting condition is known as white finger disease. The affected fingers
turn white, especially when exposed to cold. Vibration induced white finger
disease also causes a loss of grip force and reduced sensitivity to touch.
The effect of whole-body vibration is poorly understood. Studies of drivers of

heavy vehicles have revealed an increased incidence of the disorder of bowel
and the circulatory, musculoskeletal and neurological systems.

All Right Reserved
402
3.7 Noise
Not all sound is noise noise is sound that people do not like. Noise can be
annoying and it can interfere with your ability to work by causing stress and
disturbing your concentration. Noise can cause accidents by interfering with
communication and warning signals. Noise can cause chronic health
problems. Noise can also cause you to lose your hearing.
Hearing loss from exposure to noise in the workplace is one of the most
common of all industrial diseases. Workers can be exposed to high noise
levels in workplaces as varied as construction industries, foundries and textile
industries. Short-term exposure to excessive (too much) noise can cause
temporary hearing loss, lasting from a few seconds to a few days. Exposure
to noise over a long period of time can cause permanent hearing loss.
Hearing loss that occurs over time is not always easy to recognize and
unfortunately, most workers do not realize they are going deaf until their
hearing is permanently damaged. Industrial noise exposure can be controlled
often for minimal costs and without technical difficulty. The goal in
controlling industrial noise is to eliminate or reduce the noise at the source
producing it.
In addition to hearing loss, exposure to noise in the workplace can cause a
variety of other problems, including chronic health problems:
Exposure to noise over a long period of time decreases coordination and

concentration. This increases the chance of accidents happening.
Noise increases stress, which can lead to a number of health problems,

including heart, stomach and nervous disorders. Noise is suspected of
being one of the causes of heart disease and stomach ulcers.
Workers exposed to noise may complain of nervousness, sleeping

problems and fatigue (feeling tired all the time).
Excessive exposure to noise can also reduce job performance and may
cause high rates of absenteeism.
All Right Reserved
403
Sounds have different intensities (loudness). For example, if you shout at

someone instead of whispering, your voice has more energy and can travel a
great distance, therefore it has more intensity (loudness). Intensity is measured in units which are calls decibels (dB) or dB(A). The decibel scale is not
a typical scale it is a logarithmic scale. Basically this means that a small
increase in the decibel level is, in reality, a big increase in the noise
level.
Decibel levels of common sound

All Right Reserved
404
3.8 Manual Handling

Manual handling refers to lifting, lowering, carrying, pushing, pulling, or any
other applications of force by a person. Manual handling related problems can
cause a variety of conditions, whilst subjecting the human spine and other
joints to sudden physical loads or prolonged physical efforts with lower
weights.
It is fairly fair to say that every worker who lifts or does other manual handling tasks is at some risk for musculoskeletal injury. Low back injury is the
most likely kind of injury.
Lifting is a forceful movement requiring energy and muscle effort. It stresses

muscles, tendons and ligaments and increases forces on your spine. If you
bend from the waist and lift at the same time, the forces on your spine are
increased even more. This is also true if you reach, twist or hold the object
away from you body as you lift. Using one arm to lift an object or carrying and
object on one shoulder or one hip also places extra (and uneven) stress on
the spine.
3.9 Lighting
Besides causing eye strain, poor lighting can make employees adopt awkward
postures and movements in order to do their work. For example, to see
scratches and other imperfections on painted panels, an employee must bend
down and twist his or her head to look at the panels side-on.

All Right Reserved
405

A risk management approach (hazard identification, risk assessment and control)
shall be adopted with regard to the management of ergonomics hazards at the
workplace.
4.1 General Precautions

In order to control workplace ergonomics problems the following should be
considered:

All Right Reserved
406
a) Preparation Prior to Commencing Work
Just as a runner prepares for a race event by warming up, prepare for
work by up and stretching. Warm up by walking, marching in-place, or
moving arms in circles. Once muscles are warm:
Stretch SLOWLY and hold each stretch 3.5 seconds.

Stretch a few minutes before and during workday.
Caution : Check with doctor before exercising. If feel discomfort while exercising stop immediately.

All Right Reserved
407
b) Be Aware
If experiencing symptoms, change the way task being performed or tools

being used. Otherwise symptoms may get worse.
There might be problems, if any of these symptoms are felt:
Constant fatigue.
Cold Hands.
Swelling.
Numbness.
Tingling.
Lack of Energy.
Change in skin color.
Weakness.
Loss of sensation.
Aching, burning or shooting pain.
The symptoms could be experienced or felt at the back, neck, hands, fingers, shoulders, arms and knees.
c) Noise
An effective way to measure the noise in your workplace is with a sound

meter. Unfortunately, it can be difficult to get the meters and the trained
personnel to use them.

All Right Reserved
408
Simple method for assessing noise exposure

Stand at arm's length from a co-worker. If you
cannot speak in a normal tone and have to shout
to communicate, then the noise level in your
workplace is too high and should be reduced!
Safe Noise Levels

A safe level of noise basically depends on two things: (1) the level
(volume) of the noise; and (2) how long you are exposed to the noise.
The level of noise allowed by most countries' noise standards is
generally 85-90 dB over an eight-hour workday.
Exposure to higher noise levels may be allowed for periods of less than
eight hours of exposure time. For example, workers should not be
exposed to noise levels above 95 dB for more than four hours per day.
Exposed workers should be provided with ear protection while exposed
at this level and rotated out of the noise areas after four hours of
continuous work. Of course before using ear protection and rotation
every effort should be made to reduce noise using engineering
controls.
The eight-hour per day exposure limit found in a noise standard is the
total amount of noise that a worker may be exposed to over an eighthour period. The exposure may be from continuous (constant) noise,
or from intermittent noise (noise that is periodic at regular intervals
but not continuous). Therefore, you must add up the levels of noise
you are exposed to throughout the day and see if they exceed 85-90
dB. Note: workers should never be exposed to more than 140 dB of
impulse noise (usually a very loud noise that occurs only once) at any
time.
All Right Reserved
409
Methods of Noise Control

Workplace noise can be controlled: (1) at the source; (2) through the
use of barriers; and (3) at the worker.
At the Source
As with other types of exposures, the best method of prevention is
to eliminate the hazard. Therefore controlling noise at its source is
the best method of noise control. It can also often be cheaper than
other methods of noise control. This method of control may require
that some noisy machinery be replaced. Noise can be controlled at
the source by the manufacturer, so that noisy devices never reach
your workplace. Many machines are now required to conform to
noise standards. Therefore before new machines (such as presses,
drills, etc.) are purchased, checks should be made to see that they
conform to noise standards. Unfortunately, many used machines
producing high noise levels (which have been replaced with quieter
models) are often exported to developing countries, causing
workers to pay the price with hearing loss, stress, etc.
Noise control at the source can also be engineered into an existing
device by making adjustments to parts or a whole machine that
reduce noise. For example, the noise level from a pneumatic drill
can be reduced by placing a sound-reducing blanket around the
drill. A length of tubing on the exhaust of the drill will also reduce
the noise level. A rubber covering can be used to reduce noise from
metal falling on to metal.

All Right Reserved
410
Other engineering methods to reduce noise include:
preventing or reducing impact between machine parts;

reducing speeds gently between forward and reverse movements;
replacing metal parts with quieter plastic parts;
enclosing particularly noisy machine parts;
providing mufflers for the air outlets of pneumatic valves;
changing the type of pump in hydraulic systems;
changing to quieter types of fans or placing mufflers in the ducts of
ventilation systems;
providing mufflers for electric motors;

providing mufflers for intakes of air compressors.
Regular maintenance, lubrication and replacement of worn or
defective parts can also be effective ways to reduce noise levels. Noise
from the way materials are handled can be reduced by measures such
as:
reducing the dropping height of goods being collected in bins and boxes;
increasing the rigidity of containers receiving impact from goods, or

damping them with damping materials;
using soft rubber or plastic to receive hard impacts;

reducing the speed of conveyor systems;
using belt conveyors rather than the roller type.
A machine vibrating on a hard floor is a common source of noise. Mounting

vibrating machines on rubber mats or other damping material will reduce
the noise problem.
All Right Reserved
411
Barrier
If it is not possible to control the noise at the source, then it may be
necessary to enclose the machine, place sound-reducing barriers
between the source and the worker, or increase the distance
between the worker and the source. (However, this can be difficult in
many cases.) The following chart is a simple method of knowing how
much sound is reduced by distance.
Here are a few points to remember when controlling noise with
barriers:
an enclosure should not be in contact with any part of the machine;
holes in the enclosure should be minimized;
access doors and holes for wiring and piping should be fitted with
rubber gaskets;
panels of insulating enclosures must be covered inside with

sound-absorbent material;
exhausts and air vents must be silenced and directed away from
operators;
the noise source should be separated from other work areas;
the noise should be deflected away from work areas with a

sound-insulating or reflecting barrier;
sound-absorbent materials should be used, if possible, on walls,

floors and ceilings.

All Right Reserved
412
At the Worker
Controlling noise at the worker, by using ear protection (sometimes
called hearing protection) is, unfortunately, the most common yet least
effective form of noise control. Forcing the worker to adapt to the
workplace is always the least desirable form of protection from any
hazard. Generally there are two types of ear protection: earplugs and
earmuffs. Both are designed to prevent excessive noise from reaching
the inner ear.
Earplugs are worn inside the ear and come in a variety of materials,
including rubber, plastic, or any material that will fit tightly in the ear.
Earplugs are the least desirable type of hearing protection because
they do not provide very effective protection against noise and they
can cause ear infection if pieces of the plug are left in the ear or if a
dirty plug is used. Cotton wool should not be used as ear protection.
Earmuffs are more protective than earplugs if they are used correctly.
They are worn over the whole ear and protect the ear from noise. Earmuffs are less efficient if they do not fit tightly or if glasses are worn
with them.
Ear protection is the least acceptable method of controlling an occupational noise problem because:
the noise is still present: it has not been reduced;
in hot, humid conditions workers often prefer earplugs (which are

less effective) because earmuffs make the ears sweaty and
uncomfortable;

All Right Reserved
413
management does not always provide the correct type of ear

protection: often it is a case of the cheaper the better;
workers cannot communicate with each other and cannot hear

warning signals;
if ear protection is provided instead of controlling the noise at

source, then management is putting the responsibility on the worker it becomes the worker's fault if he or she becomes deaf.
c) Vibration
To eliminate or reduce exposure to vibration:
adjust any existing vibration damping mechanisms in mobile plant and

vehicles;
install a vibration isolating seat in plant such as cranes or tractors;

replace or modify powered hand-tools that expose employees to
hand-arm vibration;
when purchasing plant such as mobile powered plant or power tools,

choose plant that operates with minimum vibration;
make sure that plant and tools are serviced regularly; and
provide gloves to keep hands warm and dry if the work is done in cold,
wet conditions (this will help reduce the risk of vibration-induced
Musculoskeletal Disorders , which increases in cold, wet conditions, but
will not protect against vibration as such).
If the vibration itself cant be eliminated or reduced, minimize your

employees exposure to it by decreasing the time they spend using
vibrating plant and tools. Use job rotation, or do the task in a different way
that reduces vibration exposure. If exposure cant be reduced, its better if
it occurs intermittently during a shift rather than in one continual block.

All Right Reserved
414
d) Manual Handling
Proper lifting technique is critical to back safety, but perhaps more
important is proper planning.
Before you lift that box, or tool, or piece of equipment, take a moment to
consider your action:
Do you need to lift the item manually?

How heavy is it?
Where are you moving the item from?
Where does it have to go?
What route do you have to follow?

All Right Reserved
415
e) Lighting
To improve lighting and visibility:
provide additional lighting, such as a lamp on a movable arm

improve the layout of existing lights by lowering or raising them or
changing their position in the work area
increase or decrease the number of lights

change the diffusers or reflectors on existing lights
change the lights to improve light levels or improve color perception
change what is being looked at for example, bring it closer to the
eye, or change its orientation or position to avoid shadows, glare or
reflections
clean lights and light fittings regularly

use screens, visors, shields, hoods, curtains, blinds or external louvers
to reduce reflections, shadows and glare
The eyesight of employees also needs to be considered. Its important that

employees wear glasses if they need to, and that they have the right
glasses for their work.

All Right Reserved
416

b) Factories and Machinery (Noise Exposure) Regulations 1989.

All Right Reserved
417

All Right Reserved
418
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Occupational health hazards are extremely varied and have been part of industry for
centuries. The earliest recorded occupational disease was lead poisoning, identified
during mining of lead over 2,000 years ago.
Today, employees are becoming much more concerned about how their work may
affect their health. This increased awareness combined with greater research has
meant that more workplace health hazards are being identified, evaluated and controlled in construction.
2.0 WHAT ARE THE HEALTH HAZARDS?

Health hazards in construction can be classified into three main categories chemical, physical and biological.
e.g. of chemical hazards - chlorinated solvents, paints, asbestos, silica, coal

tar, isocyanates and mercury.
e.g. physical hazards - ionizing radiation (x-rays and gamma rays), nonionizing radiation (infrared and ultraviolet, lighting, noise, vibration and heat.
e.g. biological hazardsbacteria, fungi and viruses.

2.1 Chemical Hazards
Various chemicals are used in construction. Whether it is chlorinated solvent for degreasing, zinc chromate based paints for anti-corrosion coating,
silica sand for abrasive blasting or an epoxy resin for injecting into concrete, all are classified as chemical hazards.

All Right Reserved
419
Chemical hazards further can be sub-divided into a number of groups

based upon their physical state, for example liquid, gas and solid.
a) Gas
A gas is a low density chemical compound which normally fills the

space in which it is released. It has no physical shape or form. It may
be visible such as green chlorine gas, or invisible such as argon gas. It
may have strong odor such as the rotten egg smell of hydrogen
sulphide, or be odorless like carbon monoxide. A gas may be used as
part of the work procedure, such as acetylene in flame cutting, or be
produced as a result of the work such as ozone in welding. Gases vary
in density and this affects how they may be distributed in the
workplace. Methane is lighter than air and will rise. Carbon monoxide is
approximately the same weight as air and will be evenly distributed.
Hydrogen sulphide is heavier than air and will tend to collect in
low-lying places.
b) Liquid
A liquid is formless fluid. Many liquids are used in construction. Some

examples are acids, organic solvents such as xylene and toluene and
trichlorinated solvents such as trichloroethane.

All Right Reserved
420
c) Vapor
Vapor is a gas that produced by evaporation from a liquid. Solvents

readily evaporate and produce a measurable amount of vapor at room
temperature. Although generally invisible, vapors usually have a
detectable odor. Fast drying solvents such as trichloroethane and
acetone evaporates very quickly and produce significant amounts of
vapors. Most solvent vapors are heavier than air and tend to settle in
low-lying areas.
d) Fumes
When solid substance is melted some of it vaporizes. When this vapor

cools, suspended solid particles called fume particles are produced.
The term is most frequently used refer to metal fumes. For example,
welding fumes consist of primarily of suspended metal particles. E.g. of
known metal fumes are cadmium, lead and mercury.
e) Mist
A mist is formed when a liquid at room temperature is made airborne

by spraying, splashing, bubbling or some other form of agitation. A
good example is spray painting which transforms a liquid paint into a
fine mist.

All Right Reserved
421
f) Dust
Dusts are airborne particles released by the crushing, handling,

grinding or deterioration of solid materials. Wood dust, asbestos dust,
silica dust and cement dust are commonly found in construction.
2.2 Physical
A second major category of occupational health hazard is physical
hazards. These can be defined as different types of energy which may be
hazardous to people in the workplace. Some examples are noise,
temperature, radiation and vibration.
a) Noise
Sound waves emitted at high intensity by construction equipment can

lead to hearing loss. Noise has also been related to a range of
non-auditory effects including headaches, stress, increase blood
pressure, annoyance, nervousness and excitability.
b) Temperature
Extremes of temperature may cause body temperature to raise (heat

stress) or to fall (cold stress). Heavy work in high temperatures - for
instance, asphalt paving or roofing can produce such effects as muscle
cramps, dehydration, sudden collapse and unconsciousness. On the
other hand exposure to freezing temperatures can lead to fatigue,
irregular
breathing, lowered blood pressure, confusion and loss of
consciousness. Heat stress and cold stress are both life-threatening. If

not treated in time, they can be fatal.
All Right Reserved
422
c) Radiation
Both ionizing and non-ionizing radiation may be encountered in

construction. Ionizing is more hazardous because it can contribute
directly to cancer.
Ionizing - A common source is the emission of X-Rays and Gamma

Rays from equipment used to gauge the density and thickness of
pipes and to check welds.
Non-Ionizing - The major source of this type of radiation is

ultraviolet light from sunlight or welding. Also, workers on
telecommunication towers can be exposed to varying amount of
radio frequency energy, which may have effects on the central
nervous system, metabolism and the blood system. Lasers used for
surveying are a third possible source of non-ionizing radiation.
However, these are usually low-powered and do not present a
serious hazard unless viewed directly for an extended time.
d) Vibration
Vibration from some tools such as jackhammers and chainsaws can

cause loss of sensation in the hand and forearm. Whole body vibration
caused by operating heavy equipment is suspected causing back and
digestive problems.

All Right Reserved
423
2.3 Biological
Biological hazards are relatively minor concern in construction. However,
exposure to bacteria may occur in sewer work, while air handling systems
contaminated by bacteria and fungi can cause Legionnaires Disease and
other conditions. A fungus that grows on bird or bat dropping is responsible for a disease called histoplasmosis, producing flu-like symptoms. Contact may occur where buildings contaminated with droppings are being
renovated or demolished.
Fever cause by mosquitoes such as malaria and dengue are other hazards
that should not be neglected.
3.0 BASIC CONCEPT OF TOXICOLOGY

In order to understand the effects of health hazards to our body it is important to
understand the science of adverse effects of chemical or substances on living
organisms. This is known as toxicology.
The human body has natural defense systems which help to protect you against
many hazards (dangers). These defense systems also help the body to heal
(repair) itself when it gets injured or sick. However, there are hazards arising
from bacteria, viruses, chemicals, dusts, vapors, noise, extreme temperatures,
work processes, etc. to which you may be exposed (which are around you) at
work or in the general environment, that can break down (weaken) the body's
defense systems.

All Right Reserved
424
3.1 Routes of Entry

If you look at a diagram of the human
body you can see that it is exposed to
the outside world through a variety of
surfaces.
These
include
the
skin,
lungs, nose, mouth and the digestive,

urinary, and genital tracts. Hazardous
agen ts
(e .g.
ch emi cals
and
micro-organisms such as bacteria and

viruses) can get into the body through
any of these surfaces. The most
common routes of entry are:
through the lungs (inhalation);

through the skin (absorption); and
through the mouth (ingestion).
3.2 Toxic Effects
Once it has entered the body by one of the routes discussed, the health
hazards may have a toxic effect on the body system. The two major types
of effects are acute and chronic.

All Right Reserved
425
a) Acute Effect
Exposure to many occupational hazards causes the body to produce an

immediate obvious response, called an acute effect. Acute effects often
disappear soon after the exposure stops and are often reversible. An
example of an acute effect is the nausea, headache or vomiting a worker
might experience after using a solvent to clean auto parts. Acute effects
can be localized to one part of the body (such as a skin reaction from a
chemical), but they can also be systemic (if, for example, that chemical
also gets absorbed into the bloodstream, there can be effects on target
organs).
b) Chronic Effect
Some hazardous substances cause chronic effects, which usually appear a

long time after the exposure occurred and persist over time. A chronic
condition usually only appears after a long time because of the disease's
latency period (the period of time between the exposure and the first sign
of disease). Chronic conditions, such as many occupational cancers, may
take 20 or 30 years to develop.
Some chronic conditions develop after just a short exposure, whereas other chronic conditions only develop after repeated contact with a
substance or work process.
Like acute effects, chronic effects can be localized to one part of the body
(such as chronic lung disease which develops over years), but they can also be systemic.

All Right Reserved
426
For all diseases, it is better to prevent rather than treat the illness once it
has developed, but for chronic diseases such as cancer, prevention is
the only cure. With chronic diseases it is difficult to establish the cause of
the condition and even harder to get compensation. Thus it is important to
document all exposures to workers and maintain good records for at least
30 years.

All Right Reserved
427
4.0 COMMON HEALTH HAZARDS IN CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY

All Right Reserved
428
5.0 OCCUPATIONAL DISEASES IN CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY
5.1 Skin Diseases

Diseases of the skin represent a major proportion of occupational diseases. A
wide variety of agents encountered in the workplace may cause injury,
irritation, sensitisation, infection, discoloration or other changes in the skin of
the exposed worker. Some agents induce cancerous changes in the skin. The
term occupational dermatoses includes all of these abnormalities of the skin
resulting directly from, or aggravated by, the work environment.
The following predisposing factors may influence the development of skin

diseases:
poor personal hygiene;

the presence of other skin diseases; and
any injury which breaks the skin surface.
DERMATITIS is an inflammation of the skin which can be caused by
hundreds of workplaces substances like solvents (paints), epoxy resins, acids,
caustic substances, and metals. Dermatitis appears as redness, itchiness, or
scaling of the skin. There are two types of dermatitis:
primary irritation dermatitis (contact dermatitis), and

sensitization dermatitis (allergic dermatitis).

All Right Reserved
429
a) Contact Dermatitis is caused by friction,

heat or cold, acids, alkalis, irritant gases, and
vapors. Skin in contact with the chemical turns
red, becomes itchy, and may develop eczema
(collection of fluid droplets under the skins
surface). Typical hazards in construction include caustics, acids, many
chlorinated
solvents,
wet
concrete,
chromic
acid,
and
calcium
hydroxide.
b) Allergic Contact Dermatitis, on the other hand, is the result of an allergic reaction to a given substance. Sensitization may be the result of
prolonged or repeated contact and becomes established usually within 10
to 30 days.
Once sensitized, even a minute exposure can produce a severe reaction.

Substances like organic solvents (paints), chromic acid, and epoxy resins
can produce both primary and contact dermatitis. Sensitizers include epoxy
materials (especially the hardener), nickel, and chromium. Certain agents
such as coal tar and creosote can have a strong sensitizing effect when
combined with exposure to sunlightthey are known as photosensitizers.
5.2 Cancer
It's not well understood exactly how a chemical produces cancer. Some
carcinogens (cancer-causing substances) are thought to interact with the
genetic material of the cell; others may interact with the immune system; and
still others are thought to act with other agents, but not initiate cancer
themselves. Whatever the mechanism, the effect is very often delayed,
sometimes up to 30 years.

All Right Reserved
430
Defining a chemical as carcinogenic usually involves animal studies as a first

step. If the substance causes cancer in animals, particularly those that have
biological systems similar to humans, it is classed as a suspected
carcinogen. Some examples are benzene which causes leukemia, and
beryllium and arsenic tri oxide which cause lung cancer. Some chemicals have
also been shown to be cancer causing through industrial experience. These
include asbestos (cancer of the larynx, lung, and abdomen), vinyl c h l o ride
(liver cancer), coal tar pitch (skin cancer), chromium (lung cancer), and
benzidine (bladder cancer). All chemicals which have been classified as
carcinogens should be handled with extra care.
Inhaling asbestos dust has been shown to cause the following diseases:
asbestosis
lung cancer
mesothelioma (cancer of the lining of the chest and/or abdomen).
Asbestosis is a disease of the lungs caused by scar tissue forming around
very small asbestos fibers deposited deep in the lungs. As the amount of scar
tissue increases, the ability of the lungs to expand and contract decreases,
causing shortness of breath and a heavier workload on the heart. Ultimately,
asbestosis can be fatal.
Lung cancer appears quite frequently in people exposed to asbestos dust.

While science and medicine have not yet been able to explain precisely why or
how asbestos causes lung cancer to develop, it is clear that exposure to asbestos dust can increase the risk of contracting this disease.

All Right Reserved
431
Studies of asbestos workers have shown that the risk is roughly five times
greater than for people who are not exposed to asbestos.
Mesothelioma is a relatively rare cancer of the lining of the chest and/or

abdomen. While this disease is seldom observed in the general population, it
appears frequently in groups exposed to asbestos.
Other illnessesThere is also some evidence of an increased risk of cancer

of the stomach, rectum, and larynx. However, the link between asbestos
exposure and the development of these illnesses is not as clear as with lung
cancer or mesothelioma. The diseases described above do not respond well to
current medical treatment and, as a result, are often fatal.

All Right Reserved
432
6.0 BASIC CONCEPT OF INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE
6.1 Introduction
Industrial hygiene has been defined as that science and art devoted to the
anticipation, recognition, evaluation and control of those environmental
factors or stresses arising in or from the workplace, which may cause
sickness, impaired health and well-being, or significant discomfort among
workers or among the citizens of the community. industrial hygienists use
environmental monitoring and analytical methods to detect the extent of
workers exposure and employ engineering, work practice controls, and other
methods to control potential health hazards.
6.2 Anticipate Hazardous Conditions & Practices

This functions involves:
developing methods for:

anticipating and predicting hazards from experience, historical data and
other information sources such Chemical Safety Data Sheet, workplace
inspection, etc.

All Right Reserved
433
6.3 Recognize and Evaluate Hazardous Conditions & Practices

Once potential hazards have been identified, several steps can be taken to
evaluate the degree of hazard that may be present.
a) Environmental Monitoring
Odor Thresholds
Some people think that contaminants can be detected by their odor.
But some contaminants may have no odor. With other contaminants,
the odor threshold or lowest level at which most people can smell that
chemical may be well above the safe working level. For example, the
strong pungent odor of ammonia is not detectable until their concentration reaches 47ppm. This is almost twice the safe working level of
25ppm. A third problem is that many chemical odors you get used to
the smell and after a short time no longer detect it, thereby giving
yourself a false sense of security.
Air Sampling Instrumentation

A more accurate method of sampling for contaminants is to use sampling instruments. This come in two basic typesdirect and indirect.

All Right Reserved
434
Direct
reading
instrument
provide
immediate
readout
of
contaminant level at the point being sampled. They are usually

specific for only one chemical or physical agent and must therefore
be chosen on the basis of the contaminant suspected. They can be
portable or permanently located in areas where toxic atmosphere
are likely to occur
Indirect instrument collect samples for later laboratory analysis. Air

containing the contaminant to be measured may be drawn through
a collection device using a pump or through gases diffusion. The
choice of device depends on the type of contaminant in the air.
Unfortunately, these methods require laboratory analysis, meaning
a delay before the results are known. Such indirect method, however, usually provide more accurate results and can be used for a
large number of chemicals.
b) Health Surveillance
Employer should carry out health surveillance program when an

assessment indicates that health and safety surveillance is necessary to
protect employees health with regards to exposure to hazardous
workplace contaminants.
Only qualified Occupational Doctor should performed such surveillance.

He/she should determine the intervals of such surveillances.
Employer should keep and maintain record of such surveillances and

should allow employees access to the records.

All Right Reserved
435
6.4 Control Strategies

If work activities poses health hazards to the employees, steps must be taken
to control the hazards - at its source, along the path or at the employees.
The best method is at the source. This prevents the contaminants from
affecting other employees or reacting with other substances. In construction
two main strategies are engineering controls and personal protection.
a) Engineering Control
Substitution
This is a simple control whereby a less toxic chemicals or materials with
equivalent specifications is substituted for a more toxic chemical. A
common example is the substitution of fiberglass insulation for
asbestos insulation.
Isolation
A substance or procedure may be isolated or enclosed so that toxic
omission are not transported into the workplace. It may be as simple
as putting a lid on an open solvent container. Enclosures have been
built around compressors to reduce the noise level. However the
enclosure must not restrict access.
Worker is usually isolated from the hazard for example in quarry work,
the operator of a crusher can be isolated from the dust by a filtered air
-conditioned cab.

All Right Reserved
436
Change of Process
This is simply means doing the job in a way which is less hazardous.
For example brushing or rolling paint procedures much lower vapor
levels than spray painting. Similarly wet removal of asbestos releases
up to 100 times less dust than dry removal. The change should be
checked to ensure it is safer.
Ventilation
A common engineering control is to increase ventilation in the
workplace. This may be done by general ventilation using fans to move
large volumes of air, thereby increasing the air exchange. However,
the use of general ventilation is not suitable for highly toxic materials.
Local ventilation is more effective for toxic substances because it captures and removes the contaminants at their source.
b) Personal Protection
In construction , engineering controls are not always practical. Factors

such as constantly changing workplace and movement of equipment often
make personal protection the last line of defense. Although the hazards is
not removed, the individual can be protected from exposure.
To be effective personal protective equipment must be matched to the

hazard and properly used and maintained.

All Right Reserved
437
c) Hazard Communication
Chemical Inventory List

Maintain a Current List of Chemicals, Including Specific Uses.
Make the List Available to All Employees.
Make the List Available During Each Work Shift.
Chemical Safety Data Sheet
SECTION
CONTENTS
Product Identity
II
Hazardous Ingredients
III
Physical/Chemical Characteristics
IV
Fire/Explosion/Physical Hazard Data
Reactivity Data
VI
Health Hazards Data
VII
Precautions for Safe Handling and Use
VIII
Control Measures/Protection Information
IX
Additional Information/Special Precautions
Labeling
All Chemical Containers Will Be Labeled. Unless The Container Is a
Portable Container in the Control of A Specific Person for Their
Immediate Use.

All Right Reserved
438
Hazard Rating System
NFPA - NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION
HMIS - NATIONAL PAINT AND COATINGS ASSOCIATION - HAZARDOUS MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM

All Right Reserved
439

b) Occupational Safety & Health (Control of Industrial Major Accident Hazards) Regulations 1996.
c) Occupational Safety & Health (Classification, Packaging & Labeling) Regulations
1997.
d) Occupational Safety & Health (Us and Standards of Exposure of Chemicals
Hazardous to Health) Regulations 2000.
e) Part II - Safety, Health & Welfare, Factories and Machinery Act 1967.
f) Factories and Machinery (Safety, Health & Welfare) Regulations 1970.
g) Factories and Machinery (Lead) Regulations 1984.
h) Factories and Machinery (Asbestos Processes) Regulations 1986.
i) Factories and Machinery (Noise Exposure) Regulations 1989.
j) Factories and Machinery (Mineral Dust) Regulations 1989.

All Right Reserved
440

All Right Reserved
441
1.0
INTRODUCTION
What is first aid? First aid is the skilled application of accepted basic treatment for
someone who is injured or has been taken ill until he is placed in the care of
qualified medical practitioner or other skilled aid, or taken to the hospital.
Basic first aid concentrates on the followings:
a) Breathing
Any unconscious incident, the protective mechanism, which prevents solids and
fluids entering the windpipe, does not function.
b) Bleeding
Visible bleeding which is more than minimal should be controlled

immediately by direct pressure.
Embedded object.
Concealed bleeding.
c) Shock
Shock is a condition arising from stress or injury producing an insufficient supply of blood to the brain and other vital organs. This causes lessening activities
of the vital functions of the body. It may accompany injuries, bleeding, severe
pain or sudden illness. The severity of the shock depends upon the nature and
extent of the injury or other causes and may vary from a feeling of faintness
even to sudden death.

All Right Reserved
442
d) Fractures
Closed when surface of skin in not broken.

Open wound leading down to fracture, or fractured ends bone protrude
through the skin allowing germs access to soft tissues and broken bone.
e) Crush injuries
This is a condition, which may cause acute kidney failure, especially if the
casualty has been crushed or trapped more than an hour by some heavy
weights (e.g. mason or machinery). Crush injuries involve soft tissues (e.g.
muscles and skin) and sometimes bones are fractured.
f) Unconsciousness
Unconsciousness is the result of an injury to, or an interference with, the

functions of the brain. Some cases are head injuries; stroke; asphyxia; epilepsy;
poisoning; shock; fainting; and diabetic emergencies.
g) Burns and scalds
These problems arise when unprotected body parts come in contact with hot
objects or suffering electrical burns.
h) Hot weather problems
Heat exhaustion - The most vulnerable persons to this condition are those
who are un-acclimatized to high temperature and humidity.
Heat stroke - The onset of this condition is more sudden and may be
preceded by heat exhaustion.
All Right Reserved
443
2.0 MAJOR COMPONENTS OF FIRST AID

There are three major components of workplace first aid facilities, namely:
First aider;
First aid box/first aid room;
First aid equipment/manual.
2.1 First Aider
a) Number Required
TABLE 1
DESCRIPTION
Workplace with low risk

hazards (e.g. office)
Workplace with high risk

hazards (e.g. chemical
plant, construction sites,
etc.)
Workplace with more than
400 workers
Logging
NO. OF WORKERS
NO. OF FIRST AIDER
< 20
21 - 150
> 150
2 for every 150 or part

thereof
< 20
20 or more
> 400
2 for every 20 or part thereof

2 for every 150 or part
thereof and in addition 1
state registered nurse or
medical assistant
1 for every tree falling
gang
b) Shift Work
If works are to be carried out in shifts, sufficient number of first aider as

specified in table 1 should be provided each shift.

All Right Reserved
444
c) Worksite With More Than One Employer

For a worksite with more than one employers are carrying out their
activities, the principal employer should provide and maintain adequate
and appropriate first aid equipment, facilities and personnel.
d) Information About First Aider

Information pertaining the names and locations of first aider on worksite
should be displayed at prominent places. First aider should also be provided with a form of identification for easy recognition by personnel on
site.
e) Selection
Personnel selected for attending competent first aider training should be:
mature and responsible;

remain calm in emergency;
free to leave their work immediately to respond to an emergency; and
physically fit.
f) Training
First aiders must be trained by recognized institution ( by Minister of
Health) and awarded with certificate of competency in first aid treatment
upon completion of such trainings.
Competent first aiders are required to attend continuous trainings

particularly when three are changes on workplace hazards and risks.
All Right Reserved
445
The competency certificate is only valid for three (3) years except for
hazardous industries where it is only valid for one (1) year. In general
the validity of the certificate may be subjected to specific requirement,
such as:
refresher training;
evidence of proficiency in cardiopulmonary resuscitation.
Approved first aid training providers are as listed in Table 2.
TABLE 2
ORGANISATION
ADDRESS
FRLS Committee
c/o Emergency & Trauma Department

Kuala Lumpur General Hospital
Jalan Pahang
50586 KUALA LUMPUR
Malaysian Red Crescent Society
JKR 23, Jalan Nipah

KUALA LUMPUR
St. John Ambulance, Malaysia
41, Jalan Shelly

KUALA LUMPUR
g) Responsibilities
Management of Casualty
Workplace competent first aider has an important role to play in
managing an injured worker or in a case of sudden collapse. He
should:

All Right Reserved
446
assess the situation without endangering his own life;

identify the injuries or recognize the sudden collapse;
give immediate first aid treatment, keeping in mind that a casualty
may have more than one injury;
for more than one casualty, recognize the priority of

administration of first aid treatment to the more seriously injured;
and
arrange without delay for the injured worker(s) to be sent to a

doctor, hospital or home, according to the seriousness of his
condition.
The first aiders responsibility ends when the casualties are handed over to the care of a doctor, nurse or other appropriate persons.
Maintenance of Treatment Record

The first aider must keep and maintain a record of the casualty and
treatment made by him. These records must be kept the employer
for a period of five years.
The record may include the following information:
the immediate treatment;

details about the incident/accident including information about the
work process involved;
details about the injury or work-related illness;

any referral arrangements, for example local medical service,
ambulance or hospital; and
subsequent casualty management.

All Right Reserved
447
Maintenance of First Aid Facilities

The first aider has to ensure that only first aid equipment kept in the
first aid box. Periodic check must be carried out to ensure contents of
the first aid box are replenished and adequate.
Workplace safety and health committee will also carry out such
checks.
2.2 First Aid Box

a) Design
First aid box should be made of sturdy material and be portable so that it
can be taken to the site of an incident. The boxes should be clearly
marked with a green crescent on a white background.
b) Location
Adequate first aid boxes must be placed in clearly identifiable,

well-illuminated and easily accessible locations on worksite. The boxes
must be kept locked and responsible person keeps keys during working
hours. All personnel on site must be informed on the locations of the first
aid boxes.
c) Contents
Adequate contents materials for first aid treatment of sufficient quantity

must be in the first aid box. Frequent checks must be carried out in
order to ensure the boxes are fully equipped and all items are useable.
All Right Reserved
448
No other material should be kept in the boxes. Recommended contents

for a first aid box are as indicated in Table 3.
TABLE 3
CONTENTS
1
2
3
Small individual medicated or unmedicated sterilised dressings, for fingers.

Medium size individual medicated or unmedicated sterilised dressings, for hand
and feet.
Large individual medicated or unmedicated sterilised dressings, for other injured
parts.
< 10
WORKERS
11-50
WORKERS
> 50
WORKER
12
24
12
12
Assorted adhesive wound dressing Pressure Bandage No. 15.
10
15
Triangular bandage 90 X 90 X 130cm.
10
15
i)
Roller bandage 25mm.
12
ii)
Roller bandage 50mm.
12
Adhesive plaster.
Absorbent sterilised cotton wool, in 0.5oz. packet or cotton wool strip contained
in cotton wool dispenser.
Suitable splints and wool or other material for padding.
- a sufficient supply -
10
Approved eye wash (eye ointment or eye drop).
11
Individual sterilised eye-pad in separate sealed packets.
12
Rubber or pressure bandage.
13
14
A 2% alcoholic solution or iodine, or 1% aqueous solution of gentian violet in a

stoppered 2ox. Bottle.
A bottle of smelling salt with the dose and mode of administration indicated on
the label.
15
Blunt nosed surgical scissors.
16
Safety pins.
12
24
36
17
Crepe bandage
i) 5cm
ii) 7.5cm
18
Surgical tapes : 3M (hypoallergenic) 5cm.
19
Gloves disposable free size.
12
24
20
CPR Mask.

All Right Reserved
449
2.3 First Aid Room

A first aid room must be provided on a worksite when there are 150 or more
workers being employed.
a) Design
The room must be easily identifiable by posting suitable sign outside the
room.
The room must be large enough to accommodate a couch and ample

space for people to move about. An emergency light must be provided in
the room.
Materials used for walls, floors and ceiling must be of materials, which do
not collect dust and can be cleaned easily. Particular consideration must
be given to the floor finishing must be of non-slip material.
Atmosphere in the room temperature and humidity must be maintained

at a comfortable level. Privacy must also be considered, if necessary all
windows must be of obscured material.
b) Location
In identifying suitable location for a first aid room, the following factors
must be given due consideration:

All Right Reserved
450
proximity to toilet;
proximity to lifts and main passageways which a wide enough to
allow a stretcher, wheelchair or carrying chair through;
accessibility to work areas; and

accessibility to car park, so as to facilitate transfer of injured persons
to an ambulance.
c) Items in the Room
Recommended facilities to be provided for a first aid room are as the

followings:
sink with running potable water;

paper towels;
smooth-topped working surfaces;
adequate supply of sterile dressings and other materials for
wound treatment;
stretcher(s);
splints;
clinical thermometer;
a couch with pillow and blanket;
a suitable store for first aid equipment;
soap and nail brush;
clean garments for first aiders;
suitable refuse container;
pocket mask;
adult cervical collar;

All Right Reserved
451
torch light; and

portable oxygen set 2 sets.
In addition a flow chart of the treatment processes to be posted for convenience of workers if they have to wait for treatment.

a) Section 15(1) of the Occupational Safety and Health Act 1994
b) Section 25 of the Factories and Machinery Act 1967 and Regulation 38 of the
Factories and Machinery (Safety, Health & Welfare) Regulations 1970
c) Section 7 Occupational Health Services, Code of Practice for Safety & Health
At Work (MS 426 : 1994).
d) Guidelines of First Aid Facilities in the Workplace (DOSH 1996).

All Right Reserved
452

SSS 2010

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

SSS 2010

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

This Material is for Training Purposes Only

COPYRIGHT : KLIA CONSULTANCY SERVICES SDN. BHD. 2004

This Material is for Training Purposes Only

Occupier place of work

This Material is for Training Purposes Only

Occupier place of work

Site Safety Supervisor

Machinery (Building Operations & Works of Engineering Construction) (Safety)

This Material is for Training Purposes Only

2.0 WHY BOTHER WITH OSH?

3.0 WHAT ARE THE LEGAL PROVISIONS?

This Material is for Training Purposes Only

From the aforementioned Section and the Acts philosophy of self-regulations, it

the severity of the hazard or risk in question;

Initially most of many of them adopted the Western Australias Occupational

Recently, International Labor Organization has introduced another Occupational

This Material is for Training Purposes Only

4.0 DUTIES AND TASKS OF SITE SAFETY SUPERVISORS

This Material is for Training Purposes Only

4.2 Regulation 26, Factories & Machinery (Building Operations

This Material is for Training Purposes Only

This Material is for Training Purposes Only

This Material is for Training Purposes Only

This Material is for Training Purposes Only

The aforementioned provisions result in one comprehensive and integrated system

3.0 SCOPE OF APPLICATION

4.0 SALIENT PROVISIONS

Section 15 Employers are responsible as far as practicable to

Arrangements must be made to ensure safe and healthy use, operation,

Section 16 Employer must also prepare a written statement of his/her

Section 17 & 18 - Employers must conduct their work activities in a

Section 26 No charge can be levied on any employee for anything done

Section 27 No employee can be discriminated, dismissed or injured in

This Material is for Training Purposes Only

Section 30 - An employer with forty (40) or more workers, or when

soning or occupational disease, which has occurred or likely to occur at

b) Duties of Self-Employed Persons

A self-employed person has the same general duties as described for an

Section 24 - Every employee must take reasonable care of his/her own

Section 25 - Nobody shall intentionally, recklessly or negligently interfere

This Material is for Training Purposes Only

d) Duties of Designers, Manufacturers, Importers and Suppliers

Designers, manufacturers, importers or suppliers of plant

Designers, manufacturers, importers or suppliers of sub-

This Material is for Training Purposes Only

4.3 Codes of Practice

Promulgation of codes of practice can be initiated by the industries, the

4.4 Enforcement & Liability

This Material is for Training Purposes Only

5.0 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY & HEALTH (EMPLOYERS SAFETY &

6.0 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY & HEALTH (CONTROL OF INDUSTRIAL

Key elements of Part 1 are:

application of these Regulations shall cover all industry except nuclear

This Material is for Training Purposes Only

Part III, describes requirements on demonstration of safe operations and review of

Arrangements for notification of major accidents are outlined under Part V.

Part VI, elaborates on the penalty for non-compliances.

There are five Schedules under these Regulations, namely:

Schedule 1 Indicative Criteria

This Material is for Training Purposes Only

COMMITTEE) REGULATIONS 1996

composition of the committee chairman, secretary, employers representatives

recommendations for corrective actions;